Home

Kyocera 3035 Copier User Manual

1. Inch specifications Default setting Counter Touch the Close key once again The touch panel will return 7 to the screen in step 2 Touch the End key The touch panel tc a j Language Management pi t will return to the contents of the Basic tab aon Language p ceny i f Bypass BOX Counter i setting j Management check j i Machine Document Hegister Print User i default Management orig size y report j Adjustment By 3 Reset 4 sw Metric specifications Default setting Counter efault setting Copy Language Management default guag gt g i f Bypass Hard Disk Counter i setting Management Bj check j f Machine Document Hegister Print User i default gt Management orig size y report gt Adjustment 3 Touch the Others Standard key Inch specifications Default setting Counter orno Inch Metric specifications Default setting Counter ypass setting Paper size Unit Paper type Plain Eee i Hitmen paper type W f 7 88 9 Touch the Select size key The Select size screen will be displayed Inch specifications Default setting Counter Paper Size Paper size Paper type l Detection a SIZE gt ssn paper type P Metric specifications Default setting Counter Bypass setting Paper size Auto d Detection Input size Others Standard Touch the key th
2. 4 Job queue Displays information about each job in the queue The job at the top of the list is that job that is currently being printed The rest of the jobs will be printed in order from the top down A LJ icon under the Job heading indicates a copy job a icon indicates a print job and a s icon indicates a fax job 2 Move ahead key Touching this key moves the currently selected highlighted job upward in the job queue A job can be moved as far as the second highest position in the list In this case print out for that job will begin as soon as the current job is completed This is only available when the optional Hard Disk is installed on this copier 3 Move behind Move down key Touching this key moves the currently selected highlighted job downward in the job queue This is only available when the optional Hard Disk is installed on this copier 4 Interrupt print key Touching this key interrupts the job that is currently being printed and start print out for the currently selected highlighted job The selected job will be moved to the top of the list Cancel Delete key Touching this key cancels the currently selected highlighted job and deletes it from the job queue This is only available when the optional Hard Disk is installed on this copier 6 22 Metric specifications Input source Original Set Registration State Copy 100 1
3. Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS 3 Use the keypad to enter the 4 digit management code 3 Making box management default settings The factory default setting for 30 com copiers is 3000 for 40 cpm copiers is 4000 and for 50 com copiers is 5000 Perform the following procedure that corresponds to the desired If the entered code matched the registered one the setting Document Management screen will be displayed Document list print out Inch specifications Enter the administrator number 1 Touch the Print the list key under the box Form Box Shared Data Box or Synergy Print Box for which you want to print out the document list Inch specifications Document Management ment Management Shared Data Box Synergy Print Box Form box Print Box Print the list editing j the list Metric specifications Enter the administrator number i Keset Document Keset Box save term Box i Default setting Shared Data Box Synergy Print Box Form box 4 Touch the key that corresponds to the desired box management default setting i Heset Document Heset Inch specifications 2o Leo 2 A document list will be printed out for that box once print out is completed the touch panel will return to the screen in step Shared Data Box Synergy Print Box Form box ETE 3 Touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the LT a Deraull setting screen
4. ccccccccccceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeaeaeaeaeaeaeeenenenes 8 3 PUTO Sleep TUNCHOMN ccs onscsavewtnceitecteseunsaeeatoacecasvaacesavenesseeieeonestne 4 11 Auto sleep ON OFF machine default setting eee 7 57 Auto sleep time machine default Setting ccccceeeeseeeseeneeees 7 47 Automatic drawer cassette Switching function cccccesseeeeeeees 2 4 B Background exposure adjustment copy default setting 7 67 BASIC OPERATION seotescececcenesesuntvessessecarecantuae ii 4 1 Batch scanning MOOS cpencsriscaiesarscerussasdnedinsiadousossaeiie a 5 47 Book erase Mode aisticcaniccecesiehdcecsadievesnessicadecdenseevedeextteadcodsncoiensends 5 11 Book to Booklet mode s deccenccsconcasscnsaznessonesecedssdenendecenseinonansaanssediness 5 26 BOOKIET SUC MING MOE sssi R 5 22 Border erase modes ccscerecesscnntntddsunentcostemsnchddeaesadeseanconianseteeceeees 5 11 Box management default settings 0seeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 94 Built in Finisher n eoaannnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnrrrrnnnnrennnrrrnnnrrnnnnrennnne 8 9 C CAUTION LABELS ccccccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeauseaeaeaeaeeaaaas 1 1 Centering Image shift mode s ncscccccceseancsdcnaceocenecevenaradersenndsdecvdvaxseeses 5 8 Changing a registered program NAME ccccccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeess 5 51 Changing the copy management default settings e 7 25 Changing the energy saving mode
5. Document Management key amp indicator lamp Press this key to light the lamp in that key when you want to use the document management functions of the copier The optional Hard Disk must be installed on this copier in order to use this function See page 6 1 2 3 Section 2 NAMES OF PARTS Initial mode at the end of warm up or when the Reset key is pressed In the default settings prepared at the factory paper of the same size as the original is selected automatically and the copy magnification ratio is set to 100 1 1 under the auto paper selection mode the number of copies to be made is set to 1 and the image quality is set to the text photo mode NOTES e The default settings for the initial mode can be changed using the corresponding copy default settings procedure e It is possible for you to change the default setting for the copy exposure in the initial mode from the manual exposure mode to the auto exposure mode See Exposure mode on page 7 63 Auto clear function Once a designated amount of time has passed after copying stops between 10 and 270 seconds the auto clear function will automatically engage and the copier will return to the same settings as those after warm up initial mode settings However the copy exposure mode and the image quality mode will not change Copies can continually be made using the same settings copy mode number of copies and expos
6. ee 3 2 3 Loading paper into the multi bypass tray ee 3 3 Section 4 BASIC OPERATION ccsseeeeee 4 1 1 Basic copying procedure scisseussvierscnmactinaneveceeomonrommenntnteuets 4 1 2 Enlarging reducing the copy image cccccecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 5 1 Auto magnification selection mode c c seeseeeeeeeeeeeees 4 5 2 ZOOM MOE Sesesteccessteeasecczossnssencesseancceeencassescescnasesexwsceeicees 4 6 3 Preset zoom MOOS csc e ca caseecneeneedceecnicatevsnseenedeevecischececeaes 4 7 4 XY zoom mode setae nessa actos sasvencndesen eedeesasseusadsaaccencsesestanws 4 8 Se ACIP CO ING a censsacacicsamadecetensnnad tresanstetesnnitvetaneuametsdeeinetnanaees 4 9 4 Job reservation cedececceessanensenscdecnsensnsarsansnandecedsanncencasehenbexedseaede 4 10 Energy saving Modes cssseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeseseseesseesseesesees 4 11 Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS 5 1 1 Making 2 sided copies from various types of originals 2 sided COPY MOJEG sorser aE eE EEE E ie 5 1 1 Making 2 sided copies from a 2 sided original 5 1 2 Making 2 sided copies from an open faced books etc original ccccccesssseseeeeeeeeeeees 5 1 3 Making 2 sided copies from one sided originals 5 2 2 Copying two page originals onto separate sheets Page separation Split copy modes seseeeeeeeeeeeee eeen 5 4 1 Page separation Split co
7. key or the key to change each of the displayed sizes Y width and X length to the desired settings If you do not want to register a custom original size touch the Off key Inch specifications Touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 3 Touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 Touch the End key The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS 5 Drum refresh Perform the following procedure if the copy image becomes blurred or Touch the Drum refresh key The Drum refresh screen will if white spots which are not on the originals appear on the copies The be displayed drum refreshing operation will take approximately 5 minutes fs g oP PP y Inch specifications 1 Set 11 x 8 1 2 11 x 17 A4 or A3 size paper on the multi Default setting Counter bypass tray 2 With the content of the Basic tab displayed press the Default Setting Counter key The Default setting screen will be displayed Metric specifications Default setting Counter Drum eren anagement Interrupt D NO vou DOO x Clear 3 Touch the User adjustment key Inch specifications Default setting Counter a rone d Bypass BOX Counter i setting j Management Bj check Machine Document Register Print User F default Managemen
8. Separation B j OMANE j Exposure Reduce Auto Batch mode Enlarge 4 Selection scanning Orig image Margin Forms Sort Border Cover Basic 2 User c J __ Function _ Program Metric specifications Ready to copy aao l 100 Select 2 sided Exposure Reduce Auto Large of mode Enlarge selection originals Image Margin Page Form qualit Imag shift numbering i overla j Sort Erase Cover Finished Mode Mode j Booklet E Program 4 Select the size of the originals If you want to select a standard scanning size touch the key that corresponds to the desired size and then go directly to step 9 If you want to select a standard size other than those displayed go to the next step If you want to select the dimensions of the scan area manually go directly to step 7 Inch specifications P i e Ready to copy 10 l 8x14 11x15 Select original size Others NOTE If you have registered a custom original size you will be able to select that size for use in this mode See 4 Original size registration on page 7 90 5 Touch the Other stand Size Others stand Size key 6 Select the size of the originals and then proceed to step 9 7 8 9 Inch specifications P i S Ready to copy H 11x17 82x13 Touch the Input size key The screen to set the dimensions of the scan area will be displayed Based on the left rear c
9. 4 Touch the key or the key to change each of the displayed sizes length and width to the desired settings In metric specification copiers the desired sizes can also be entered directly by touching the corresponding Keys key and then using the keypad Inch specifications Default setting Counter Metric specifications Default setting Counter Paper type time paper type 7 87 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS 5 Touch the Select paper type key 2 Selecting other standard sizes The Select paper type screen will be displayed Perform the following procedure when you want to print out onto other 6 Touch the key that corresponds to the type of paper to be standard sizes of special paper used and then touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 4 With the content of the Basic tab displayed press the Default setting Counter key The Default setting screen will be displayed Inch specifications Default setting Counter E 4 Default Setting Management Interrupt O arenc A Metric specifications Default setting Counter Select paper type areng Reeves Colour Enveiope Custom f customs 2 Touch the Bypass setting key Rough Preprinted Prepuncnea Customs f cusomz The Bypass setting screen will be displayed vem i Bona Letterhead rhea custom om customs om
10. Metric specifications t Clean the slit glass for original fed 1 Open the document processor 2 Clean the surface of narrower glass located at left with a dry cloth 3 Please close the document processor Press END key If the slit glass is dirty black line will appear on the copy Cleaning the platen Lift open the original cover Wipe the platen with a soft cloth dampened with alcohol or a mild detergent Never use thinner or other organic solvents for this purpose Cleaning the separator NOTE To keep the best copying quality perform cleaning periodically approximately once a month using the following procedure 1 Open the front cover If soiling such as black lines appear on the copy while using the optional Document Processor the slit glass is soiled Wipe the slit glass with a soft dry cloth Never use water thinner organic solvents or alcohol 10 1 Section 10 MAINTENANCE AND OPERATION INFORMATION 2 Remove the blue cleaning brush Cleaning the transfer roller 1 3 Pull up the left cover 1 handle to open the left cover 1 2 4 Clean the separator by moving the cleaning brush from left and right several times along the separator as shown in the illustration 3 5 Once the cleaning operation is completed return the cleaning brush to the copier and close both the left cover 1 and the front cover 10 2 Open the front cover Pull up the left cov
11. 00000015 5th Sales Dept i 00000016 6th Sales Dept 00000017 7th Sales Dept poes NOTE It is possible for you to change the order of how the list of ID codes is displayed To so touch the Order of indication key and then touch the Sort by code key and select either 1 9 or 9 1 or the Sort by Name key and select either A Z or Z A as appropriate 4 Change the restrictions for using the copier under that department ID code as desired Inch specifications ist Sales Dept Setting item Value Printer limitation Output limitation No limit Scanner limitation No limit Fax Transm Limitation No limit Metric specifications 1st Sales Dept Setting item Value Copy limitation LA On Printer limitation On Output limitation No limit v Scanner limitation No limit Fax Transm Limitation No limit Change y NOTE For information on how to change restrictions refer to Setting the restrictions for use on page 7 7 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Touch the Close key 4 Checking the copy management counts The touch panel will return to the screen in step 3 Inch ificati nch specifications Check all departments Perform the following procedure when you want to check the total i number of copies made under all department ID codes as a whole 4 etting item i alue 4 3 i print out a copy manag
12. 3 To set the maximum number of documents that can be Copying restrictions transmitted under this ID code touch the Counter limit key Perform the following procedure when you want to set the maximum and proceed to the next step number of copies that can be made under the corresponding To allow unlimited fax transmission touch the No limit key department ID code and to cancel fax transmission privileges completely touch the Is not permitted key and proceed to step 5 fea NOTES Inch specifications e This setting will only be available when On is selected as the Copier function management ON OFF setting Fax Transm Limitation 1 Access the screen that contains the copy restriction setting items See Register new department ID codes on page 7 4 or Change restrictions for use on page 7 20 Inch specifications Management edit Department Order of indication 2nd Sales Dept Mgt Inf Limit I 3rd Sales Dept correction in use i Ath Sales Dept 00000015 5th Sales Dept Delete 00000016 6th Sales Dept 00000017 7th Sales Dept l Default setting Management NOTE Metric specifications If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it touch the Back key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 Beeps i l M Inf Limi 2nd Sales Dept 3rd Sales Dept LA Ath Sales Dept 00000015 5th Sales Dept Lv a 00000016 6th Sales D
13. 4 Touch the key that corresponds to the desired procedure The setting screen for that procedure will be displayed Inch specifications Managem Total Register Sett Management Each Mot Management Management total j Total j edit gt Def Set Metric specifications Managem Total Register Sett Management Management Each Mot total Total Management Management edit h Def Set h NOTES e It is possible for you to change the 4 digit management code See Changing the management code on page 7 56 e Perform the following procedure that corresponds to the desired setting 7 3 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS 3 Editing copy management information Register new department ID codes Perform the following procedure when you want to register department ID codes up to 8 digits per ID code and the corresponding department name and set certain restrictions for using the copier under that ID code 1 Access the copy management menu screen See Accessing the copy management menu screen Inch specifications Default setting Counter Management y Bypass BOX Counter setting i Management check Machine Document Register Print User i default Management Pj orig size report Adjustment Metric specifications Default setting Counter ln Bypass Hard DISK Counter setting Management check Machine Document Register Print User default Management Pj orig size s
14. 5000 Sets whether or not to have the auto sleep function On Off automatically engage and turn the copier OFF O if no operation is performed on the copier for a designated amount of time If auto sleep interferes with your copying operations turn this function OFF However it is recommended that you try to set a longer time interval until auto sleep engages before you actually turn it OFF For more detailed information on turn the auto sleep function see page 4 11 Changes the energy saving mode that will be entered into when the Energy Saver key is pressed See 5 Energy saving modes on page 4 11 for more information This setting is displayed when the optional Printer Kit or Printer Scanner Kit is installed If you are using a standard copier or if the optional Fax Kit is installed in your copier you can press the Energy Saver key to engage the Low power mode Low power mode Sleep mode Low power 7 58 mode Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS 2 Accessing the machine default settings 3 Use the keypad to enter the 4 digit management code The factory default setting for 30 com copiers is 3000 for Perform the following procedure when you want to access the 40 cpm copiers is 4000 and for 50 cpm copiers is 5000 screens for each of the various machine default settings ee Inch specifications Enter the administrator number 1 With the content of the Basic tab displaye
15. FEER LaLJLE Auto Exposure Exposure ode Si e Ready to copy aao Add toner to resume copying 100 1 Merge copy 1 Bee h LIJ LE Auto Exposure Exposure mode Function PR cre 3 Grasp the handle on the toner container push the left cover 1 handle up again and gently lift the toner container DO NOT attempt to incinerate the toner container or the waste toner box Dangerous sparks may cause burns A CAUTION D gt DO NOT attempt to force open or destroy the toner container or the waste toner box 1 Open the front cover 10 3 section 10 MAINTENANCE AND OPERATION INFORMATION 4 9 6 7 10 4 Take out the new toner container from the bag and then tap 8 Remove the waste toner box it on the top 5 to 6 times Thoroughly shake the toner container in the direction of the arrow ten times or more to loosen and mix the toner inside Grasp the handle on the toner container and insert the toner A Ci U O N container along the rail of the copier DO NOT attempt to incinerate the toner container or the waste toner box Dangerous sparks may cause burns A CAUTION DO NOT attempt to force open or destroy the toner container or the waste toner box Hold the toner container by hands and fully insert it into the copier Section 10 MAINTENANCE AND OPERATION INFORMATION lt Cleaning the related parts gt 1 3 Pull the electrostatic section out as far as it wil
16. Finish Page Denominator Check direction of original top side Last page Auto Setting Set denom H Left top Q last page gt inator 7 H corner Paper size Set HAAD Close Check direction of original pag 1 4 Setting Setting ist page 4 Startpage fi Last page Denominator i Back Edge OP I E corner Start Last page Auto Setting Set last page j Denomin Dj 9 Touch the key or the key to select the first page number that will be printed The desired page number can also be entered directly by touching the keys Keys key and then using the keypad Inch specifications Paper size Ready to copy LY Baat F 1 999 Check direction Check direction of original top side Metric specifications Paper size F Ready 0K 0 0 AAD Check direction Check direction of original 1 999 E aa Back Edge Left top corner i 1 Touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 8 5 17 section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS 1 1 If you want the last page number that is printed to be ona 1 Touch the key or the key to select counting from the copy other than that for the last original touch the Setting final copy how many pages you do NOT want to have page last page key The Setting last page screen will be numbers printed on displayed
17. R led User choice Function Program Paper Size Set AAD 100 Auto Exposure i E i P d Exposu Reduce Sort 4 mode Enlarge Finished i re ncti Touch the key or the key to change the displayed magnification ratio to the desired setting The desired magnification ratio can also be entered directly by touching the keys Keys key and then using the keypad Inch specifications Paper size LU 11x81 154 77 51 x8 2 gt 8 x14 11x17 gt 8 x14 f 129 64 8 x11 911x17 11x17 38 ox11 400 f 121 50 8 x14 gt 11x17 f 11x17 gt 5 2x8 Paper size LIAAD 141 A49A3 75 A5 3A 4 11x15 gt A 4 127 170 A3sA4 Folio gt A 3 A4 gt A5 400 106 50 i 11x15 9A 3 i 200 90 25 i A59A3 Folio gt A 4 Paper size LIAAD 100 141 A49A3 81 B 4 gt A 4 B 52B 4 B 5 gt A 5 j 122 A 42B 4 70 A 32A 4 i A53B 5 B 42B 5 B4 gt A3 50 B 5 gt A 4 Press the Start key to begin the copying procedure 3 Preset zoom mode With this mode the magnification ratio can be set to one of the pre set ratios Available magnification ratios Inch specification Reduction 25 50 64 77 78 Enlargement 121 129 154 200 400 11 x 17 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 11 x 17 8 1 2 x 11 11 x 17 8 1 2 x 14 8 1 2 x 14 8 1 2 x 11 8 1 2 x 14 gt 11 x 17 8 1 2 x 11 11 x 17
18. l Default setting 7 43 Paper type drawer cassette No 1 No 4 Perform the following procedure to set the type of paper that is loaded in drawers cassettes No 1 through No 4 1 Display the Machine default screen See 2 Accessing the machine default settings on page 7 41 Inch specifications Default setting Counter sr Bypass BOX Counter setting Management Bj check s Machine Document Register Print User default Management Bj orig size s report Adjustment py Language Copy default gt Metric specifications Default setting Counter Bypass Hard Disk Counter setting Management Pj check gt Machine Document Register Print User default Management orig size s report Adjustment By 2 Select one of the Paper type settings 1st drawer cassette through 4th drawer cassette in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the Change key The screen to set the paper type for that drawer cassette will be displayed Inch specifications Default setting Counter Default menu i Setting mode Paper type 1st drawer Plain Paper type 2nd drawer Plain Paper type 3rd drawer Plain Paper type 4th drawer Plain Check bypass sizing Off Change y l Default setting Metric specifications Default setting Counter Default menu i Setting mode l Paper type 2nd cassette Plain Paper type 3rd cas
19. screen will be displayed Inch specifications Default setting Counter Default menu Sort Auto Rotation Default margin width Default erase width Preset limit Metric specifications Setting mode Sort On Offset Off Rotate Left 1 4 0 Border 1 4 Center 1 2 999 Set Default setting Counter Default menu Sort Auto Rotation Default margin width Default erase width Preset limit l Default setting 7 78 Setting mode Sort On Group Off Rotate Left 6mm Omm Border 6mm Center 12mm 999 Set E Touch the Sort On key under Sort if you want to make the Sort mode the default setting in the initial mode Inch specifications Select default mode for sort ON or OFF Sort Offset 4 Touch the On 1 set key under Offset Group if you want to make the Finished mode the default setting in the initial mode e In metric specification copiers if you select Sort Off under Sort the 1 set key that appears under Group will change to the Output each page key NOTE If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it touch the Back key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 5 Touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 6 Touch the Close key once again The touch panel will return to the Default setting screen 7 Touch the End
20. 7 and keys Touch these keys when you want to move the cursor Del prev key Touch this key when you want to delete the character to the left of the cursor 9 Stop key Touch this key when you want to cancel character input and return to the previous screen End key Touch this key when you want to register the entered information 7 104 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Metric specifications Capital keyboard Letter keyboard Q Entry field Displays entered information 2 Capital key Touch this key when you want to enter uppercase letters 3 Letter key Touch this key when you want to enter lowercase letters 4 Symbol 1 key Touch this key when you want to enter certain symbols 5 Symbol 2 key Touch this key when you want to enter certain symbols 6 Space key Touch this key when you want to enter a space 7 AllDel key Touch this key when you want to delete all characters that have ieee oer er Ae Stree A been entered to this point lt and keys Touch these keys when you want to move the cursor 9 Del prev key Touch this key when you want to delete the character to the left of the cursor Stop key Touch this key when you want to cancel character input and return to the previous screen 41 End key Touch this key when you want to register the entered information 7 105 Sectio
21. F Ready to Job build s St When select On data can be saved You can recall and re print at anytime You can set the password to secure saved document Metric specifications F Ready to Job build Set original Press Start key When select On job can be saved You can recall and re print at anytime You can set a password to secure saved document Making the settings for the first original A in the illustration on page 5 57 The multi bypass is to be selected for color paper feed under the Select paper screen Touch the Select paper key The Select paper screen will be displayed Inch specifications Fy Ready to Job build Place originals then press Start ke Job Build Step1 lia 1 sided 2 sided copy ae oe y 1 sided ae oe y pe 2 sided Back E l ae ee a set Metric specifications Fy Ready to Job build Sta AE in et Eem 1 sided 2 sided Copy Insert FE eae 1 sided l blank page FE ae 2 sided jo eny AMS Back e l Ere ae set f Touch the Bypass key Touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 6 Inch specifications 1 11x82 EE Plain 2 11x8 Plain 3 11x8 B Bypass Color Plain a 8x14 Plain Metric specifications Fy Peasy to Job build Set original Press Start key B Bypass Plain 8 Set the first original A to be copied
22. It is possible for you to change the default setting for the width of the erased border See Erased border width on page 7 81 2 Erasing blemishes from the edges and middle of copies made from books Book erase mode Inch specifications With this mode you can make clean copies even from thick books The width of the outside border to be erased can be set to any 1 8 increment between 1 8 and 3 4 The width of the center area to be erased can be set to any 1 8 increment between 1 8 and 1 1 2 A setting of O will result in no border being erased The area that will be erased as the outside border is shown as in the illustration while that of the center area is shown as b Metric specifications With this mode you can make clean copies even from thick books The width of the outside border to be erased can be set to any 1 mm increment between 1 mm and 18 mm The width of the center area to be erased can be set to any 1 mm increment between 1 mm and 36 mm A setting of O will result in no border being erased The area that will be erased as the outside border is shown as in the illustration while that of the center area is shown as b abcdefghijk abcdefghijk abcdefghijk abcdefghijk abcdefghijk abcdefghijk abcdefghijk abcdefghijk abcdefghijk abcdefghijk abcdefghijk abcdefghijk abcdefghijk abcdefghijk abcdefghijk abcdefghijk abcdefghijk NOTE It is possible for you to change t
23. Sort Sort On Group Off Auto Rotation Rotate Default margin width Left 6mm Omm Default erase width Border 6mm Center 12mm Preset limit 999 Set Setting mode l Default setting or La TEA Change y Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Touch the key or the key under the Border and Center fields to change the displayed widths to those desired Inch specifications Adjust default setting of erase width 0 8 4 Border 1 4 Center NOTE If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it touch the Back key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 4 Touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 5 Touch the Close key once again The touch panel will return to the Default setting screen 6 Touch the End key The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab 7 81 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS 99 Copy limit Touch the key or the the desired setting key to change the copy limit to Perform the following procedure to set the limit for the number of copies or copy sets that can be made at a time Inch specifications 1 Display the Copy default screen Set output quantity 1 999 See 5 Accessing the copy default settings on page 7 62 Inch specifications Default setting Counter Za ronn Bypass BOX Counter i s
24. i Default setting i 7 101 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS The Printing report screen will be displayed and printing of the corresponding report will start Inch specifications Orig page Output Cancel Metric specifications Original Count set Output Cancel NOTE If you want to cancel print out of the corresponding report touch the Cancel key When the report is complete the touch panel will return to the screen in step 4 6 Touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 Touch the End key The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab 7 102 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS 10 Changing the language used for messages You can select the language that will be used on the touch panel 3 Touch the key that corresponds to the language that you want to use The available languages are as follows The language used on the touch panel will change to that Inch specification copiers selected English French Fran ais Spanish Espa ol and Japanese AASB Metric specification copiers English German DEUTSCH French FRAN AIS Italian ITALIANO and Spanish ESPANOL Inch specifications English Fran ais Espa ol With the content of the Basic tab displayed press the E 1 Default Setting Counter key The Default setting Counter screen
25. key The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab Auto Rotation mode ON OFF Perform the following procedure to determine whether or not the Auto Rotation mode will be the default setting in the initial mode Display the Copy default screen See 5 Accessing the copy default settings on page 7 62 Inch specifications Default setting Counter Copy default a Bypass setting Machine Document Register default Management Pj orig size s Metric specifications ene BOX Counter Management Bj check j f Print User i report Adjustment pj Default setting Counter Co Bypass setting Machine Document Register default Management orig size Hard Disk Counter Management Bj check j f Print User i report Adjustment pj Select Auto Rotation in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the Change key The Auto Rotation screen will be displayed Inch specifications Default setting Counter Default menu Sort Sort On Offset Off Auto Rotation Rotate Default margin width Left 1 4 0 Default erase width Border s Center 1 2 Preset limit 999 Set Setting mode Default setting Metric specifications Default setting Counter Default menu Sort Sort On Group Off Auto Rotation Rotate Default margin width Left 6mm Omm Default erase width Border 6mm Center 12mm Preset limi
26. lt Combine Merge Copy modes gt Page 5 13 3 Various functions for making enlarged and reduced copies E Enlarging reducing the copy image to fit the size of paper in a specified drawer cassette lt Auto magnification selection mode gt Page 4 5 11 X17 A3 129 141 sex 70 E Enlarging reducing the length and width of the image to separate magnification ratios lt XY zoom mode gt Page 4 8 M M X 5 1 2 X8 1 2 6 Creating a margin on the copies lt Margin mode gt Page 5 6 9 Making copies with clean edges lt Border erase modes gt Page 5 11 gt 1 2 Overlaying one image over another lt Form overlay mode gt Page 5 20 A a R 1 3 Making booklets from sheet originals lt Booklet Stitching mode gt Page 5 22 Th 1 6 Automatic rotation of the copy image lt Auto rotation function gt Page 5 30 SS 1 9 Inverting black and white lt Invert mode gt Page 5 38 22 Making more of the same copies after a copy job is finished lt Repeat copy mode gt Page 5 42 25 Memorizing frequently used settings lt Program function gt Page 5 50 14 Making booklets from books lt Book to Booklet mode gt Page 5 26 SY ZF gt 1 1 Adding a front and or back cover to your copy sets lt Cover mode gt Page 5 31 20 Making mirror image copies lt Mirror image mode gt Page 5 39 Ese 23 Copying a large volume of originals in
27. on Guide The above illustration includes the optional original cover Please read the Operation Guide before using the copier Keep it close to the copier for easy reference lt IMPORTANT gt The instructions contained herein are based on the 30 cpm copies per minute 3035 copier the 40 com 4035 copier and the 50 cpm 5035 copier NOTE This Operation Guide contains information that corresponds to using both the inch and metric versions of this copier Within the text we have generally indicated messages by listing that for the inch version followed in brackets by the corresponding information for the metric version However when a message is essentially the same or when the difference is only one of upper and lower case spelling we have listed the information specifically as it is displayed in the inch version of this machine All rights reserved No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying recording or by any information storage and retrieval system without permission in writing from the Publisher Legal Restriction On Copying e It may be prohibited to copy copyrighted material without permission of the copyright owner e It is prohibited under any circumstances to copy domestic or foreign currencies e Copying other items may be prohibited Introduction to this Operation Guide The explanations contained in this Operation Gui
28. on page 7 62 Inch specifications Default setting Counter Copy default a Bypass setting Machine Document Register default Management Pj orig size s BOX Counter Management Bj check j f Print User i report gt Adjustment pj Metric specifications Default setting Counter Za ne Bypass Hard Disk Counter setting j Management Bj check j i Machine Document Register Print User default Management Pj orig size gt report Adjustment gt 2 Select Original image quality Image quality Original in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the Change key The Original image quality Image quality Original screen will be displayed Inch specifications Default setting Counter Default menu Setting mode i La Exposure mode Manual Exposure steps 1 step v Original image quality Text Photo Change y Eco Print Off Background exp adj Standard Default setting Metric specifications Default setting Counter Default menu Setting mode Exposure mode Manual Exposure steps 1 step Image quality original Text Photo Eco Print Off Background exp adj Standard Change p l Default setting Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Touch the Text Photo key the Photo key or the Text key as appropriate Inch specifications Select default mode of original image quality l Default sett
29. originals l Image Margin Page Form q quality Imag shift Dj numbering overla l Sort Erase Cover 4 the Sort ON a Inch specifications Paper size 1 11x81 We when there is paper loaded of the same size but different orientation NOTES e If you do not have paper of the same size but different orientations PERE VEE available for paper feed copies will be ejected without being rie sorted in this way e You can also select whether or not the Sort and or the Finished modes will be the default setting in the initial mode See Sort Finished mode ON OFF on page 7 78 fi jor Sort On 1 Set the originals to be copied 5 Touch the On 1 set key Touch the Function tab The content of the Function tab 6 Use the keypad to set the number of copies to be made will be displayed YOO Ow Clear POO x amp Start 7 Press the Start key Copying will start 5 29 section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS 13 Auto rotation function If the orientation of the original is different from that of the paper 2 Touch the Auto Rotation key The Auto Rotation screen loaded in the drawers cassettes the image will be automatically will be displayed turned 90 degrees counter clockwise for copying No special setting is oes ach fication required in order to use this function cn specitications Paper size S F Ready to copy Dew S g
30. q paper type j 2 sided A Offset MS e l ax Reduce Basic Metric specifications Ready to Job build Set original Press Start key 1 sided dod Con OAID l Select Original 1 sided l paper i type 2 sided Group AMS Basic l E Reduce Orig set 4 5 57 section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS Touch the 2 sided copy key and then touch the Open from left Left binding key Finally touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 Inch specifications F Ready to Job build s St Finisned Check direction Check direction of 0 aan original top side i Open from right Open from top Metric specifications Fy Ready to Job build Set original Press Start key Check direction of 2 Can original Left o Top J Left top 4 Touch the Edit key Then in the resulting screen touch the Modify Copy key The Modify Copy screen will be displayed Inch specifications F Ready to Job build Auto 4 4 Insert page E 4 Ea eae E 4 Ea size eae see Print from None e q Rear page Emp Metric specifications Fy Ready to Job build Sta ae Ea aa blank page ae Ea orig aa j a a Print from None None q i rear page Sa Ear e l i Sa shift Ear 5 58 Touch the On key Touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 4 Inch specifications
31. will be displayed EEE ai Auto l i Exposure Exposure NOTE Functi P If you set the originals that you want to copy and press the Start key while the copier is still warming up copying will begin as soon as Metric specifications warm up is finished 3 Selecting the desired functions Select from among the copier s various modes and functions e Enlarging reducing the copy image Page 4 5 e Interrupt copying Page 4 9 e Making 2 sided copies from various types of originals Page 5 1 e Copying each image of open faced books magazines etc or 2 sided originals onto separate sheets Page 5 4 e Creating a margin on the copies Page 5 6 e Centering the copy image Page 5 8 e Adding a space next to the copy images for making notes Page 5 9 e Making copies with clean edges Page 5 11 2 Setting the originals e Fitting the image of either two or four originals onto a single copy page Page 5 13 e Printing page numbers on the copies Page 5 16 e Overlaying one image over another Page 5 20 e Making booklets from sheet originals Page 5 22 e Making booklets from book originals Page 5 26 Open the original cover and set the original that you want to copy face down on the platen Be sure to align originals with the upper left corner of the platen towards the left rear portion of the copier NOTE e Automatic sorting of copy sets without the Document Finisher Page 5 29 e Automatic r
32. y Sort Sort On Group Off La l Default setting 7 82 Repeat copying ON OFF Perform the following procedure to set whether or not to prohibit repeat copying as well as whether or not to make repeat copying the default setting in the initial mode NOTE This setting is displayed when the optional Hard Disk is installed 1 Display the Copy default screen See 5 Accessing the copy default settings on page 7 62 Inch specifications Default setting Counter Copy default rone d Bypass setting gt Machine Document Register default Management orig size gt io BOX Counter Management Bj check Print User i report Adjustment pj Metric specifications Default setting Counter Default setting a ne Bypass Hard Disk Counter setting j Management check Machine Document Register Print User i default gt Management Bj orig size gt report j Adjustment 2 Select Modify Copy in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the Change key The Modify Copy screen will be displayed Inch specifications Default setting Counter py default Default menu i Setting mode Modify Copy On Default Off A Display register key On Customize Main function Customize Add function l Default setting i Metric specifications Default setting Counter Default menu Setting mode Preset limit 999 Set Modify cop
33. 1 9 or 9 1 or the Sort by Name key and select either A gt Z or Z A as appropriate 7 23 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS 4 The total number of copies made under that department ID code will be displayed Inch specifications Close Number print ST Printer Number in Black amp White areata Scan Transm Fax Transm Counter Scanner clear Scan pages Trsm pages Commun Time Default setting Managemen 000 1st Sales Dept Number print Number in Black amp White is limit value Scan Transm Fax transm Counter i Scanner clear Scan pages Trsm pages Commun Time Default setting Management 0007 1st Sales Dept i NOTE On the Each Management Total screen the number in the brackets following the number of copies made indicates the maximum number of copies that can be made 5 To clear all of the copy counts for that ID code touch the Counter clear key Inch specifications Close Number print ETT Printer Number in EE is limit value Scan Transm Fax Transm Counter i Scanner clear i Scan pages Trsm pages Commun Time Default setting Management Number print Number in Black amp White is limit value Scan Transm Fax transm Counter Scanner clear Scan pages Trsm pages Commun Time Default setting Managemen 1st Sales Dept 1 24 6 When the confirmat
34. 2825 West Story Road Irving Texas 75038 5299 TEL 972 550 8987 FAX 972 570 4704 Dallas Parts Distribution Center amp National Training Center 2825 West Story Road Irving Texas 75038 5299 TEL 972 659 0055 FAX 972 570 5816 2003 12 2FD80022C
35. 812x13 8K 16K Reference page Factory setting All types of paper Auto Detection Inch specification Inch Metric specification Centimeter Default setting Paper type drawer cassette No 1 No 4 Multi oypass tray settings display ON OFF Custom paper type for 2 sided copying Special paper action setting Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Description Sets and then displays the type of paper that is loaded in drawers cassettes No 1 through No 4 The setting for drawer cassette No 3 and No 4 will only be available when the optional Paper Feeder is installed on your copier Turn this setting ON if you want the Bypass setting screen to be displayed whenever the Bypass key is touched in the Basic tab Sets whether or not each custom paper type custom 1 custom 8 will be available for use in 2 sided copying When copying onto prepunched preprinted or letterhead paper and performing both 1 sided copying and 2 sided copying from the same drawer cassette the positioning of the holes in relation to the copied image may be different for each copy or the front and rear images of 2 sided copies may be copied onto the opposites sides of the paper If you select Adj print Direction both 1 sided and 2 sided copies will be created with the same orientation Example Set the paper as shown in the illustration E 1 sided g 2 sided P When Adj print Dir
36. A 3 gt A 4 i A5 3B 5 B43B5 400 115 B4 gt A3 4 50 B 5 gt A 4 A5 gt A i 99 Touch the key or the key as appropriate specify the desired magnification ratio for the width and then the length of the image It is also possible for you to enter the desired ratio directly by touching the corresponding keys Keys key and then using the keypad Inch specifications P Si a F Ready to copy ter Check direction Check direction of y ESIE X e original top side f25 400 Paper size Set AAD 100 xX 100 25 400 z Check direction of Y ESIE i x je original Touch the appropriate key on the right side of the touch panel to specify the direction in which the original was set Press the Start key to begin the copying procedure section 4 BASIC OPERATION 3 Interrupt copying Interrupt copying is useful if during one copy job you want to copy 4 When copying is completed press the Interrupt key once other originals at different settings Once the rush job is completed again The lamp in the Interrupt key will go out Replace the the interrupted copy job can be resumed at the same settings as newly copied originals with the ones removed before Then before press the Start key The interrupted copy job will be resumed Datak Seting Management Energy Saver D IN Stop DOO Ox Clear 1 Press the Interrupt key to light the lamp in the I
37. AN a Warning of danger of electrical shock A SE Warning of high temperature The symbol indicates that the related section includes information on prohibited actions Specifics of the prohibited action are indicated inside the symbol S SEEE Warning of prohibited action Q PENE Disassembly prohibited The symbol indicates that the related section includes information on actions which must be performed Specifics of the required action are indicated inside the symbol Alert of required action Remove the power plug from the outlet Always connect the copier to an outlet with a ground connection Please contact your service representative to order a replacement if the safety warnings in this Operation Guide are illegible or if the guide itself is missing fee required Section 1 IMPORTANT PLEASE READ FIRST A CAUTION LABELS Caution labels have been attached to the copier at the following locations for safety purposes BE SUFFICIENTLY CAREFUL to avoid fire or electric shock when removing a paper jam or when replacing toner Label 1 High temperature inside Do not touch parts in this area because there is a danger of getting burned k U TL AN ae ES i 7 TI Nee y TOA i Q High temperature inside mY 4 C Do not touch parts in this IN area because there is a lt _S danger of getting burned Label 4 Label 2 Do not incinerate toner and toner container Dangerous Sp
38. Check direction Check direction of Check direction original can be shown at right side of display Follow the steps If setting mode is wrong incorrect copy will result d Left top i Metric specifications Ready to copy era Check direction Check direction of Check direction original can be shown at right side of display Follow the steps If setting mode is wrong incorrect copy will result 5 49 section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS 24 Memorizing frequently used settings Program function Up to eight combinations of copy modes and other functions displayed 5 Use the displayed keyboard to enter the desired name and on the operation panel can be registered as a single program using then touch the End key this function You can also register a name for each registered Inch specifications program 1 Registering a program 1 Set the desired copy modes etc to be registered Touch the Program tab The content of the Program tab will be displayed 3 Touch the Register key F Catalog A i Inch specifications Ready to copy rier 100 Recall Reg delete Register i Change name gt Program NOTE Refer to 11 Entering characters on page 7 104 for information on E entering characters 100 6 Touch the Yes key or the No key as appropriate If you selected Yes the selected program will be registered
39. Combine Merge copy screen will be displayed again Inch specifications Delete registration Register No 1 Are you sure you want to delete Metric specifications Delete registration Register No 1 Are you sure you want to delete Touch the Close key The Combine Merge copy key will be deleted from on the right side of the touch panel Inch specifications Paper Size Set Ready to copy L 11x8 1 11x8 E 5 ia oa 0 z 8 x11 d p Color Reduce 3 11x8 c Auto Plain Exposure a 11x8 ae I R led Paper Size Set OAA i a0 Lo j Lb Auto i Exposure i Exposure Reduce mode gt Enlarge gt User choice Function Program 5 56 section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS 26 Easily add covers and insert sheets between various sets of originals in one operation Job build mode The job build function enables you to scan different sets of originals into memory in separate steps and then copy them all at one time Each set of scanned originals is then seen as one step in the copy process and you can select different copy modes for each step enlarge reduce border erase original type 2 sided originals 1 sided originals or open faced book originals You can choose to have a blank sheet of paper fed in between each set of originals as well as have front and rear covers included for the full set AND do this all during 2 sided c
40. Copy default BOX Counter Management Bj check j f Print User i report gt Adjustment py erase Bypass setting Machine Document Register default Management Pj orig size s Metric specifications Default setting Counter E ne Bypass Hard Disk Counter setting j Management Bj check j i Machine Document Register Print User default Management Bj orig size gt report Adjustment gt 2 Select Select paper type APS in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the Change key The Select paper type APS screen will be displayed Inch specifications Default setting Counter Default menu Setting mode q Select paper type APS Plain Default drawer ist paper Drawer for cover paper Bypass Default magnification Manual i Default setting Metric specifications Default setting Counter Default menu i Setting mode Select paper type APS Plain Default cassette 1st paper Cassette for cover paper Bypass Default mode Manual Default setting Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS 3 Touch the On key and then touch the key that corresponds to the types of paper you want to allow to be used under the auto paper selection mode If you do NOT want to limit the types of paper that will be available for use in that mode touch the Off key Inch specifications Select paper type APS Select paper type s for Auto Paper Se
41. If paper is misfed the copier will stop and the location of the misfeed will appear on the message display Remove the misfed paper with the power switch turned ON by following the appropriate procedure If Careful for Drum is displayed be sure not to touch the drum area that is located inside the machine when removing the jammed paper The duplex unit is out of order and duplex copying is not possible Contact your service representative immediately The slit glass is dirty This may result in black lines or other blemishes appearing on copies when you use the optional Document Processor so you should perform the cleaning operation on the slit glass Connect the optional Document Finisher securely to the copier The optional Document Finisher is out of order and cannot be used for the moment Contact your service representative or an authorized service center as soon as possible The maximum number of sheets that can be stored on the optional Document Finisher has been exceeded Remove the copies from the Document Finisher Paper has been misfed inside the optional Document Finisher See the Document Finisher s Operation Guide and remove the paper section 9 TROUBLESHOOTING Message Procedure Reference Out of staples Add staples There are no staples in the optional Document Finisher See the Document Stapler empty Add staples Finishers Operation Guide and replace the staple cartridge Cannot
42. If you want to access the Form Overlay key the Margin Z N key the Cover Mode key the Page Page numbering key the Booklet key and or the Select of Output key to make those settings touch the Edit key k A Mara oemant lt gt Job Queue E gt Repeat Cd 5 Press the Start key Print out will start 2 Touch the Document printing key or the Box Editing key under Shared Data Box The Document printing screen or the Box editing screen as appropriate will be displayed Inch specifications Select function d Shared Data Box Synergy Print Box Form box GGG m PEA AAC i Document Document Document Document Form q reg gt printing j reg printing reg gt l Box Box Box Editing j Editing Editing j Metric specifications Select function Shared Data Box Synergy Print Box Form box sisas A i Document Document Document Document Form i F registr printing registr printing gt registr 5 Box Box Box q Editing Editin Editing i 6 6 NOTE Section 6 DOCUMENT AND OUTPUT MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Select the documents that you want to check and then touch the Cont Crrt details Check Rev details key The Check Correct details Check revice details screen will be displayed Inch specifications Document data box Up LJ Job 005 1 25 10 01 Q Job 004 1 25 10 01 Q Job 003 1
43. Inch specifications Form name Form 001 This form will be deleted Do you really want to delete it Metric specifications Form name FORM007 This form will be deleted Are you sure If you selected Yes the selected form will be deleted and the touch panel will return to the screen in step 3 If you selected No the touch panel will return to the screen in step 3 without deleting the selected form 5 If you want to delete another registered form repeat steps 3 and 4 6 Touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 Touch the End key The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab 6 4 3 Shared data box 14 Storing documents in the box Perform the following procedure when you want to register a set of documents in the shared data box Up to 100 sets of documents can be saved in the shared data box 1 Set the documents to be stored 2 Press the Document Management key The Document Management screen will be displayed 3 Touch the Document reg Document registr key under Shared Data Box The Document registration screen will be displayed Inch specifications Select func Shared Data Box Synergy Print Box Form box oo oo AAP Document Document Document Document Form F reg printing y reg y printing reg gt BOX Box Box q Editin Editing Editing Metric s
44. Inch specifications Select box No with key Metric specifications Select box No Box No F with ke 001 ABCD_0000001 J006 UVWX_ 0000006 011 QRST_0000105 gots MNOP_0200104 E C E l 002 EFGH_0000002 oor ABCD_0000101 ore UVWX_ 0000106 017 QRST_0200105 l 003 IJKL_ 0200003 008 EFGH 0000102 013 ABCD_0200101 ois UVWX_0200106 004 MNOP_ 0000004 009 IJKL_ 0000103 014 EFGH 0200102 019 ABCD_0500101 l 005 QRST_0000005 foto MNOP 0000104 015 IJKL_ 02001034 020 EFGH_0500102 l Document Management Synergy Print Box NOTES e f that box was registered with a password the password entry screen will be displayed Enter the registered password with the keypad and then touch the Enter key Inch specifications Enter password e Refer to Registering a password for a box on page 6 18 for information on registering the password 4 Select the documents that you want to delete and then touch the Delete key A verification screen will be displayed Inch specifications 007 Delete all i L soBoos 1 WED 15 32 indication data box i Conf Crrt Box i details gt Password Q soBo04 1 WED 15 33 O J0B003 1 WED 15 34 Q JoBo02 1 WED 15 35 O JoBoo1 1 WED 15 37 Metric specifications Box editing 007 Box ABCDEFGHIJK LJ yoBoos 1 WED 15 32 Q yoBo04 WED 15 33 Order of Delete all i indication 5 box data Check Rev Box details j Password Dy Q JoBoos WED 15 34 W J
45. NOTES e It is possible for you to change the 4 digit management code See Changing the management code on page 7 56 e Refer to the desired procedure s explained under 3 Making machine default settings and perform the corresponding setting s 7 41 3 Making machine default settings Perform the following procedure that corresponds to the desired setting Auto drawer cassette switching ON OFF Perform the following procedure to turn automatic drawer cassette switching ON or OFF as desired 1 Display the Machine default screen See 2 Accessing the machine default settings on page 7 41 Inch specifications Default setting Counter Copy default Bypass BOX Counter setting Management Bj check s Machine Document Register Print User default Management orig size gt report gt Adjustment By Language Metric specifications Default setting Counter Co Bypass Hard Disk Counter setting j Management Bj check Machine Document Register Print User default Management orig size i report Adjustment By Management g3 2 Select Auto drawer switching Auto cassette switching in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the Change key The Auto drawer switching Auto cassette switching screen will be displayed Inch specifications Default setting Counter Machine default Default menu i
46. O immediately BE ABSOLUTELY recommended that you consult with your service CERTAIN to remove the power plug from the representative in regard to cleaning of internal outlet and then contact your service parts This is particularly effective if accomplished representative esaseseseeesoeoeoarararinirinierererrrrrr ren Z prior to seasons of high humidity Consult with your service representative in regard to the cost If anything harmful paper clips water other of cleaning the internal parts of the copier Q fluids etc falls into the copier turn the power switch OFF O immediately Next BE ABSOLUTELY CERTAIN to remove the power plug from the outlet to avoid the danger of fire or electrical shock Then contact your service representative cccceeecccssseeceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeees DO NOT remove or connect the power plug with wet hands as there is a danger of electrical TOCK ee ae ALWAYS contact your service representative for maintenance or repair of internal parts PRECAUTIONS FOR USE Other precautions e DO NOT place heavy objects on the copier or cause other damage to the copier e DO NOT open the front cover turn off the power switch or pull out the power plug during copying e When lifting or moving the copier contact your service representative e Do not touch electrical parts such as connectors or printed circuit boards They could be damaged by static electri
47. Orig set Modify i Cop ys Metric specifications F Ready to copy iat st 4 Test Memo Modify q copy 5 NOTES e This function will only work with 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 8 1 2 x 11 11 x 8 1 2 A6R B6R A5R BSR B5 A4R and A4 size copy paper e You can also select whether or not the Auto Rotation mode will be the default setting in the initial mode See Auto Rotation mode ON 3 Touch the No Rotate key OFF on page 7 79 Inch specifications Ready to copy If you want to disengage the auto rotation function perform the following procedure l No Rotate When original and paper have different 4 direction image will be rotated 1 Touch the Function tab and then the Y Down key The content of the next portion of the Function tab will be displayed Metric specifications Ready to copy ad D l No rotate When original and paper have different 4 direction original will be rotated automatically 5 30 section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS 14 Adding a front and or back cover to your copy sets Cover mode With this mode you can select to have color paper or relatively thick paper fed as front and or back covers to your copy sets NOTE It is possible for you to change the drawer cassette that will be used to feed the cover sheets See Cover drawer cassette on page 7 71 You can select separately whether you want both sides or only one s
48. Touch the Sort Off key Inch specifications Paper size Set LU 41x82 100 i Check direction of original top side H Left top Corner Paper size Set WAAD 1 Close Check direction of original low o Staple Mode y Punch Mode p l sort on Back Edge Leit top H corner f Touch the On Output each page key Touch the Close key The message display returns to the Function screen Set the originals to be copied Press the Start key Scanning of the originals will start The number of scanned originals will be displayed NOTE Repeat this operation for all originals when using the platen After all the originals have been scanned press the Scanning finished key 7 Copying will begin and finished copies will be ejected face down onto the tray with each full set shifted slightly from the previous one 8 Remove all of the finished copies from the tray 8 Copying in the Staple mode This mode automatically staples each copy set 1 Touch the Sort Finished key The Sort Finished screen will appear Inch specifications 100 Ready to copy heey Select 2 sided Select paper j Separation orig size Exposure Reduce Auto mode Enlarge e Selection gt Orig image Margin quality Centering j Sort Border Finished Erase Paper size Set Select Select Exposure Auto Large of mode selection originals f Image Page quali
49. cassette in order to change the size of paper that will be used The drawer cassette that holds the currently selected paper size and type of paper will be highlighted Drawer Cassette No 3 and drawer cassette No 4 will be displayed when the optional Paper Feeder is installed on your copier 5 APS key Touch this key until it is highlighted when you want to have the paper size selected automatically See page 4 2 6 Bypass key Touch this key when you want to copy onto paper that is set on the multi bypass tray The type of paper registered for use on the multi bypass tray will be indicated in the key 7 Copy exposure adjustment keys Copy exposure scale Touch the appropriate key when you want to manually adjust the copy exposure The copy exposure scale will indicate the currently selected setting See page 4 2 Exposure mode key Touch this key when you want to access the Exposure Mode screen 9 Auto Exposure key Touch this key until it is highlighted when you want to select the auto exposure mode In the auto exposure mode the contrast of the original will be detected and the most suitable exposure level selected automatically See page 4 2 AMS key Touch this key until it is highlighted when you want to have the copy magnification ratio selected automatically See page 4 5 4 Reduce Enlarge key Touch this key when you want to manually change the copy magnification rat
50. information on registering the password 4 Select the document sets in order of how you want them printed Up to 10 sets of documents can be selected Inch specifications 007 Select 2 PER of Er once L JoBoo5 1 WED 15 322 j Conf Crrt Q J0B003 WED 15 34 QW JoBo02 WED 15 35 T a Down par Q JoBoo1 WED 15 37 Cancel 001 005 007 Box ABCDEFGHIJK Select 2 eee indication 2 all data FESH Q J0B004 WED 15 33 1 LA Check Rev 4 details QW JoBoo3 WED 15 34 Q JoBoo2 WED 15 35 ven weossar Y oom 001 005 Document Management Synergy Print Ees NOTES e It is possible to change the order of display for the stored documents To do so touch the Order of indication key and then touch the Sort by date key and select either New Old or Old New or the Sort by name key and select either A Z or Z A aS appropriate e If you want to print out more than one set of documents they must all be of the same size 5 Touch the Select paper key the Sort Finished key and or the 1 sided 2 sided key to perform the corresponding settings If you want to access the Form Overlay key the Margin key the Cover Mode key the Page key the Booklet key and or the Select of Output key to make those settings touch the Edit key 6 Press the Start key Print out will start 6 11 Section 6
51. key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 Touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 Touch the Close key once again The touch panel will return to the Default setting screen Touch the End key The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab Auto exposure adjustment Perform the following procedure to adjust the overall exposure level for the auto exposure mode 1 Display the Copy default screen See 5 Accessing the copy default settings on page 7 62 Inch specifications Default setting Counter Copy default a Bypass setting Machine Document Register default Management Pj orig size s ene BOX Counter Management Bj check j f Print User i report Adjustment pj Metric specifications Default setting Counter Za ne Bypass Hard Disk Counter setting j Management Bj check j i Machine Document Register Print User default Management orig size report Adjustment By 2 Select Adjust auto exposure in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the Change key The Adjust auto exposure screen will be displayed Inch specifications Default setting Counter Default menu Setting mode Adjust auto exposure Standard Adjust auto exposure OCR Standard Adj manual expo Mixed Standard Adj manual expo Text Standard Adj manu
52. key screen in step 2 The Date Time screen will be displayed Inch specifications 5 Touch the Close key once again The touch panel will return he Defaul ina screen Default setting Counter to the Default setting scree Default menu i Setting mode l Key sound ON OFF On Silent mode On 7 v Y oom Date Time 2001 10 30 14 02 kA f Time difference GMT 08 00 k Management code change 5000 i ns 6 Touch the End key The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab Metric specifications Default setting Counter Default menu Setting mode l Key sound ON OFF On A Silent mode Off v Date Time 30 10 01 14 02 Time difference GMT 08 00 Change MGMT code with 5000 Change y Default setting 7 54 Time difference Perform the following procedure to set a designated time difference from the world standard time GMT 1 Display the Machine default screen See 2 Accessing the machine default settings on page 7 41 Inch specifications Default setting Counter sr Bypass BOX Counter setting Management Bj check s Machine Document Register Print User i default Management Bj orig size gt report j Adjustment By Language Copy default gt Metric specifications Default setting Counter Bypass Hard Disk Counter setting Management Bj check gt Machine Document Register Print User i default Management orig
53. one operation lt Batch scanning mode gt Page 5 47 Aye c 26 Easily add covers and insert sheets between various sets of originals in one operation lt Job build mode gt Page 5 57 A 1 1 5 Automatic sorting of copy sets without the Document Finisher lt Sort Finished mode gt Page 5 29 1 1 3 3 3 1 8 Feeding paper as a backing sheet for OHP transparencies lt Transparency backing sheet mode gt Page 5 36 21 Making a test copy prior to large volume copying lt Proof mode gt Page 5 40 ABE i 3 24 Saving on toner use lt Eco print mode gt Page 5 48 ev ele e oe 21 Registering images to be used for form overlay lt Form registration gt Page 6 1 28 Managing shared forms 29 Printing out different stored originals in 30 Using department ID codes to manage lt Shared data box gt one operation the number of copies made by each Page 6 4 lt Synergy print boxes gt department Page 6 9 lt Copy management mode gt Page 7 1 31 Changing the language used in the touch 32 A full range of optional equipment is E Paper Feeder Page 8 5 panel available lt Language selection function gt E Document Processor Page 8 1 Page 7 103 UJ a SS aT a VG ee
54. or manual exposure adjustment will be selected 02 Only the auto magnification selection mode is available That mode will be selected 03 Only same size 100 1 1 copying in the auto paper selection mode is available That mode will be selected 04 The margin mode cannot be used in combination with the booklet stitching mode or the book to booklet mode 05 The margin mode cannot be used in combination with the combine merge copy modes or the memo mode Function selected second Function selected first 06 The border erase modes cannot be used in combination with original size selection input size 07 The border erase modes and the auto selection filing mode cannot be used in combination with each other 08 The book erase mode and the booklet stitching mode cannot be used in combination with each other 09 Not available because open faced originals must be set with the top edge towards the rear of the platen 10 The booklet stitching mode and book to booklet mode will be given second priority when the 2 sided copy modes or the page separation split copy modes are selected 11 The transparency backing sheet mode and the 2 sided copy modes cannot be used in combination with each other 12 Cannot be used in combination with the auto selection filing m 13 The 2 sided copy modes and the invert mode cannot be used in combination with each other ode 14 Open faced originals cannot be used in combi
55. screen in step 1 4 Selecting how to finished up the copy sets If the optional Document Finisher is installed on your copier this procedure lets you select whether to staple or hole punch the finished copy sets 1 With the content of the Basic tab displayed touch the Finished key The Finished screen will be displayed Inch specifications Ready to Job build Place originals then press Start key L 11x8 1 sided 1 sided copy Select Original 1 sided paper gt type 2 sided i i Affent Back Edge AMS l a Reduce Orig set l Qu i E i basic Metric specifications Set original Press Start key Ready to Job build Wado 1 sided 1 sided Copy Select Original 1 sided l paper i type 2 sided E AMS Back Edge ba Reduce Orig set l NOTE The setting in regard to how the copy sets will be finished can only be made in the first step of the job build mode and will apply to all steps in the copy job 5 63 section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS 2 Select how you want the copy sets to be finished by touching 2 Select the desired magnification ratio the Staple mode key the Saddle Stitch Center Staple If you want to have the copy magnification ratio selected key or the Punch mode key as appropriate automatically touch the AMS key Follow the instructions on the right side of the touch panel If you want to manually set the magnification ratio t
56. screen will be displayed Inch specifications Default setting Counter Default menu Setting mode Exposure mode Manual La Exposure steps 1 step Original image quality Text Photo Eco Print Off Background exp adj Standard Change y l Default setting Metric specifications Default setting Counter Default menu i Setting mode C A Up i Exposure mode Manual Exposure steps 1 step Image quality original Text Photo Eco Print Off Background exp adj Standard Change pl y Down Default setting 7 64 3 Touch the 1 step key or the 0 5 step key as appropriate Inch specifications Select step of copy exposure Metric specifications Select adjustment step of copy exposure 1 step 0 5 step NOTE If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it touch the Back key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 4 Touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 5 Touch the Close key once again The touch panel will return to the Default setting screen 6 Touch the End key The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab Original quality Perform the following procedure to determine the default setting that will be used for the image quality in the initial mode 1 Display the Copy default screen See 5 Accessing the copy default settings
57. select AMS under Default magnification ratio on page 7 72 1 Set the original to be copied 3 The copier will automatically detect the size of the originals and select copy paper of that same size Inch specifications Paper Size Set REENA CKO 9 DJ 11x8 100 1 11x8 IE Plain ma a cor LIJE 3 11x8 Auto IE Plain Exposure a 11x8 ae R led Paper Size Set F Be PE FL JLB Auto Rear i 1 Plain Exposure UL SEd p d Exposure Reduce Sort a mode gt Enlarge 5 Finished Select the size of paper that you want to copy onto by touching the appropriate paper size key Touch the AMS key The corresponding magnification ratio will be displayed Inch specifications Paper Size Set micreXe NAM Ore 9 DJ t1x8 bul Auto Exposure Exposure mode p B Bypass Auto E Plain Exposure IUU 3 j Exposure Reduce Sort mode s Enlarge Finished Fun Press the Start key to begin the copying procedure section 4 BASIC OPERATION 2 Zoom mode With this mode the magnification ratio can be set to any 1 increment between 25 and 400 A 400 Set the original to be copied 2 Touch the Reduce Enlarge key The Reduce Enlarge screen will be displayed Inch specifications Paper Size Set Ready to copy D 11x8 1 11x8 2 IE Plain z 8 x11 IEJ Color Auto Exposure a 11x8 Exposure
58. setting Machine Document Register default Management Pj orig size s ene BOX Counter Management Bj check j f Print User i report Adjustment pj Metric specifications Default setting Counter Za ne Bypass Hard Disk Counter setting j Management Bj check j i Machine Document Register Print User default Management orig size report Adjustment By 2 Select Adj manual expo Photo in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the Change key The Adj manual expo Photo screen will be displayed Inch specifications Default setting Counter Default menu Setting mode Adjust auto exposure OCR Standard Adj manual expo Mixed Standard Adj manual expo Text Standard Adj manual expo Photo Standard Change y Default setting i Adjust auto exposure Standard A Metric specifications Default setting Counter Default menu Setting mode Adjust auto exposure OCR Standard Adj manual expo Mixed Standard Adjust auto exposure Standard mrw Adj manual expo Text Standard Adj manual expo Photo Standard Change y l Default setting Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS 3 Touch the Lighter key or the Darker key as appropriate to move the cursor on the exposure scale and adjust the exposure as desired Inch specifications ust copy exposure default setting Manual Photo 3 r
59. 001 010 Metric specifications Document data box Order of 6 indication L JOB003 1 25 10 01 O JoBoo2 1 25 10 01 Check Rev details Q JoBoo1 1 25 10 01 001 003 Section 6 DOCUMENT AND OUTPUT MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS 4 Synergy print boxes 14 Storing documents in a box Perform the following procedure when you want to register a set of documents in a synergy print box 1 2 3 Set the documents to be stored Press the Document Management key The Document Management screen will be displayed Se ft Managerment lt gt Job Queue Dn Repeat Cd Touch the Document reg Document registr key under Synergy Print Box The screen to select the synergy print box will be displayed Inch specifications Select function Shared Data Box Synergy Print Box gt GGG ees is fae fe Document Document Document Document Form reg printing j re printing j reg j Box DOX Box Editing Editin Editing Form box Metric specifications Shared Data Box Synergy Print Box Fa fia a sizan l Document Document Document Document Form registr g printing 5 registr printing 5 registr 5 Box BOX Box Editing Editin Editing 4 NOTE Either touch the synergy print box in which you want to register the documents or enter its number using the keypad Then touch the Enter key The Document registration screen will be displayed
60. 007 Box ABCDEFGHIJK Delete all i LW soB005 1 WED 15 32 i O J08004 WED 15 33 i Password AR LW soBoos WED 15 34 L soBoo2 WED 15 35 Q JoBoo1 WED 15 37 5 Use the keypad to enter the new password for that box and then touch the Enter key The new password will be registered and the touch panel will return to the screen in step 4 Inch specifications Enter password New password Enter by key NOTES e The password can be between 1 and 8 digits long e If you decide not to register a password for that box touch the Clear key and then with nothing entered in the password field touch the Enter key 6 Touch the End key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 Touch the End key The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab 6 19 Section 6 DOCUMENT AND OUTPUT MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS 2 Output management functions 1 What are the output management functions The Output management functions use the Print status screen to manage printing conditions When you want to know how many jobs are scheduled to be printed before yours When you want to know whether or not your job scheduled using the job reservation function was printed When you are using the printer functions of this copier to print out data from a computer or using the fax functions of this copier to receive fax data and you want know the status of you
61. 11 5 Interrupt key amp indicator lamp Press this key to light the lamp in that key when you want to perform interrupt copying See page 4 9 6 Management key When copy management is turned ON press this key after copying in order to return to the department ID code entry display See page 7 1 7 Default Setting Counter key Press this key when you want to perform default settings as well as those related to copy management etc Keypad Use these keys when you want to set the number of copies to be made or enter other values 9 Touch panel This panel displays such information as operation procedures machine status and the various function keys Brightness adjustment control dial Turn this dial when you want to adjust the brightness of the touch panel 41 Copier key lamp amp indicator Press this key to light the indicator to the right of the key when you want to use the copier functions of this machine L Em YH Default Setting Hon ray O Saver Reset A Stop A Clear 4 Printer key lamp amp indicator Press this key when you want to use the optional printer functions of this machine The indicator to the right of the key will light when the machine is in the printer operation mode The lamp to the left of the key will either light green or orange or will flash one of those colors depending upon the status of the machine See page 9 3 43 Scanner key
62. 2 4 Touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 5 Touch the Close key once again The touch panel will return to the Default setting screen 6 Touch the End key The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Auto sleep time Touch the key or the key to change the displayed time Perform the following procedure to set the amount of time that will to the desired setting between 1 minutes and 240 minutes elapse before the auto sleep function engages and turns the copier Inch specifications OFF O if no operation has been performed on the copier during that time Set Changing time to turn automatically into sleep mode after last setting o WIGHT VUpyity 1 one eed0 1 Display the Machine default screen See 2 Accessing the machine default settings on page 7 41 Inch specifications Default setting Counter Set Changing time to turn automatically into sleep mode after last setting cfwnen copying Is one Z Bypass BOX Counter setting Management Bj check s Machine Document Register Print User default Management orig size s report Adjustment py Metric specifications Default setting Counter Eed SNES ue al e The setting can be made to 1 minute 5 minutes 15 minutes 30 Machine Document Register a minutes 45 minutes 60 minutes 90 mi
63. 2 5 Touch the Close key once again The touch panel will return to the Default setting screen 6 Touch the End key The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab Erased border width Perform the following procedure to determine the default value for the width of the border to be erased in the two border erase modes Display the Copy default screen See 5 Accessing the copy default settings on page 7 62 Inch specifications Default setting Counter Copy default a Bypass setting Machine Document Register default Management Pj orig size s Metric specifications ene BOX Counter Management Bj check j f Print User i report Adjustment pj Default setting Counter Co Bypass setting Machine Document Register default Management orig size Hard Disk Counter Management Bj check j f Print User i report Adjustment pj Select Default erase width in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the Change key The Default erase width screen will be displayed Inch specifications Default setting Counter Default menu Sort Sort On Offset Off Auto Rotation Rotate Default margin width Left 1 4 0 Default erase width Border s Center 1 2 Preset limit 999 Set Setting mode Default setting Metric specifications Default setting Counter Default menu
64. 2 sided Copy Select Original paper type AMS Back Edge ae Reduce Orig set 3 Scanning F 1 1 Touch the key that corresponds to drawer cassette No 1 Touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 10 Inch specifications Scan next original s Place the originals and press start key Press Scanning finished key when starting copy 3 11x8 B Bypass J Color amp Plain a 8x14 Plain Metric specifications Scan next original s Place the originals and press start key Press Scanning finished key when starting copy EJ Colour Plain Plain 1 2 Set the second originals B to be copied Press the Start key Scanning of the originals will start 5 59 section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS Step 4 Making the settings for the third original C in the illustration on page 5 57 The multi bypass is to be selected for color paper feed under the Select paper screen 1 14 15 5 60 Touch the Select paper key The Select paper screen will be displayed Inch specifications Scan next original s Place the originals and press start key Press Scanning finished key when starting copy 1 sided 2 sided copy Original gt type Tce Back Edge Insert 4 page oe Tere re J Next copy page Front Metric specifications Scan next original s Place the originals and press start ke
65. 25 10 01 O Job 002 1 25 10 01 D Job 001 1 25 10 01 VF Down 001 010 l Document Management Shared Data Bo Order of indication Cont Crrt details Delete Metric specifications Box editing Document data box L JOB003 1 25 10 01 Q JOBoo2 1 25 10 01 Q JoBoo1 1 25 10 01 001 003 Order of indication Check Rev details Delete It is possible to change the order of display for the stored documents To do so touch the Order of indication key and then touch the Sort by date key and select either New Old or Old New or the Sort by name key and select either A Z or Z A as appropriate NOTE Check the displayed information If you want to print out the first page of the selected documents touch the Print from 1st Head Print key If you want to change the name of the selected documents touch the Change doc name key and then enter the new name Inch specifications Item Details User name Document name Job005 Registration size 11x15 Orig set direction Back Edge page 1 Input source Copy Resolution 600dpi Registration date 25 10 01 14 39 Metric specifications Item Details User name Document name Job006 Registration size A4 0 Orig set direction Back Edge page 1 Input source Copy Resolution 600dpi Registration date 25 10 01 14 39 Change doc name P Print from 1st Change doc n
66. 2nd paper in that drawer cassette 3rd paper Itis NOT possible to select the multi bypass tray 4th paper as the default drawer cassette The setting for drawer cassette No 3 and No 4 will only be available when the optional Paper Feeder is installed on your copier 7 59 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Default setting Description Cover drawer cassette Sets which drawer cassette will be used to feed the cover sheets in the cover mode the booklet stitching mode and the book to booklet mode The setting for drawer cassette No 3 and No 4 will only be available when the optional Paper Feeder is installed on your copier Default magnification Sets whether or not the auto magnification selection ratio mode will be used to automatically calculate the appropriate magnification ratio when you select the size of copy paper Auto exposure Adjusts the overall exposure level for the auto adjustment exposure mode Auto exposure Adjusts the overall exposure level for scanning with adjustment OCR OCR Optical Character Recognition software when using the optional scanner functions of this copier Manual exposure Adjusts the median exposure value when the adjustment text photo text photo mode is selected for the image quality mode Manual exposure Adjusts the median exposure value when the text adjustment text mode mode is selected for the image quality Manual exposure Adjusts the median exposure value whe
67. Copy None None Margin reser Metric specifications Fy Ready to Job build Set original Press Start key Job Build Step1 Auto Nin Off Erase Select Modify Mode i size orig cop None None Margin Page Imag shift j numbering p NOTES e To make additional copies with the repeat copy mode refer to 2 Printing out with the repeat copy mode on page 5 43 e The setting in regard to whether or not to use the repeat copy mode can only be made in the first step of the job build mode and will apply to all steps in the copy job 2 Touch the On key to select the repeat copy mode Inch specifications When select On data can be saved You can recall and re print at anytime You can set the password to secure saved document y to Job build I P Start k When select On job can be saved You can recall and re print at anytime You can set a password to secure saved document Touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 1 5 68 43 Selecting the margin mode or the centering image shift mode This procedure selects the margin mode or the centering image shift mode in order to create a margin space or center the copy image 1 Touch the Edit key Then in the resulting screen touch the Margin Centering Margin Imag shift key The Margin Centering Margin Imag shift screen will be displayed Inch specifications
68. Count Set Pause i Inner tray Metric specifications Now copying l Original Count set Output up A Inner tray Change i 4 3 section 4 BASIC OPERATION 9 At the end of copying Finished copies will be ejected onto the copy store section IMPORTANT e Up to 250 copies can be stored on the copy store section e If The output tray exceeds capacity Remove the paper Too much paper in output tray Remove paper is displayed there are too many copies on the top tray Remove the copies from the copy store section and then press the Start key to resume copying e If ejected copies come out curled or are otherwise not stored cleanly remove the paper from the drawer cassette or the multi bypass tray whichever is currently being used turn the paper over set it again in that location and try to copy again A CAUTION If the copier will not be used for a short period of time overnight etc turn the power switch OFF O If it will not be used for an extended period of time vacations etc remove the power plug from the outlet for safety purposes during the time the copier is not in use 4 4 section 4 BASIC OPERATION 2 Enlarging reducing the copy image 1 Auto magnification selection mode 2 With this mode the original image is enlarged reduced automatically according to the selected paper size 11 X 17 129 IMPORTANT If you use this mode most often
69. Crs OIO OIO Original size selection standard size CO PO 14 O 14 21 21 O 06 06 06 32 32 O 24 29 O p lt Original size selection input size OOO 0 0 14 O 14 21 21 O O 06 06 06 32 32 24 29 O O O O Original size selection custom original size Ou ES O O O 02 O O O O O0O O0 0 OIO O O Same size 100 1 1 copying Sfolotofololoto felt loo foloto mlelotolololorofol Le x am mot SIRS TEC TES OIO CP OVO OIOIOIOIOIO OIO OIO 3 Auto magnification selection mode Ee LOGO alke OLOJO Oe Ge GVO PO 4 Paper selection steers eE PE ERRER E ER tetera CF Ro spe Crees Ee a O O O Batch scanning mode o ojo o ojolojol o ojoloj oj o ojo o oj olojolo o O Auto rotation function 12 eee 12 O 12 12 O 07 07 07 12 12 12 12 12 2 O O Auto selection filing mode auto selection CIAN 12 0O 12 12 1210O 07 07 07 12 12 12 12 12 O O 0 Auto selection filing mode filing EE E EEEE E EE e OIOIOIO OIIO O O O Ce B5 OLO O O amp Repeat copy mode settings Ololololololololororololololololololololo OoOO lre Sort mode OJOO OIIO OTOIO SIE IE Oe 27 0 O O 4 Finished mode ototolofolotoforototofoloorofolorole olororol le sass max O 22 O E Aa A BFAA OAO 6 Punch mode SNeltelst Stole Stototstorotororoto1o hn aoe O 10 O OIOIOIOIO TO 1110 131010 2 sided copy modes 1 sided 2 sid
70. D JoB004 WED 15 33 y P Q JoB003 WED 15 34 Q soBo02 WED 15 35 Q J0B001 WED 15 37 Metric specifications Box editing 007 Box ABCDEFGHIJK Delete all WED 15 Check Rev Box i 9 vos00 538 Ta Q JoBoos WED 15 34 W JoBoo2 WED 15 35 Q JoBoo1 WED 15 37 6 17 Section 6 DOCUMENT AND OUTPUT MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS 7 Registering a password for a box 3 Either touch the synergy print box that you want to set the password for or enter its number using the keypad Then touch the Enter key The Box editing screen will be displayed For security and privacy purposes you can register a password for each synergy print box In this case it will be necessary to enter the registered password in order to print out check or delete any documents stored in that box Perform the following procedure when Inch specifications you want to change the password settings for any box Select box No Box No 4 with key 1 Press the Document Management key The Document cos Eran ooococ2 oor ABCD 0000101 012 Uvwx 00001081017 GST 0200105 H H E 4 a Management screen will be displayed 003 IJKL_0200003 008 EFGH_00001024 013 ABCD_0200101 4018 UVWX_0200106 004 MNOP_00000044 009 IJKL_0000103 014 EFGH_02001024 019 ABCD_0500101 05 QRST_0000005 4010 MNOP_0000104 015 IJKL_02001034 020 EFGH_0500102 Document 3 Management gt Job Queue Box No j with key 006 UVWX_0000006 4 0
71. DOCUMENT AND OUTPUT MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS 3 Printing out the full contents of a box NOTES Perform the following procedure when you want to print out all of the documents that are stored in a synergy print box at one time e If that box was registered with a password the password entry screen will be displayed Enter the registered password with the keypad and then touch the 1 Press the Document Management key The Document Enter key Management screen will be displayed Inch specifications Enter password Document 3 Management gt Job Queue 2 Touch the Document printing key under Synergy Print Box The screen to select the synergy print box will be displayed Inch specifications Select function e Refer to Registering a password for a box on page 6 18 for 5 1 20 information on registering the password Shared Data Box Synergy Print Box Form box Ss GR as PEAT 2 Ce l Document Document Document Document Form s je Leiner a Touch the Puntonce aldas key Pant outwill start F Box OX Ox ETE ar eis f i Once printing is completed the touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 Metric specifications Inch specifications Select function ocument printin indicati j Il dat L Job 005 1 WED 15 32 _ SATAS i O Job 004 1 WED 15 33 ae i QW Job 003 1 WED 15 34 W Job 002 1 WED 15 35 O Job 001 1 WED 15 37 Shared Data Box Synergy Pri
72. Duplex Unit 64 g m 80 g m Multi bypass tray 45 g m 200 g m 110 Ibs lt Paper types gt Drawers Cassettes Standard copy paper and color paper Duplex Unit Standard copy paper and color paper Multi bypass tray Standard copy paper letterhead color paper tracing paper OHP transparencies envelopes etc Continuous COD VING siiani 1 999 sheets LIGNE SOUCO cccenssxsnecsanceqsaciaosaqtanaecssagesdiapaodenaraseatdiensene Rare gas lamp Developing system iccsnvssvenscndcterseeipcnteeccntitennemsareeed Dry process FIRMO SYSTEMI eesis ra ETEei Heat roller Cleaning SYSICMV ciccssssacivisicannsaateunasesenuieaneuisCincinsancianandees Blade and cleaning roller Photoconductor seaconcansicecteucscenconiwrens wheres aaineuseasetnneenes a Si Standard functions ANd modes Auto paper selection mode Image quality selection Auto magnification selection mode Zoom mode Preset zoom mode XY zoom mode 2 sided copy modes Page separation Split copy modes Margin mode Centering Image shift mode Memo mode Border erase modes Combine Merge Copy modes Print page numbers mode Form overlay mode Booklet Stitching mode Book to Booklet mode Sort Finished mode Auto rotation function Cover mode Transparency backing sheet mode Invert mode Mirror image mode Proof mode Repeat copy mode Batch scanning mode Eco print mode Program function Job build mode Form registration Shared data box Synergy print boxes Copy manag
73. Form reg Form registr key The Form registration screen will be displayed Inch specifications Select function 25 19 91 19 20 _ En Synergy Print Box Form box RBE sigas AAC Document Document Document Document Form d reg printing j reg j printing j reg l Box Box Box q Editing d Editing j Editin Shared Data Box Metric specifications Select function Shiner dese E d Shared Data Box Synergy Print Box Form bo amp acces AAA amp 3 l Document Document Document Document Form registr n printing 5 registr gt printing g registr 5 Box BOX Editing j Editin Box Editing 6 1 Section 6 DOCUMENT AND OUTPUT MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS NOTE Touch the Change name key and then enter a name for the form data If you do not want to register a name for the form data go directly to the next step Inch specifications Ready to register form s Orignal lt Regist Place originals then press Start key 25 10 01 19 20 orm registration Cancel F b orm box Auto l Documents Select q orig size i i Form006 Auto size 100 Back Edge F Select Reduce Orig set regi size i Enlarge gt direction DB Chande i amaaan aaa a nee ___Basic_ Edit j Metric specifications Set original Press Start key Ready to register form s Original Register 5 10 0 20 F b orm box Auie Documents Select size orig Auto
74. Inch specifications Ready to copy ection Oe EA Setting last page Inch specifications Ready to copy ales 100 Check direction of original top side Check direction of original top side I 1 Setting Setting 1st page start 5 Finish Page Denominator Auto Set denom H Left top ator H corner 4 Paper size Set AAD 100 Paper size i Check direction of art page Start l original 1 1 Check direction of q sn Setting Setting E q Lastpage 1st page l Start page gt i q Last page Denominator afoidiekokaia Auto Setting Set last page Denomin P Back Edge Left top H corner i Back Edge Left top H corner i 1 4 Touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the 1 2 Touch the Manual key screen in step 11 The screen to designate the last page will be displayed If you selected the 1 n style the Set denominator Set D in k ill ispl Inch specifications Set Denomin key will be displayed Ready to copy Ate i 100 1 5 If you want to manually select the denominator for the page numbers touch the Set denominator Set Denomin Check direction of key The Setting denominator screen will be displayed original top side Inch specifications 7 q Paper size a E F Ready 0K00 LY taxa 100 q 1 1 Check direction of s original top side 5 4 Setting Setting Paper size Set q 1st
75. Move Behind U 7 1 2 sided ser choice Original size d 5 Orig quality L Bypass BOX Counter setting Management Bj check s Machine Document Register Print User F default Management orig size gt report Adjustment Metric specifications Metric specifications Default setting Counter Z ee Bypass Hard Disk Counter setting j Management Bj check f Machine Document Register Print User i default Management Bj orig size gt report j Adjustment P i Register mode Exposure Mode Reduce Enlarge ahead Fi Sort Finished Move fT i I User choice backward Original size J 5 Quality orig L bad Ls 6 B NOTE If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it touch the 2 Select Customize Main function in the settings list on the Back key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 left side of the touch panel and then touch the Change key The Customize Main function screen will be displayed Inch specifications 4 Touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 Default setting Counter 5 Touch the Close key once again The touch panel will return __Defauttmenu____Settingmode to the Default setting screen Modify Co On Default Off A Diniy egbe key On Customize Main function p Customize Add function Change p l 6 Touch the End key The touch panel will return to the conte
76. NOTES 2 Select one of the Paper size settings e If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it touch 1st drawer cassette through 4th drawer cassette in the the Back key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch e The setting for drawer cassette No 3 and No 4 will only be available the Change key when the optional Paper Feeder is installed on your copier The screen to set the paper size for that drawer cassette will be displayed Inch specifications P 4 Touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the Default setting Counter screen in step 2 Default menu Setting mode 5 Touch the Close key once again The touch panel will return Auto drawer switching On All types of paper to the Default setting screen Paper size 1st drawer Auto Inch Paper size 2nd drawer Auto Inch Paper size 3rd drawer Auto Inch l aner ae 4th aa Auto inei Change y i Betun seting 6 Touch the End key The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab Metric specifications Default setting Counter Default menu i Setting mode Auto cassette switching On All types of paper Paper size 1st cassette Auto Centimeter Paper size 2nd cassette Auto Centimeter Paper size 3rd cassette Auto Centimeter Paper size 4th cassette Auto Centimeter Change p
77. NS L_a beso Touch the Box Editing key under Form Box The Box editing screen will be displayed Inch specifications Select function 25 10 19 20 Shared Data Box Synergy Print Box Form box GG6 COLLI abala S Form PRELA AS ENAREN Box Editing i Document Document Document Document 4 reg printing j reg printing j i Box Box q Editing Editing j Metric specifications Select function E d Shared Data Box Synergy Print Box Form box aizan ye Document Document Document Document registr i printing a registr 5 printing Box Box q Editing Editing gt Select the form that you want to delete and then touch the Delete key A verification screen will be displayed Inch specifications Order of 01 04 19 01 04 19 Conf Crrt 4 details 01 04 19 01 04 19 01 04 19 001 005 25 10 01 25 10 01 LA 25 10 01 Y 25 10 01 Order of Check Rev details 5 Down 25 10 01 001 007 Section 6 DOCUMENT AND OUTPUT MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS NOTE It is possible to change the order of display for the stored documents To do so touch the Order of indication key and then touch the Sort by date key and select either New Old or Old New or the Sort by name key and select either A Z or Z A as appropriate 4 Touch the Yes key or the No key as appropriate
78. No register Change y Default setting Management Management edit 9 Use the numeric keys on the keypad to enter the department ID code that you want to register up to 8 digits You can enter any number between 0 and 99999999 Inch specifications 0 99999999 ID code 0007 Metric specifications 0 99999999 ID code 0007 Touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 4 Select Name to display under the Setting item column on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the Change key The Name to display screen will be displayed Inch specifications Setting item Value ID code 0007 Name to display No register Metric specifications Setting item Value ID code 00074 Name to display No register eo Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS 8 Enter the name for that department and then touch the End key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 4 Inch specifications 1 F ist Sales Dept Limit 32 letters including NOTE For information on how to enter the department name refer to 11 Entering characters on page 7 104 9 Once you are finished registering that department s ID code and name touch the Next key Inch specifications Cancel Setting item Value ID code 0007 Name to display 1st Sales Dept LA eo l Default setting Management M
79. Paper type 2nd drawer Plain La Paper type 3rd drawer Plain Yv Paper type 4th drawer Plain Check bypass sizing Off Select paper type 2sided Change y Metric specifications Default setting Counter Default menu i Setting mode Paper type 3rd cassette Plain Paper type 2nd cassette Plain A Av Down Paper type 4th cassette Plain Check bypass sizing Off Select paper type 2sided Change y Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS 3 Select one of the custom paper type settings Custom 1 through Custom 8 under the Default menu column on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the Change key Inch specifications Select paper type s for duplex copy Default menu Setting mode Custom 1 On Custom 2 On Custom 3 On Custom 4 On Custom 5 On Custom 6 On Custom 7 On l Default setting Machine defaul Metric specifications Select paper type 2sided Select paper type s for duplex copy Default menu Setting mode Custom 2 On Custom 3 On Custom 4 On Custom 5 On Custom 6 On Custom 7 On A Lv l Default setting Machine defaul Touch the Off key if you do NOT want that custom paper type to be available for use in 2 sided copying Inch specifications Metric specifications NOTE If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it touch the Back key The touch pane
80. Perform this procedure when you want to register a new department ID code and set the restrictions for using the copier under that ID code Up to 100 department ID codes can be registered When the optional Hard Disk is installed on this copier up to 1000 department ID codes can be registered e Delete department ID codes Perform this procedure when you want to delete registered department ID codes e Change registered information Perform this procedure when you want to change a department name or the corresponding ID code e Change restrictions for use Perform this procedure when you want to change the restrictions for using the copier under each department ID code e Check all departments Perform this procedure when you want to check the total number of copies made under all department ID codes as a whole print out a copy management report and clear the copy counts for all of the registered department ID codes e Check individual departments Perform this procedure when you want to check the total number of copies made under each individual department ID code and or clear the copy counts for individual departments as well Perform this procedure and touch the On key when you want to turn the copy management function ON or touch the Off key to turn the copy management function OFF Perform this procedure when you want to change the default settings for the copy management function Reference page 7 4 7
81. Plain 5 62 Close 2 Specifying the type of originals This procedure specifies the type of originals being copied between 1 sided 2 sided and open faced 1 With the content of the Basic tab displayed touch the Original type key The Original type screen will be displayed Inch specifications Ready to Job build LU 41x82 cnt 1 sided copy Select Original 1 sided paper j Liye j 2 sided j Offset re Back Edge Reduce Orig set y to Job build Start k aidaa 1 sided Copy Select Original 1 sided paper g type j 2 sided joi Group Tae Back Edge Finished page l B Reduce Orig set Basic 2 Select between 1 sided 2 sided and Book in accordance with the originals being copied Inch specifications Ready to Job build lace originals then press Sta Metric specifications Ready to Job build a l 1 sided NOTES e If you selected 1 sided verify the direction in which the originals were set e If you selected 2 sided specify the binding direction of the originals and then verify the direction in which the originals were set e If you selected Book specify the binding direction of the originals Touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 1 3 Selecting between 1 sided or 2 sided copies This procedure selects the type of finished copies to be made betwee
82. Print screen will be displayed Inch specifications Density 4 Text Photo Ar f Exposure Orig image Finished page Manual 4 Text Photo AF f Exposure Image Eco Print mode j quality g 5 Quality NOTE The setting in regard to whether or not to use the eco print mode can only be made in the first step of the job build mode and will apply to all steps in the copy job 2 Touch the On key to turn the eco print mode ON Inch specifications Fy Ready to Job build Place originals then press Start key It is possible to reduce toner consumption M image is a little light Eco Print is saving toner consumption and it is economically Metric specifications Fy Ready to Job build ress Start ke Eco Print Toner consumption can be reduced Image resolution reduced Eco Print enables toner consumption reduction 3 Touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 1 Selecting the sheet erase mode This procedure selects the sheet erase mode in order to erase the shadows lines etc that can occur around the edges of copies 1 Touch the Edit key Then in the resulting screen touch the Border Erase Erase Mode key The Border Erase Erase Mode screen will be displayed Inch specifications Fy Ready to Job build Off Auto Off Border Select Modify Erase b orig size A Copy E e None Margin C
83. Print Box Form box GR Refer to 11 Entering characters on page 7 104 for information on PEA BRA 1 l Document Document Document Document Form entering characters Er a EE i Box Box Box Editing i Editing j Editing 5 Touch the Select orig size Select size orig key the Metric specifications Select regi size key the Original type key the Reduce Select function Enlarge key and or the Orig set direction key if you want to i 25 10 01 19 20 d perform the corresponding settings If you want to access the Scanning density key and or the eS i Ahk ee Orig image quality Image quality key to make those agsas CRG P TERT i Document Document Document Document Form settings touch the Quality key Ew Leaning Lica If you want to set access the Border Erase Erase Mode Ea ee key and or the Continuous scanning Multiple scanning key to make those settings touch the Edit key 3 Select the documents to be printed out and then touch the 6 Press the Start key Scanning of the documents will start Finish selecting key Once all of the documents have been completely scanned Inch specifications the touch panel will return to the screen in step 3 p If you want to register another document repeat steps 3 through 6 D f Wc asi s Up Order of esaer vob 004 1 25 10 01 oe a Q Job 003 1
84. Print Box Form box i Print Print Box Print the list the list editing the list l Reset Document Reset Box save term Box Metric specifications Document management ee Shared Data Box Synergy Print Box Form box l Print Print Box Print i the list the list editing j the list Reset Document Reset Box Box savin Box Default setting Touch the Set save term Set save period key and then touch key or the key to change the displayed save time to the desired setting Inch specifications ocument data saving term Set saving term for documents in synergy print box Set save oe No time l limit NOTES e The save time can be set to any number of days between 1 and 7 The factory default setting is for 7 Days e If you want the data to be saved indefinitely touch the No time limit key to highlight it 7 98 Touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 1 Touch the Close key once again The touch panel will return to the Default setting screen Touch the End key The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS 8 Hard disk management Perform the following procedure to access the HDD management mode screen and check available space and or delete any invalid data on the optional Hard Disk With the content of the Basic tab display
85. Print User default Management orig size P report Adjustment Number print Num of pages Original Metric specifications Default setting Counter a F Bypass Hard Disk Counter setting j Management Dj check JE Number print Black amp White Machine Document Register Print User i default i Management orig size report Adjustment Num of pages Original Print report i l Default setting Touch the Eng key The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab 7 93 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS 7 Box management default settings Perform the following settings in order to manage the boxes that are used under the document management functions NOTE This setting is displayed when the optional Hard Disk is installed 1 Box settings Document list print out Reset box Box name amp password Clear data in box Document save time Description Reference page This procedure will allow you to print out a list of all of the images stored in the box for the form overlay mode of the documents stored in the shared data box or of the documents stored in the synergy print boxes This procedure will delete all of the image data that is stored in the Form box as well as the documents stored in the shared data box and the synergy print boxes Make absolutely certain that you do not need the corresponding data before you
86. Register d 001 010 Department Order of LT indication S 01 1st Sales Dept 02 2nd Sales Dept 0001 3rd Sales Dept 0014 4th Sales Dept 00000015 5th Sales Dept 00000016 6th Sales Dept 00000017 7th Sales Dept Delete 001 010 Magister ji l Default setting Management i 2 Select Copy limitation under the Setting item column on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the Change key The Copy limitation screen will be displayed Inch specifications ist Sales Dept l Setting item Value Printer limitation On i Output limitation No limit Scanner limitation No limit Fax Transm Limitation No limit l Default setting Management Management edit i Metric specifications ist Sales Dept Setting item Printer limitation Output limitation No limit Scanner limitation No limit Fax Transm Limitation No limit or l Default setting Management Management edit Mgt Inf Limit i correction 5 in use Close Close 3 To allow copying privileges for this ID code touch the Can use key To cancel copying privileges completely touch the Is not permitted key Inch specifications i Can use PET ee d permitted l Management Management edit New register i Metric specifications Close 4 Can use permited l Management Management edit New register i NOTE If you want to quit the displayed setting without changi
87. Saddle tch 5 Paper size Set Wy Set first page f A4D Press Original Finished Copy front Check direction HA Set book original top Off side direction to back Copy on i Right Booklet A None z EER 1 1 Replace the first original with the next one and press the Start key Scanning of that next original will start 1 2 Once you have finished scanning all of the originals touch the Scanning finished key Copying will start 5 28 section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS 12 Automatic sorting of copy sets without the Document Finisher Sort Finished mode Since copying in this mode is performed after multiple originals are 3 Touch the Sort Finished key The Sort Finished screen will scanned and memorized copies can be sorted into the required be displayed number of sets even without the optional Document Finisher ae Inch specifications Ready to copy l Select 2 sided Select Combi q paper Separation pj orig size p OMODA l Exposure Reduce Auto Batch q mode y Enlarge Selection scanning gt l Orig image Margin Forms Sort Border Cover When Sort ON and On 1 set are selected 5S When Sort OFF and On Output each page are selected Function Metric specifications Paper size Fy Ready 0R 0 0 WAAD r 100 Select 2 sided Select l Exposure Reduce Auto Large of q mode Enlarge selection
88. Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Fax function management ON OFF 2 To turn copy management ON for the fax functions of this Perform the following procedure when you want to turn copy machine touch the On key management ON or OFF for the fax functions of this machine Inch specifications NOTE Fax management can be set up This setting is only available when the optional Fax Kit is installed in your copier 1 Select Fax Management under the Setting item column on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the Change Metric specifications key The Fax Management screen will be displayed Fax management can be set up Inch specifications Managem Def Set Setting item Scanner Managem On Fax Management Excess of limit Setting Unable to use Def Val of coun limit 999999 Total size 1 8 x11 No specif Total size 2 8 x11 No specif Change 4 Total size 3 8 x11 No specif j Default setting Management Managem Def set NOTE If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it touch the Metric specifications Back key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 1 Managem Def Set Setting item Touch the Close key Fax Management On Excess of limit Setting You cannot use Det Valf gaun lira 999999 The touch panel will return to the screen in step 1 Total size 1 A3 No specif Total size 2 B4 No specif Ch
89. Ser olo 12 PI P AON OJO 12 Print page numbers mode Invert mode Mirror image mode Interrupt copying AOAOINA ATAO OJOIBIROIRIRB alal S OJOJOJOJOJOSOJOJOJOlO OIBJOJOJOJOJOJOJO O O OJ OJ O O OJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOlOJOJOJOJOlOsOJOJO O OJsO OJO O OJOJOJOJOJOIOJOIOIOIOIOIOlOlOlOlOjOsOfOjsOjOjO olololol Document management functions form registration Document management functions shared data box storing documents OJOJOJOJOJOJOJOIOIOIOIO OJO O OlOsOlOlOfOfOfOfOfOfjOfjOfjOfyOfOjsOfjOfsOfsOfsOfsOfsOJsOJ OJOJOJOJOJO O i 1O OJOJOJOJOJO O O OJO OJO KAATA HJO O OOGO O MOOGI ololololololololololololololololololololololololo Aololololololololollllollolololololololo I IOIOIOIOI8 OIOI ooolooololooololoolooo 61 Document management functions synergy print boxes storing documents OJOJOJOJOJOSOJOJOJOJ OlOsOJOJOJOJOlOsOJOJOJOlOfsOJOJOJO OsOJOJOJO OsOl OJOJO OfsOJOJOJO OfsOJ OJO O OJOJOJOJOJO OJOJOJOlO OJOJOJOJO OsOsOJOl OJOsOsOJOJOlOfOsOJOJOsOsOJOJOJOJOsOfsOJOJO O OsO OsO OJO RAA AANO O OJOIOIO OJO O O OJO O O O O a2 Se 62 Document management functions shared data box printing out documents eae 8 ee es es cee eee Ore 63 Document management functions synergy print boxes printing out documents OITO Output management functions interrupt print SSS SSS SSS ee ee 67 Job build mode from step 2 altoke l OO TO IO
90. Set HE 7 Off original top side u AAD Stitching i EE En Fomor l Booklet Nana d 3 Check direction of d Book Saddle H Off original L2Bookle Stitch i Front cov i i l Right Metric specifications binding None l Book 2 sided Top Center H Left top Paper size ae ae ee nee eae 1 0 Touch the Cover key and select whether or not and where 1 original Ad j to copy on each of the front and back covers Stitching Front cov 5 Nana Inch specifications i l P i Se 2 sided mode Wine 8 Touch the Bind amp Fold key Front cover It is possible for you to center staple and fold up to 10 copy sheets 40 layout pages at one time a EEN g SITESI EERTE ig La csssssssssvvssssssssssssvsssecesssssessig Inch specifications Paper size WAID j war Back copy dira EES Metric specifications fF Duplex Mode PR a 5 24 11 12 13 Press the Start key Scanning of the originals will start If you set the originals in the optional Document Processor copying will start automatically If you set an original on the platen a message will appear telling you to set the next original In this case go to the next step Q Stop A Clear Replace the first original with the next one and press the Start key Scanning of that next original will start Once you have finished scanning all of the originals touch the Scanning finish
91. Setting mode Auto drawer switching On All types of paper Paper size 1st drawer Auto Inch Paper size 2nd drawer Auto Inch Paper size 3rd drawer Auto Inch Paper size 4th drawer Auto Inch Metric specifications Default setting Counter Machine default Default menu i Setting mode On All types of paper Auto Centimeter Auto Centimeter Auto Centimeter Auto Centimeter Auto cassette switching Paper size 1st cassette Paper size 2nd cassette Paper size 3rd cassette Paper size 4th cassette eee l Default setting Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Touch the On key to automatic drawer cassette switching ON Inch specifications When paper drawer is empty switch to another one set same size direction paper and continue copying Function Paper type All types ___of paper When paper cassette is empty switch to another one set same size direction paper and continue copying Function Paper type All types E of Paper j 4 In order to prevent a drawer cassette that holds a different type of paper from being switched to when the automatic drawer cassette switching function is turned ON touch the Feed same paper type key under Paper type NOTE If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it touch the Back key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 5 Touch the Close key The touch
92. Sort by name key and select either A Z or Z A as appropriate NOTE Check the displayed information If you want to print out the selected form touch the Print Form key If you want to change the name of the selected form touch the Change form name key and then enter the new name Inch specifications Check Correct details Item Details User name Document name Form 001 form name P Size 11x17 Orig set direction Back Edge Input source Copy Resolution 600dpi Form Registration date 25 10 01 14 06 User name Document name FORMO007 form name P Size A4f Orig set direction Back Edge Input source Copy Print Resolution 600dpi Form Registration date 25 10 01 14 06 Refer to 11 Entering characters on page 7 104 for information on entering characters Once you have finished checking the information for that form touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 3 If you want to check the information for another registered form repeat steps 3 through 5 Touch the Close key once again The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 Touch the End key The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab 3 Deleting a registered form Perform the following procedure when you want to delete a registered Press the Document Management key The Document Management screen will be displayed
93. Total Register Sett Management Each Mot Management Management total A Total edit 5 Def Set 7 21 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS 3 The total number of copies made under all department ID codes as a whole will be displayed If you want to print out a copy management report touch the Print report key Inch specifications Number print Black amp White Scan Transm Fax Transm Counter clear i Scan pages Trsm pages Commun Time i report 4 Default setting Managemen Scan Transm Fax transm Counter clear Scan pages Trsm pages Commun Time i report NOTES e The type of report printed out will vary according the setting selected for Copy Printer output management under the copy management default settings e If any of the Total size 1 through Total size 5 settings is selected under the copy management default settings the total size report will also be printed out 4 To clear all of the copy counts touch the Counter clear key Inch specifications Close Number print Black amp White Scan Transm Fax Transm Counter i clear i Scan pages Trsm pages Commun Time f report f Default setting Management i Black amp White Scan Transm Fax transm Counter clear Scan pages Trsm pages Commun Time i report Default setting Managemen 7 22 5 When the confirmation mess
94. Touch panel sound ON OFF Perform the following procedure to set whether or not the touch panel will emit a beep sound each time a key is touched Select Off if you want to turn the sound OFF 1 Display the Machine default screen See 2 Accessing the machine default settings on page 7 41 Inch specifications Default setting Counter Bypass BOX Counter i setting Management Pj check gt Machine Document Register Print User default Management Pj orig size s report Adjustment By Metric specifications Default setting Counter Bypass Hard Disk Counter i setting Management check j f Machine Document Register Print User i default Management Bj orig size report 5 Adjustment gt i 2 Select Key sound ON OFF in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the Change key The Key sound ON OFF screen will be displayed Inch specifications Default setting Counter Default menu Setting mode Key sound ON OFF On E Up Silent mode On Date Time 2001 10 30 14 02 Time difference GMT 08 00 Management code change 5000 Change y Down Metric specifications Default setting Counter Silent mode Off Date Time 30 10 01 14 02 Time difference GMT 08 00 Change MGMT code with 5000 Change y F Default menu i Setting mode C l Key sound ON OFF On Default setting 7 52 Touch the On key or t
95. Touch the End key The touch panel 1 will return to the contents of the Basic tab Metric specifications ument management l Shared Data Box Synergy Print Box Form box Box Box saving Box l Default setting i l Print Print Box Print q the list the list editing i the list NOTES e It is possible for you to change the 4 digit management code See Changing the management code on page 7 56 e Refer to the desired procedure s explained under 3 Making box management default settings and perform the corresponding setting s 7 95 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Reset box 1 Touch the Reset Box key under the box Form Box Shared Data Box or Synergy Print Box that you want to delete all data for A verification screen will be displayed Inch specifications Document Management Close Document Manageme Synergy Print Box Form box l Print Print Box Print q the list the list editing j the list Reset Reset Document Reset Box Box save term gt Box l Default setting l Shared Data Box Metric specifications Document management Synergy Print Box Form box Print Print Box Print the list the list editing j the list Re Document Re saving j l Shared Data Box i Default setting 2 Touch the Yes key or the No key as appropriate Inch specifications Shared Data Box Reset this Box Do you really want to reset
96. a large quantity copies and sorts multiple sets by shifting the position that each one is ejected It is also possible to use the Document Finisher to staple the copy sets or punch holes in them for filling purposes Document Finisher The Document Finisher stores a large quantity copies and sorts multiple sets Sort ON or groups copies made from multiple originals with all the copies produced from an individual original grouped together in one set Sort OFF It is also possible to use the Document Finisher to staple sorted copy sets Built in Finisher The finisher stores a large quantity of copies It can also sorts multiple copies into sets by shifting the eject position Paginated copies can be stapled too Job Separator When using the optional printer function the paper eject point can be changed according to the used function making it easier to sort paper Copied paper can be ejected to the Job Separator upper section See Copy eject location in Machine default setting on page 7 49 Hard Disk The Hard Disk is required in order to use the following modes and functions of your copier e Job reservation e Form overlay of registered forms e Repeat copying e Document management functions e Using the output management functions to change the job printing order cancel and delete print jobs and verify content It is also possible to register up to 1000 department ID codes under document management Key Counter The Key Co
97. and printing out stored documents Select regi size key the Original type key the Reduce Perform the following procedure when you want to combine and print Enlarge key and or the Orig set direction key if you want to out documents that are stored in a synergy print box perform the corresponding settings If you want to access the Scanning density key and or the Orig image quality Image quality key to make those 1 Press the Document Management key The Document settings touch the Quality key Management screen will be displayed If you want to set access the Border Erase Erase Mode key and or the Continuous scanning Multiple scanning key to make those settings touch the Edit key 7 Press the Start key Scanning of the documents will start Once all of the documents have been completely scanned the touch panel will return to the screen in step 3 If you want to register another document repeat steps 3 through 7 8 Touch the End key The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab 2 Touch the Document printing key under Synergy Print Box The screen to select the synergy print box will be displayed Inch specifications Select function Shared Data Box Synergy Print Box Form box S GRE aizan AAP i Document Document Document Document Form i j reg printing reg printing reg j Box B
98. and the touch panel will return to the screen in step 3 Copying is now possible using the settings that were registered under that program Program 4 Touch any key that is marked No registration and that Inch specifications corresponds to the program key 1 8 under which you want to register the settings The screen to register a name for that program will be displayed Register program Program 1 Inch specifications Program name Catalog A The set program is registered Is it correct Select program number No registration No registration Metric specifications Register program Program 1 Program name Catalog A The set program is registered Is it correct 5 50 2 Using programmed settings to make copies Touch the Program tab The content of the Program tab will be displayed Touch the program key under which the settings that you want to use are registered Inch specifications 10054 Recall Reg delete File A File B Ready to copy nie ae rome ose Change name gt Catalog A 5 Catalog C T 8 User choice Program Metric specifications F Ready to copy Scere 100 Recall Reg delete File B name 2 Program 1 REE gt Set the originals to be copied and press the Start key Copying will start using the settings that were registered under that program 3 Changing a registered program name Touch the
99. copies come out curled or are tacked unevenly turn the paper in the drawer cassette over e When copying onto special paper such as OHP film and other transparencies use Non sort mode Q Copying in the Sort ON mode This mode automatically sorts copies made from multiple originals into sets identical to the originals 1 Touch the Sort Finished key The Sort Finished screen will appear Inch specifications Paper size Set Ready to copy LI 11x81 100 Select 2 sided Select Combi q paper Separation gt orig size i omamne i l Exposure Reduce Auto Batch q mode y Enlarge Selection scanning l Orig image Margin Forms Sort Border Cover User choice Metric specifications Fy Ready iKemere 0 VA Select 2 sided Select l Exposure Reduce Auto Large of q mode Enlarge selection originals Paper size Set WAAD l Image Margin Page Form 4 quality Imag shift g numbering i overla l Sort Erase Cover Basic 8 5 section 8 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT 2 oa A QO 6 NOTE Touch the Sort On key Only for metric specification copiers produced The Output each page key will be changed to the 1 set key Inch specifications REEOA CKO 9 A Paper size Set LU 41x81 1 oO i Close Check direction of 2 2 2 arel ae wA Y Paper size Madd 1 i Check direction of oa original Touch the On 1 set key Touch the Close
100. displayed Management lt gt Job Queue E gt Repeat Cd 2 Touch the Box Editing key under Form box The Box editing screen will be displayed Inch specifications Select function Shared Data Box Synergy Print Box Form box S wie aigan ye Document Document Document Document 4 reg printing j reg j printing j Box Box Editing p Editing gt Metric specifications Select function Shared Data Box Synergy Print Box Form box GG6 ELLI m Oa La i Document Document Document Document Form registr printing 5 registr g printing g l Box Box Box Editing Editing Editing gt 3 Select the form that you want to check and then touch the Conf Crrt details Check Rev details key The Check Correct details Check revise details screen will be displayed Inch specifications Order of indication 01 04 19 91 04 19 Conf Crrt d details gt 91 04 19 01 04 19 e 01 04 19 001 005 Metric specifications Order of indication 25 10 01 25 10 01 25 10 01 25 10 01 Check Rev details 25 10 01 001 007 NOTE Section 6 DOCUMENT AND OUTPUT MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS It is possible to change the order of display for the registered forms To do so touch the Order of indication key and then touch the Sort by date key and select either New Old or Old New or the
101. e It is also possible for you to select the default setting for the location and width of the margins See Margin width on page 7 80 e If you select to have a left margin created during 2 sided copying and the location for the back side margin is set to Auto a right margin that is the same width as the margin on the front side will be automatically created on the back side of the copies 5 6 2 Separate front and back margin settings Inch specifications When you are making 2 sided copies the margin positions and widths can be selected separately for the front and back sides The width of each margin can be set to any 1 8 increment between 1 8 and 3 4 A setting of 0 will leave no margin space Metric specifications When you are making 2 sided copies the margin positions and widths can be selected separately for the front and back sides The width of each margin can be set to any 1 mm increment between 1 mm and 18 mm A setting of 0 will leave no margin space of 1 Set the originals to be copied IMPORTANT Set originals so that the top edge is facing either the back or the left of the copier Setting them in the wrong direction may cause the margin to be created in the incorrect position Touch the Function tab The content of the Function tab will be displayed Touch the Margin Centering Margin Imag shift key The Margin Centering Margin Image sh
102. eo NIN O N O N as 2 Repeat copy mode settings epi CJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJO OJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJO O O ace ee 9 0 Ofofololi ofo OJOJOJOJOJOJOJO O O OO OOOO OJOJOJOJOJOJOJO O OJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJO O PERES CAA Renken key 4 Finished mode OIO O Sere Ice 6 Punch mode Sake otoke 2 sided copy modes 1 sided 1 sided O O Aro FOG 2 sided copy modes 1 sided 2 sided OJO O O 1214 01 9 2 sided copy modes 2 sided 2 sided OIO OIO OIO Oe 2 sided copy modes Book 2 sided eee 09 O 12 oO ololololololofolofolofolololo 62 Page separation Split copy modes Book gt 1 sided 14 14 O 14 0 09 O 12 O 3 Booklet Stitching mode 20 GOTO Book to Booklet mode O 20 02 02 09 5 Margin mode O11010 O Centering Image shift mode O O O O 6 Border erase modes Sheet erase OJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJO O O O O OO OJOJO O O Auto selection filing mode auto selection Border erase modes Individual border erase Border erase modes Book erase Combine Merge Copy modes O OlOlOlO Oo OJO S OJO D S OJOO Q O OIO OOO OOO Q co O J Memo mode 4 Form overlay mode F T ototo ae ae ototo T ototo r T ototo r r ototo a G NIN PIPIS SIS AIO AAO AAA 09 O1 Cover mode lt a S HS 1 O 1O LO a or o PIPIPIPIXIXNINIOIOIDIDI Transparency backing sheet mode S RIO AORA
103. even more detailed information on any particular job just select that job and touch the Conf Crrt details Check Correct details key to display the e size of the paper the job will be output to and if it has been designated the location of ejection of the finished copies The optional Hard Disk must be installed on this copier in order to perform this operation Select the job that you want to print immediately in the Print status screen and touch the Move ahead Move up key to move that job upwards to the top of the list It is only possible to change the printing order for copy jobs It is not possible to move copy jobs ahead of print and fax jobs The optional Hard Disk must be installed on this copier in order to perform this operation OR select the job that you want to print immediately in the Print status screen and touch the Interrupt print key to stop the job that is currently being printed and start print out for the selected job The optional Hard Disk must be installed on this copier in order to force print a copy job Select the job that you want to cancel in the Print status screen and touch the Cancel Delete key The selected job will be canceled The optional Hard Disk must be installed on this copier in order to perform this operation Section 6 DOCUMENT AND OUTPUT MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS The following operations can be managed When the optional Hard D
104. holes key as appropriate The screen to select the hole positioning will appear lt Metric specification copiers gt Touch the 4 holes key The screen to select the hole positioning will appear If your copier has been set for 2 hole punching you can have the 4 holes key changed in order to display it as a 2 holes key Inch specifications Check direction Check direction of Metric specifications Ready to copy Check direction Check direction of original Touch the key that corresponds to the desired position of holes Inch specifications Paper size LU 41x81 Check direction Check direction of Paper size Set LU 41x81 100 Check direction of original Left side Right side Left top H corner i Hole punching will be accomplished as shown in the illustration as viewed from the front of the copies Inch specifications Metric specifications o o A o o o o o A A o o oOo O O 0 A IMPORTANT The position of the holes on each page may differ very slightly due to the fact that holes are punched in one sheet at a time 5 Set the originals to be copied 6 Press the Start key Scanning of the originals will start The number of scanned originals will be displayed NOTE Repeat this operation for all originals when using the platen After all the originals have been scanned touch the Scanning finished key 7 Cop
105. lamp amp indicator Press this key when you want to use the optional scanner functions of this machine The indicator to the right of the key will light when the machine is in the scanner operation mode The lamp to the left of the key will either light green or orange or will flash one of those colors depending upon the status of the machine See page 9 3 Fax key lamp amp indicator Press this key when you want to use the optional fax functions of this machine The indicator to the right of the key will light when the machine is in the fax operation mode The lamp to the left of the key will either light or flash green depending upon the status of the machine 45 Auto Selection key amp indicator lamp Press this key to light the lamp in that key when you want to use the auto selection mode The optional Document Processor must be installed in your copier in order to use this mode See page 8 3 Job Build key amp indicator lamp Press this key to light the lamp in that key when you want to use the job build mode See page 5 57 4 Repeat Copy key amp indicator lamp Press this key to light the lamp in that key when you want to use the repeat copy mode The optional Hard Disk must be installed on this copier in order to use this mode See page 5 42 Job Queue key amp indicator lamp Press this key to light the lamp in that key when you want to use the output management functions of the copier See page 6 20
106. machine default setting 7 58 Changing the management code machine default setting 7 56 Checking the copy management COUNTS ccceeeceeeeeeeeeeereeerees 7 21 Checking the total counter and printing out the counter report 7 93 Cleaning the copier ccavesntcnicciscacnnaveravavvnviarancvetandtcasenacicewenedenanencvniccinn 10 1 Cleaning the original COVEN cnsisscssescnasisscstcsierassienauensontnnessesvhanseiens 10 1 Cleaning the ONG Piriscaaxsteananciesaxcinertainnaittuanes axcudiwanundlioensstsenmcenmenddtelies 10 1 Cleaning the separator sccecccscseccsoredenercocererecctorndenetenannennenansaeaeceeesens 10 1 Cleaning the transfer roller ccccccccccccceccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeess 10 2 Combine Merge Copy modes ccccccececeeeececeeeeeceeeceeeeeeeeaeeeeees 5 13 COPIER MANAGEMENT ssierceceseacs veeescssxeateeientinevdeeuseraeevietiecte een 7 1 Copy default settings sscintsresicxredvsnnenintdauiarindcieersenidindinanercderaileianiah 7 59 Copy eject location machine default Setting cccceeeeeees 7 49 Copy limit copy default setting cececeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeseaneeseeeeeeeeeees 7 82 Copy management mode voces avetscenceecessatccdscardeadeaisdapiridesdesiieesebensectade 7 1 Copying in the Hole Punch MOG ccccccccccceeeceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeess 8 8 Copying in the Sort OFF mode cciieascctancesassssasaxscestenisarsuacevancnont oseens 8 6 Copying in the Sort ON mode is
107. management setting See Copy Printer output management on page 7 30 The following settings are available If All is selected as the Copy Printer output management setting All is the factory default setting Fax Reference transmission page The available settings are No limit Counter limit and Is not permitted A The available settings are No limit and Counter limit The available settings are Can use and Is not permitted If Each is selected as the Copy Printer output management setting Fax Reference transmission page O The available settings are No limit Counter limit and Is not permitted 7 7 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Copying privileges ON OFF Perform the following procedure when you want to turn copying privileges ON or OFF for the corresponding department ID code NOTE This setting will only be available when On is selected as the Copier function management ON OFF setting 1 Access the screen that contains the copy restriction setting items See Register new department ID codes on page 7 4 or Change restrictions for use on page 7 20 Inch specifications Department ny indication g l 02 2nd Sales Dept Limit 0001 3rd Sales Dept correction 0014 4th Sales Dept 00000015 5th Sales Dept Delete 00000016 6th Sales Dept 00000017 7th Sales Dept
108. panel will return to the screen in step 2 6 Touch the Close key once again The touch panel will return to the Default setting screen 7 Touch the End key The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab 7 42 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Paper size drawer cassette No 1 No 4 3 If you select Auto Detection automatic size detection here Perform the following procedure to set the size of paper that is loaded select the desired unit of measure Centimeter or Inch as well in drawer cassette No 1 through No 4 If you select Standard sizes standard paper size here simply touch the key that corresponds to the size of paper 1 Display the Machine default screen that is loaded in that drawer cassette See 2 Accessing the machine default settings on eT Inch specifications page 7 41 aper type 1st drawer Inch specifications Default setting Counter Select paper size 11x17 5 2x81 2 Re lso 81x14 81x13 is A50 Folio 2x11 Bypass BOX Counter i setting Management Bj check j f Machine Document Register Print User i default gt Management Pj orig size i report gt Adjustment pj Metric specifications Default setting Counter Bypass Hard Disk Counter setting Management Bj check gt Machine Document Register Print User default Management orig size gt report j Adjustment By
109. ready state and print out of the corresponding information will begin If the optional Fax Kit is installed in your copier the copier will be automatically turned OFF O whenever the auto sleep function engages In this state when the copier receives an incoming fax it will automatically recover to a print ready state and print out of the corresponding information will begin 4 11 Section 4 BASIC OPERATION 4 12 section5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS 1 Making 2 sided copies from various types of originals 2 sided copy modes With these modes 2 sided copies can be made from a variety of originals including open faced books etc or 2 sided originals 1 Making 2 sided copies from a 2 sided original With this mode a 2 sided original is copied and the front and back sides of the copy paper are used so that the copy looks just like the original lt Finished copy gt Left Right gt Lal a O S m D p xN D G a gt te a Left Right 2 Left Right 2 Top 2 o pe ml gt NOTES e Only paper sizes between 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 8 1 2 x 11 11 x 8 1 2 8 1 2 x 13 8 1 2 x 14 11 x 17 A5R B5R B5 A4R A4 B4 A3 and Folio can be used in this mode e The Document Processor option must be installed on your copier in order to use this mode 2 Making 2 sided copies from an open faced books etc original With this mode the two facing pages of a b
110. remove it If paper is torn during removal be sure to remove all loose scraps from inside the copier or they could cause misfeed later T Close the Document Processor original cover 9 10 section 9 TROUBLESHOOTING 8 Misfeed in Built in Finisher optional JAM 80 to 84 3 Remove the misfed paper If the message below appears a misfeed has occurred in the Built in Finisher Remove the misfed paper using the procedure below Inch specifications Paper misfeed 1 Remove any paper in output part of Finisher 2 Pull the tray of finisher down 3 Remove the paper if there is a paper 4 Set the tray X Careful for Drum 1 Lower inner tray of finisher 2 Remove the paper i 3 Remove the eject tray open left cover of machine 4 Remove the paper 5 Close cover and set the tray Metric specifications Paper misfeed 1 Remove any paper in output part of Finisher 2 Put Finisher tray down 3 Remove any paper 4 Set tray back X Careful for Drum 1 Put inner tray of Finisher down 2 Remove any paper 3 Remove output tray open left cover of machine 4 Remove paper 5 Close cover and set tray NOTE The drum area inside the copier is extremely sensitive to dirt and damage When removing the jammed paper be sure not to touch the drum area that is located inside the machine with your hands or with jewelry such as watches and rings etc 6 1 Remove the misfed paper in
111. report Adjustment 2 Touch the Management edit key The Management edit screen will be displayed Inch specifications Close Managem Total Register Sett Management Management Each Mot Management Management total Total gt edit A Def Set j Default setting Metric specifications Managem Total Register Sett Management Each Mot Management Management total Total gt edit A Def Set P Default setting Touch the Register key The New register screen will be displayed Inch specifications Close Department Order of auaa indication 01 1st Sales Dept 0001 3rd Sales Dept in use 0014 4th Sales Dept 00000015 5th Sales Dept Delete 00000016 6th Sales Dept 00000017 7th Sales Dept 001 010 Register l Default setting Management Metric specifications Close 0001 3rd Sales Dept correction gt in use 0014 4th Sales Dept 00000015 5th Sales Dept Delete 00000016 6th Sales Dept 00000017 7th Sales Dept l Default setting Management Department Order of Oooo Up indication i Select ID code under the Setting item column on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the Change key The ID code screen will be displayed Inch specifications Setting item Value ID code No register Name to display No register Metric specifications Setting item Value ID code No register Name to display
112. report Others Mgt Reg print Copy Printer output mgt Scanner Managem Fax Management Default setting Management Managem Def set Metric specifications nagem Def Set Setting item Print managem Printer error report Others mgt Reg print Copy Printer output mgt Scanner Managem Fax Management l Default setting Management Managem Def set Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS 2 NOTE To turn copy management ON for the printer functions of this machine touch the On key Inch specifications Printer management can be set up Metric specifications Printer management can be set up If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it touch the Back key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 1 Touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 1 1 27 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Printer error report Perform the following procedure if you want an error report printed anytime On is selected as the Printer function management ON OFF setting and printing is attempted with an invalid department ID code NOTE This setting will only be available when On is selected as the Printer function management ON OFF setting 1 Select Printer error report under the Setting item column on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the Change key The P
113. separation between the equipment and receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help CAUTION The changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment The above warning is valid only in the United States of America Section 2 NAMES OF PARTS 1 Main body 4 Original cover Option Open close to set the original on the platen 2 Operation panel Contains the keys and indicators for operating the copier 3 Left cover 1 handle Pull up to open the left cover 1 4 Left cover 1 Open when a paper misfeed occurs 5 Platen Set originals here for copying Place originals face down with the edges aligned with the size scales on the left and rear sides of the platen 6 Original size scales Be sure to align the original with these when setting the original on the platen 7 Drawer Cassette 1 Holds up to 500 sheets of standard paper standard paper specified by our company Drawer Cassette 2 Holds up to 500 sheets of standard paper standard paper specified by our company 9 Left cover 2 Open when a paper misfeed occurs inside the left cover 2 2 1 Section 2 NAMES OF PARTS Multi bypass tray Load paper here when copying onto
114. sided Select Combi paper Separation pj orig size ee j Exposure Reduce Auto Batch mode Enlarge Selection A scanning Orig image Margin Forms Centering Paget Overlay i Sort Border Cover 3 Touch the Border Erase Erase Mode key The Border Erase Erase Mode screen will be displayed Function Metric specifications Ready to copy aao o i 100 l Select 2 sided Select Exposure Reduce Auto Large of mode j Enlarge selection originals Image Margin Page Foun NOTE qualit Imag shift numbering Loverla Sort Cover The default settings for the border widths are the same values as that set for the sheet erase mode Function If you want to select the sheet erase mode or the book erase mode go to the next step If you want to select the individual border erase mode go directly to step 6 5 12 9 Touch the Sheet Erase Border erase key or the Book Erase key as appropriate The screen to set the outside border and the center area will be displayed Inch specifications Ready to copy Border Erase Paper size Erase the border shadow of original or shadow from centor of book Individual BordrErase E Metric specifications Paper size F Ready ire mere 0 Aad 100 Erase Mode Erase edge of original or center of book and copy Border Individual erase Erase Mode immense n
115. size 100 Select Reduce regi size Enlarge gt FORMoos Change name Refer to 11 Entering characters on page 7 104 for information on entering characters Touch the Select orig size Select size orig Select regi size Reduce Enlarge and or Orig set direction keys if you want to perform the corresponding settings for the originals being used If you want to access the Scanning density key and or the Orig image quality Image quality key to make those settings touch the Quality key If you want to set access the Border Erase Erase Mode key to make those settings touch the Edit key Press the Start key Scanning of the document will start Once the document has been completely scanned the touch panel will return to the screen in step 3 If you want to register another form repeat steps 3 through 6 Touch the End key The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab 2 Checking registered forms and changing form names Perform the following procedure when you want to verify the name of a registered form the size of the original document or the date and time it was stored in memory or when you want to print out the document in order to check it You can also use this procedure to change the registered form name 1 Press the Document Management key The Document Management screen will be
116. small size or special paper 1 Insert guides Be sure to set the paper width when loading paper on the multi bypass tray 4 Toner container 43 Toner container release lever Operate to replace the toner container Waste toner box 45 Cleaning shaft Pull and push back in after toner container replacement or when copy images become soiled with toner Front cover Open to replace the toner container or waste toner box 47 Power switch Turn ON I before starting to make copies Copy store section Copied paper is stored here Length adjustment plate Adjust to the length of the paper to be set in the drawer cassette Width adjustment lever Hold the lever and adjust the width guide to the width of the paper to be set in the drawer cassette Handles for transport Become handles when pulled out 2 2 2 Operation panel Section 2 NAMES OF PARTS Start key amp indicator lamp Press this key when the lamp in that key is lit green and you want to start copying 2 Stop Clear key Press this key when you want to stop copying or change the number of copies to be made 3 Reset key Press this key to reset all functions to their initial mode settings See Initial mode on page 2 4 4 Energy Saver key amp indicator lamp Press this key when you want to turn the energy saving mode ON Press the same key again to turn the energy saving mode OFF See page 4
117. specifications No limit 4 Counter 4 limit 4 Is not permited NOTE If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it touch the Back key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS 4 Use the numeric keys on the keypad to enter the maximum number of printouts that can be made under this I D code The printing limit can be set to any 1 page increment up to 999 999 Inch specifications 1 999 999 No limit Counter i No limit Counter Touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 7 15 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Delete department ID codes Perform the following procedure when you want to delete registered department ID codes 1 Access the copy management menu screen See 2 Accessing the copy management menu screen on page 7 3 Inch specifications Bypass BUX Counter i setting Management check j f Machine Document Register Print User default Management Pj orig size report Adjustment py Metric specifications Default setting Counter sla ieee y i Bypass Hard DISK Counter i setting Management check j f Machine Document Register Print User i default Management Pj orig size s report Adjustment py 2 Touch the Management edit key The Management edit screen will be displayed Inch specifications Close Managem Total Regis
118. specifying a desired paper size originals will be checked one by one for their size and you can select to either have paper of the same size as each original selected automatically auto selection or to have the originals all copied onto one single size of copy paper filing 8 1 2 X14 8 1 2 X11 Folio A4R B4 BS IMPORTANT e You can set up to 30 originals in the Document Processor in this mode Inch specifications e Only 11 x 8 1 2 and 11 x 17 or 8 1 2 x 14 and 8 1 2 x 11 size originals can be used together in this mode and the originals must be arranged together so that their widths coincide Metric specifications e Only A4 and A3 B5 and B4 or A4R and Folio size originals can be used together in this mode and the originals must be arranged together so that their widths coincide Metric specifications Asia Pacific e Only A4 and A3 B5 and B4 size originals can be used together in this mode and the originals must be arranged together so that their widths coincide Differing finished sizes Auto selection Each original will copied onto the same size copy paper as that original 8 3 section 8 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT Matching finished sizes Filing 4 Specify the size of the very first original to be copied and then touch the Close key All originals will copied onto the same size copy paper The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab Inch specificat
119. tab displayed press the Default Setting Counter key The Default setting screen will be displayed Def i Beut sera Management Reset A Stop Clear Interrupt Touch the Register orig size key The Register orig size screen will be displayed Inch specifications Default setting Counter a Bypass BOX Counter setting Management Pj check i Machine Document Register Print User default Management Pj orig size gt report Adjustment By Metric specifications Default setting Counter aan Bypass Hard Disk Counter i setting Management check Machine Document Register Print User i default Management Pj orig size report Adjustment 3 Select of the Original size custom 1 to Original size custom 4 settings under the Default menu column on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the Change key The corresponding setting screen will be displayed Inch specifications Default setting Counter Default menu i Setting mode Original size custom 1 2x2 Original size custom 2 2x2 Original size custom 3 2x2 Original size custom 4 2x2 Change y Default setting Metric specifications Default setting Counter Default menu i Setting mode Original size custom 2 50x50mm Original size custom 3 50x50mm Original size custom 4 50x50mm Change y i Default setting 99 Touch the
120. the key to change the displayed time to that desired any available setting between 1 minute and 240 minutes Inch specifications Set Changing time to turn autom into low power mode after last setting o WICH GUpyilly 1d one NOTES e The setting can be made to 1 minute 5 minutes 15 minutes 30 minutes 45 minutes 60 minutes 90 minutes 120 minutes 180 minutes or 240 minutes e If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it touch the Back key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 4 Touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 5 Touch the Close key once again The touch panel will return to the Default setting screen 6 Touch the End key The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab Default menu Sleep mode changing time Low power mode chng time Select COPY output mode Select FAX output mode Select main mode l Default setting 7 48 Setting mode 60 Minute 15 Minute Inner tray Inner tray COPY Mode Change y Copy eject location Perform the following procedure to set where finished copies will be ejected NOTE This setting will only be displayed when the optional Document Finisher Built in Finisher or Job Separator is installed on your copier 1 Display the Machine default screen See 2 Accessing the machine default settings on page 7 41 Inc
121. the Change key The Def Val of coun limit screen will be displayed Aes Limited value 999 999 Default value of counter limit can be set Inch specifications l Default setting Management Managem Def set i Metric specifications Setting item Scanner Managem LA Fax Management Excess of limit Setting Unable to use v Def Val of coun limit 999999 Total size 1 8 2x11 No specif Total size 2 8 2x11 No specif Total size 3 8 2x11 No specif j Default value of counter can be set Default setting Management Managem Def set i Limited value 999 999 Metric specifications Setting item Value Scanner Managem On Fax Management On Excess of limit Setting You cannot use Def Val of coun limit 999999 l N OTE Total size 1 A3 No specif Total size 2 B4 No specif Change 4 Total size 3 A4 No specif j Defaut setting Management Managem Def set Back key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 1 If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it touch the Touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 1 7 34 Total count for specified paper size 1 to 5 Perform the following procedure when you want to register a specific paper size in order to calculate and check the copy counts for that particular size of paper It is also possible to register a paper size AND type NOTES e
122. the Built in Finisher output section 2 Lower the Built in Finisher tray 9 11 section 9 TROUBLESHOOTING 7 Remove the misfed paper Q Close the left cover 1 Misfed in Document Finisher optional JAM 80 to 89 If a misfeed has occurred in the Document Finisher remove the misfed paper referring to the Operation Guide for the Document Finisher 4 If other trouble occurs Section 9 TROUBLESHOOTING If trouble occurs with your copier carry out the applicable checkpoints and procedures indicated on the following pages If the trouble persists contact your service representative or authorized service center Trouble Nothing lights on the operation panel when the power switch is turned ON No copies come out when the Start key is pressed Copies come out blank Copies come out too light Checkpoint Is the power plug connected to an AC outlet Is there any message appearing on the message display Are the originals set correctly Is the copier in the auto exposure mode Is the copier in the manual exposure mode Is the add toner message displayed Is paper wet Procedure Reference page Connect the plug to an AC outlet Perform the corrective action corresponding to the message When setting originals on the platen place them face down When setting originals in the optional Document Processor place them face up To change the overall exposure perform t
123. the original retail purchaser referred to as the Customer of a new Kyocera Mita copier in the United States of America or Canada based upon the country of purchase 3 In order to obtain performance of this warranty the Customer must immediately notify the Authorized Kyocera Mita Dealer from whom the product was purchased If the Kyocera Mita Dealer is not able to provide service write to Kyocera Mita at the address below for the name and address of the Authorized Kyocera Mita Dealer in your area 4 This warranty does not cover copiers or accessories a which have become damaged due to operator negligence misuse accidents improper storage or unusual physical or electrical stress b which have used parts or supplies which are not genuine Kyocera Mita brand parts or supplies c which have been serviced by a technician not employed by Kyocera Mita or an Authorized Kyocera Mita Dealer or d which have had the serial number modified altered or removed 5 This warranty does not cover Maintenance Kits or the components of Maintenance Kits which consist of the drum unit the fixing unit and the developing unit Kyocera Mita shall give the Customer a separate warranty for these items 6 This warranty gives the Customer specific legal rights The Customer may also have other rights which vary from state to state or province to province Neither the seller nor any other person is authorized to extend the time period or expand th
124. touch the Change key The Adj Manual expo Mixed screen will be displayed Inch specifications Default setting Counter Default menu Setting mode Adjust auto exposure OCR Standard Adj manual expo Mixed Standard Adjust auto exposure Standard A Adj manual expo Text Standard Adj manual expo Photo Standard Change y Default setting i Metric specifications Default setting Counter Default menu Setting mode Adjust auto exposure OCR Standard Adj manual expo Mixed Standard Adj manual expo Text Standard Adj manual expo Photo Standard Change y l Default setting Adjust auto exposure Standard mrw 3 Touch the Lighter key or the Darker key as appropriate to move the cursor on the exposure scale and adjust the exposure as desired Inch specifications Adjust copy exposure default setting Manual Text Photo 3 2 0 2 3 gt _ gt A Metric specifications Adj manual expo Mixed Adjust default setting of copy exposure Manual Text Photo 3 2 0 2 3 gt ___ x 2 l Default setting Copy default NOTE If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it touch the Back key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 4 Touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 5 Touch the Close key once again The touch panel wi
125. 0 01 14 02 Time difference GMT 08 00 Change MGMT code with 5000 Auto sleep On Energy Saver key setting Low power mode l Default setting 7 57 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Changing the energy saving mode Perform the following procedure to change the energy saving mode the Low power mode or the Sleep mode that will be entered into when the Energy Saver key is pressed 1 Display the Machine default screen See 2 Accessing the machine default settings on page 7 41 Inch specifications Default setting Counter Bypass BOX Counter i setting Management Pj check gt Machine Document Register Print User default Management Pj orig size s report Adjustment By Metric specifications Default setting Counter Bypass Hard Disk Counter i setting Management check j f Machine Document Register Print User i default j Management Pj orig size s report Adjustment By 2 Select Energy Saver key setting in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the Change key The Energy Saver key setting screen will be displayed Inch specifications Default setting Counter Default menu i Setting mode Date Time 2001 10 30 14 02 Time difference GMT 08 00 Management code change Auto sleep Energy Saver key setting Low power mode Change y Metric specifications Default setting Counter Default menu i Setting mod
126. 00 10 10 23 00 Printing Printer Waiting Fax Waiting 5 10 10 23 00 Waiting 6 Conf Crrt details Check Rev details key Touching this key displays the Check Correct details Check revise details screen enabling you for example to check the contents of or change the number of copies to be made for the currently selected highlighted job This is only available when the optional Hard Disk is installed on this copier Inch specifications Item Details Orig page 1 Set 1 Print size 11x81 Input source Copy Registration date 11 01 15 31 Change Preset gt Item Details Original 1 Set 1 Print size A40 Input source Copy Registration date 11 01 15 31 Change Preset gt q A and Y cursor keys Use these keys to select a job from the job queue End key Touching this key quits the output management function In this case the touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS 1 Copy management mode By registering a different department ID code for each individual department that uses the copier the copy management function will help you manage the overall number of copies made by each department The copy management function in this copier offers the following features e Manage use of all optional functions printer scanner and fax utilized by the same department ID code e Manage up to 100 individual
127. 00 wh or less 175 wh or less 200 wh or less 175 wh or less 200 wh or less e During the Low Power mode 75 wh or less 75 wh or less 75 wh or less 75 wh or less 75 wh or less 75 wh or less e Recovery time from the Low Power 12 seconds or 12 seconds or 12 seconds or 12 seconds or 12 seconds or 12 seconds or mode less less less less less less e During the Off and Sleep mode 0 1 wh or less 1 wh or 01 wh or less 0 1 wh or less 0 1 whorless 0 1 wh or less 0 1 wh or less 1 wh or 0 1 wh or less 0 1 wh or less e Transition time to the Low Power 15 minutes 15 minutes 15 minutes 15 minutes 15 minutes 15 minutes mode at time of purchase e Transition time to the Off and Sleep 60 minutes 60 minutes 60 minutes 60 minutes 60 minutes 60 minutes modes at time of purchase e During the Plugged In mode 0 1 wh or less 0 1 whorless 0 1 whorless 0 1 whorless 0 1 whorless 0 1 wh or less Power consumption in the Plugged In mode can only be terminated by removing the power plug from the outlet Duplex 2 sided copying e Comes as standard equipment Paper feed e Recycled paper made from 100 recycled pulp may be used with this product Contact your sales or service representative for information on recommended paper types etc 10 9 Section 10 MAINTENANCE AND OPERATION INFORMATION 5 Installing the optional equipment This section shows where to install the optional units for this copier For more details re
128. 009 IJKL_0000103 4 014 EFGH_02001024 019 ABCD_0500101 l 005 QRST_0000005 4010 MNOP_0000104 9 015 IJKL_02001034 020 EFGH_0500102 j Document Management Synerg 6 16 Section 6 DOCUMENT AND OUTPUT MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS NOTES 5 Touch the Yes key or the No key as appropriate Inch specifications e If that box was registered with a password the password entry screen will be displayed Enter the registered password with the keypad and then touch the Enter key Inch specifications Document Number 10 All data in box will be deleted Do you want to delete Enter password Metric specifications Document Number 5 All data in box will be deleted Are you sure Are you sure If you selected Yes the entire contents of the selected box will be deleted and the touch panel will return to the screen in step 4 If you selected No the touch panel will return to the screen e Refer to Registering a password for a box on page 6 18 for In step 4 without deleting any documents information on registering the password 6 Touch the End key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 Touch the End key once again The touch panel will return Touch the Delete all data box Delete all box data key A wihacontenicor the Basio ab verification screen will be displayed Inch specifications LJ JoBoo5 1 WED 15 32 ngeau data box i Conf Crrt Box i
129. 1 Hold the Document Processor open close handle and open the Document Processor Before opening the Document Processor check that no original is present on the original table or original eject cover If present the original may fall off when the Document Processor is opened NOTE Before setting the originals in the Document Processor check that no Original from the previous operation is remaining on the original eject cover Originals remaining on the original eject cover may cause Original misfeed 2 Set the originals on the original table in correct sequence with the side to be copied facing upward Securely insert the leading edge of the originals into the Document Processor as far as they will go 2 Set the original with the side to be copied facing downward Be sure to align the original with the original size scales When setting large size paper such as 8 1 2 x 11 A4R or larger pull out the support extension 8 2 3 Hold the Document Processor open close handle and close the Document Processor IMPORTANT Do not press the Document Processor against the platen with force Doing so many cause damage to the glass material A CAUTION DO NOT leave the Document Processor open as there is a danger of personal injury section 8 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT Auto selection Filing mode With this mode when you are using the Document Processor without pressing one of the paper size keys and thereby
130. 11 A4R 22 copies min B5 30 copies min B5R 18 copies min 40 cpm copiers Same size copying memory copying 11 x 17 A3 23 copies min 8 1 2 x 14 B4 23 copies min 11 x 8 1 2 A4 40 copies min 8 1 2 x 11 A4R 27 copies min B5 40 copies min B5R 22 copies min 50 cpm copiers Same size copying memory copying 11 x 17 A3 26 copies min 8 1 2 x 14 B4 26 copies min 11 x 8 1 2 A4 50 copies min 8 1 2 x 11 A4R 31 copies min B5 50 copies min B5R 24 copies min Warm Up UME serrent a aA Within 25 seconds at room temperature of 73 4 F 23 C humidity 50 RH From Low power mode Within 12 seconds FIE ECODY MIN ereny 30 cpm copiers From 3 9 seconds 11 x 8 1 2 A4 40 cpm copiers 50 com copiers From 3 5 seconds 11 x 8 1 2 A4 40161 04M 2 0 gee nee ee eee Aen ene en ROT Se eee mT eee Be Any ratio between 25 and 400 in increments of 1 Alternatively standard ratios Standard amount Of Memory cccecececeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 64 MB REINO eter rreter ee tener errr en tre rrr rrr ferret Tree Reading 600 x 600 dpi Writing 600 x 600 dpi Paper feed system ccssescswwesansdesrsuwssdestensarataararstvencennxeneds Automatic feeding from drawers cassettes 2 drawers cassettes capacity 500 sheets each 80 g m standard paper specified by our company automatic feeding from multi bypass capacity 200 sheets 80g m COO a er nE lt Paper weights gt Drawers Cassettes 60 g m 105 g m
131. 11 QRST_00001054016 MNOP_0200104 i C l 002 EFGH_0000002 4007 ABCD_0000101 4 012 UVWX_0000106 4 017 QRST_0200105 l 003 IJKL_0200003 008 EFGH_0000102 4 013 ABCD_0200101 4018 UVWX_0200106 l 004 MNOP_00000044 009 IJKL_0000103 4 014 EFGH_02001024 019 ABCD_0500101 l 005 QRST_0000005 4010 MNOP_0000104 4 015 IJKL_02001034 020 EFGH_0500102 2 Touch the Box Editing key under Synergy Print Box The screen to select the synergy print box will be displayed NOTE Inch specifications If that box was registered with a password the password entry screen will be displayed Enter the registered password with the keypad and then touch the Enter key Shared Data Box Synergy Print Box Form box gt GGG aceee AA i Document Document Document Document Form i E j reg printing gt reg r printing 5 reg S i nter password i Box Box Box i 4 Editing j Editin Editing Inch specifications Synergy Print Box Form box EF fs fe faa ee adnan fs fas fs i Document Document Document Document Form registr a printing 5 registr gt printing gt registr 5 i Box Box Box 4 Editing Editin Editing 6 18 Section 6 DOCUMENT AND OUTPUT MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Touch the Box Password key A verification screen will be displayed Inch specifications 007 L JoBoo5 1 WED 15 32 Q yosBo04 WED 15 33 O JOB003 WED 15 34 D sosoo2 WED 15 35 Q JoBoo1 WED 15 37 Metric specifications
132. 11 QRST_00001054016 MNOP_0200104 C C 002 EFGH_0000002 007 ABCD_0000101 017 QRST_0200105 08 EFGH_0000102 013 ABCD_02001014018 UVWX_0200106 l 004 MNOP_00000044 009 IJKL_00001034 014 EFGH_02001024 019 ABCD_0500101 l 005 QRST_0000005 4010 MNOP_0000104 4 015 IJKL_02001034 020 EFGH_0500102 l Default setting Document management 3 If you want to change the name of that box first select Box name and then touch the Change key Enter the new name as desired Inch specifications Default menu Setting mode C Box name ABCD_0000101 Password No register Lcrerge y Metric specifications Default menu H Setting mode ROME ABCD_0000101 Password No register orense y NOTE Refer to 11 Entering characters on page 7 104 for information on entering characters 4 If you want to change the name of that box first select Password and then touch the Change key The Password screen will be displayed 5 Use the keypad to enter the new password for that box and then touch the Close key The new password will be registered and the touch panel will return to the screen in step 3 Inch specifications Enter new password Clear Metric specifications Enter new password NOTES e The password can be between 1 and 8 digits long e If you decide not to register a password for that box touch the Clear key and then with nothing entered in the pass
133. 119 Q Copy 7 1 10 10 22 37 Norm copy 120 D Copy 5 10 10 22 40 Norm copy 121 D Copy 2 10 10 22 45 Norm copy 122 Q Copy 6 10 10 22 50 Norm copy 7 Press the Start key Copying will start 10 10 22 50 If a message appears telling you to set the next original go to the next step l Input source Original Set Registration i Type Replace the first original with the next one and press the y bouo l 10 10 22 40 Norm copy l Start key Scanning of that next original will start i eee face 6 10 10 22 50 Norm copy o Once you have finished scanning all of the originals touch the Scanning finished key Copying will start Modify copy_ If you designated a security code when you registered the copy job for repeat copying the code input screen will be displayed In this case go to the next step If you did NOT designate a security code when you registered the copy job for repeat copying the screen to select the number of copies or copy sets to be made will be displayed In this case go directly to step 4 5 43 section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS 3 Use the keypad to enter the appropriate security code and 2 Checking the contents of registered copy jobs the touch the Enter key If the entered code matches the registered one the screen to select the number of copies or 1 Press the Repeat Copy key The Modify copy list will be copy sets to be made will be displayed displayed In
134. 16 aay 7 20 7 21 1 23 7 25 7 25 2 Accessing the copy management menu screen Perform the following procedure in order to access the copy management menu screen 1 With the content of the Basic tab displayed press the Default Setting Counter key The Default setting screen will be displayed Default Setting Management Interrupt oJ D NO A DOO Ox Clear 2 Touch the Management key on the right side of the touch panel Inch specifications Default setting Counter Copy default E Language Management y Bypass BUX Counter setting Management check Machine Document Register Print User default Management orig size P report Adjustment Metric specifications Default setting Counter Language Bypass Hard DISK Counter setting j Management check Machine Document Register Print User default gt Management orig size gt report j Adjustment Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS 3 Use the numeric keys on the keypad to enter the 4 digit management code The factory default management code for 30 cpm copiers is 3000 for 40 cpm copiers is 4000 and for 50 cpm copiers is 5000 If the entered management code matches the currently registered one the copy management menu screen will be displayed Inch specifications Enter the administrator number Close i Metric specifications Enter the administrator number Close
135. 17 size Freauce Bach originals and A4 size copy paper can be used in this mode oe Suera ver Depending upon the size of the originals the image will be enlarged Co l or reduced to fit the size of the copy paper Booklet y Function Metric specifications Asia Pacific e Only A5R BSR A4R B4 A3 8 1 2 x 11 and 11 x 17 size originals and B5 or A4 size copy paper can be used in this mode Papersize Set Depending upon the size of the originals the image will be enlarged 100 i l Select 2 sided Select or reduced to fit the size of the copy paper Leaper eae a ss l Exposure Reduce Auto Large of q mode Enlarge selection originals l Image Margin Page Form q qualit Imag shift Dy numbering overla Sort Erase Cover foi 2 Page separation Split copy from 2 sided originals With this mode the two sides of a 2 sided original are each copied onto a separate sheet of paper NOTE The Document Processor option must be installed on your copier in order to use this mode 5 4 Touch the 2 sided 1 sided 2 sided 1 sided key or the Book 1 sided Book 1 sided key as appropriate to the type of originals being copied and the type of finished copies to be made Inch specifications Ready to copy tien 2 sided Separation Able to copy 1 sided separate or 2 sided copy using 1 sided original Book original
136. 1st paper Drawer for cover paper Bypass Default magnification Manual Change y Metric specifications Default setting Counter Default menu i Setting mode Select paper type APS Plain Default cassette 1st paper Cassette for cover paper Bypass Default mode Manual Change i Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS 3 Touch the key that corresponds to the desired drawer cassette Inch specifications Select drawer for cover paper 2nd paper 3rd paper 4th paper l Default setting Copy de Metric specifications Select cassette for cover paper Default setting Copy defe NOTES e If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it touch the Back key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 e The setting for drawer cassette No 3 and No 4 will only be available when the optional Paper Feeder is installed on your copier 4 Touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 5 Touch the Close key once again The touch panel will return to the Default setting screen 6 Touch the End key The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab 1 71 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Default magnification ratio Perform the following procedure to set whether or not the appropriate magnification ratio to be calculated automatically when you select the size of copy paper 4 7 12 Displa
137. 1x8 2 o ER i Inner tray Metric specifications Original Count set up 1 998 A 10 Dp Change top rear i NOTE Job reservation is not available if the Reserve next copy key isn t displayed 2 Set the originals to be copied 3 Select the settings and functions that you want to use for that copy job Inch specifications Paper Size Set Ready to copy Job reservation LJ 11x8 100 1 11x8 Plain 1 u 4 ST Sort Off 3 11x8 Auto 7 i Plain Exposure F a 11x8 E R led Brec Paper Size Set OAA F E ie Auto Exposure Exposure mode i User choice Function Program 4 Press the Start key Scanning of the originals will start Once all of the originals have been completely scanned the touch panel will return to the screen in step 1 section 4 BASIC OPERATION 5 Energy saving modes If you press the Energy Saver key even while the power switch is still turned ON the copier will enter one of the following two energy saving modes a state of rest Low power mode The lamp in the Energy Saver key will be the only lit indication on the operation panel To resume copying press the Energy Saver key once again It will take the copier less than 12 seconds to return to a copy ready state Sleep mode Just like with the Low power mode the lamp in the Energy Saver key will be the only lit indication on the operati
138. 25 10 01 eae d 7 Touch the End key The touch panel will return to the i A moe L Job 002 1 25 10 01 i contents of the Basic tab ee A l 001 010 i Document Management Shared Data Box Metric specifications Job cancel Document data box i 4 Order of Aae e L soBo03 1 25 10 01 L yoBoo2 1 25 10 01 ee QW soBo01 1 25 10 01 Finish 001 003 Selecting i l Document Management Shared Data Box Section 6 DOCUMENT AND OUTPUT MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS NOTE 3 Checking stored documents and changing their names Perform the following procedure when you want to verify the name of stored documents the size of the original documents or the date and time they were stored in the shared data box or when you want to print out the first page of those document in order to check them You can also use this procedure to change the registered name for the documents It is possible to change the order of display for the stored documents To do so touch the Order of indication key and then touch the Sort by date key and select either New Old or Old New or the Sort by name key and select either A Z or Z A as appropriate 1 Press the Document Management key The Document Management screen will be displayed 4 Touch the Select paper key the Sort Finished key and or the 1 sided 2 sided key to perform the corresponding settings
139. 3 selection 7 ERICA TROT 3 Electronic Filing unc ra Metric specifications Paper size Ready to copy GALD Press the Start key to selection Copying will start Able to copy mixed size originals at one time using Document processor Auto selection 7 _ameaesineenee rnme Electronic Filing 2 Paper Feeder Two Paper Feeders of the same type as drawer cassette in the main body can be added Capacity and the paper loading method is the same as those for the standard drawer cassette in the main unit Paper misfed in the optional Paper Feeder can be removed by opening its left cover 3 Paper Feeder The Paper Feeder holds up to 3 000 sheets of 11 x 8 1 2 A4 or B5 B5 is for Asia Pacific specification copiers only size standard paper Pull the Paper Feeder out towards you as far as it will go and then load up to 1 500 sheets of paper in each rows The cover on the left side of the Paper Feeder is prepared to remove misfed paper 4 Document Finisher This unit lets you store a large volume of copies and shifts the position of each copy set for ease of sorting It can staple finished copy sets and bind them It is also possible to use the Document Finisher to punch holes in them for filling purposes optional For more detailed information refer to the Operation Guide for the Document Finisher section 8 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT IMPORTANT e If
140. 30 Scanner function management ON OFF Perform the following procedure when you want to turn copy management ON or OFF for the scanner functions of this machine NOTE This setting is only available when the optional Printer Scanner Kit is installed in your copier 1 Select Scanner Managem under the Setting item column on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the Change key The Scanner Managem screen will be displayed Inch specifications nagem Def Set Setting item Value Print Managem Printer error report Others Mgt Reg print Copy Printer output mgt Scanner Managem Fax Management Default setting Management Managem Def set Metric specifications nagem Def Set Setting item Print managem Printer error report Others mgt Reg print Copy Printer output mgt Scanner Managem Fax Management l Default setting Management Managem Def set i Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS 2 To turn copy management ON for the scanner functions of this machine touch the On key Inch specifications Scanner management can be set up Metric specifications Scanner management can be set up NOTE If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it touch the Back key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 1 Touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 1 7 31
141. 4018 UVWX_0200106 004 MNOP_00000044 009 IJKL_0000103 4 014 EFGH_0200102 4019 ABCD_0500101 l 005 QRST_0000005 4010 MNOP_0000104 4015 IJKL_0200103 4020 EFGH_0500102 Document Management Synergy Print Box 6 12 Section 6 DOCUMENT AND OUTPUT MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS 4 Checking stored documents and changing their names 3 Either touch the synergy print box that contains the Perform the following procedure when you want to verify the name of documents to be printed out or enter its number using the stored documents the size of the original documents or the date and keypad Then touch the Enter key The Document printing time they were stored in the synergy print box or when you want to screen or the Box editing screen as appropriate will be print out the first page of those document in order to check them You displayed can also use this procedure to change the registered name for the documents Inch specifications Box editing Box No Tor a ane eemier even S WOU Management screen will be displayed 004 MNOP_ 0000004 009 IJKL_ 0000103 014 EFGH 0200102 019 ABCD_0500101 005 QRST_0000005 foto MNOP 0000104 015 IJKL_ 0200103 020 EFGH_0500102 l Document Management Synergy Print Box O N Metric specifications Box editing Box No OOL i Document Management Synergy Print Box 2 Touch the Document printing key or the Box Editing key under Synergy Print Box The
142. 5 1 2 X 8 1 2 8 1 2 x 14 5 1 2 X 8 1 2 gt 11 x 17 ON OO OD 100 OSU A Metric specification Reduction 25 50 70 A3 A4 A4 A5 75 11 x 15 A4 90 Folio A4 Enlargement 106 11 x 15 A3 127 Folio A3 141 A4 A3 A5 A4 200 A5 A3 400 Metric specification Asia Pacific Reduction 25 50 70 A3 A4 B4 B5 81 B4 A4 B5 A5 86 A3 B4 A4 B5 Enlargement 115 B4 A3 B5 A4 122 A4 B4 A5 B5 141 A4 A3 B5 B4 200 A5 A3 400 Set the original to be copied 2 Touch the Reduce Enlarge key The Reduce Enlarge screen will be displayed Inch specifications REEONA CKO 9 A 1 UE Plain pee Auto Exposure Exposure mode i User choice Function Paper Size Set 1 Paper Size Set AAD 100 E3 LJL Auto ae i Exposure We A Exposure Reduce Sort mode Enlarge Finished User choice Function Section 4 BASIC OPERATION 3 Touch the preset zoom key that corresponds to the magnification ratio that you want to use Inch specifications Ready to copy ity ee Reduce Enlarge RC 129 64 ee 8X11 11x17 Se o 200 5 2x8 2 gt 11x17 Yo 1 u 1 2 281x11 8 2x14 12 400 12 50 8 x14 gt 11x17 78 Close O 11x17 gt 8 x11 O 11x17 gt 5 2x8 Paper size LIA 141 A49A3 A53
143. 77 Manual exposure adjustment text mode copy default setting 7 76 Manual exposure adjustment text photo mode copy default setting ye stetcscsectoc sees assancessscsacacie ae sedansiesecomatenseeic 7 75 Margin NON eee sce en oe etree eee 5 6 Margin width copy default setting c ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 80 MEMO TN Seats steed eget ESE eae 5 9 Mirr r image OO orca coccinea tee cence aE ea 5 39 Misfed in Document Finisher cccccceceseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeaeaneeeeeees 9 12 Misfeed in Built in Finisher ccccccccceesseeeeeeseseeeeeeesseseeeseeeees 9 11 Misfeed in Document Processor ssssssneesrrrrrrrerrrrrrrrrerererreren 9 10 Misfeed in drawer cassette sssssessseseeeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeees 9 4 Misfeed in left cover ccccicesdonesccesdacsssintacetdenscedesntseeniededennradeenss 9 5 9 6 Misfeed in left cover 2 in cic cscnecetecicexciasasenaievbeeesdxedssitadeseaeviecbueniayaatvenes 9 7 Misfeed in multi bypass tray wise cc ceccsctescctcesssesestaxesstecicctetaddedemeasstenes 9 8 Misfeed in paper feed section ssessessssseseeseerrrrrrnrrsresrrerrrrrrrn ne 9 4 WUT DY DOSS TAY essene an i eiaa n 3 3 Multi bypass tray paper settings cccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeesesseeeeeeeeeeeees 7 87 Multi bypass tray settings display ON OFF machine default Setting ceeseeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 45 N NAMES OF PARTS siscecc adivoece
144. 9 1 or the Sort by Name key and select either A Z or Z A as appropriate 4 Select ID code under the Setting item column on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the Change key The ID code screen will be displayed Inch specifications Setting item Value DE oo 0007 Name to display 1st Sales Dept Metric specifications Close Setting item Value ID code 0101074 Name to display 1st Sales Dept Change y Default setting Management Management edit 7 18 Touch the Clear key to delete the old ID code Use the numeric keys on the keypad to enter the new ID code up to 8 digits Inch specifications 0 99999999 ID code 0007 Clear l Management Management edit i Metric specifications 0 99999999 ID code 0007 Touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 4 Proceed to step 10 Inch specifications 0 99999999 ID code 0007 Metric specifications 0 99999999 ID code 0007 Clear Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS 7 Select Name to display under the Setting item column on Touch the End key the left side of the touch panel and then touch the Change The touch panel will return to the screen in step 7 key The Name to display screen will be displayed 1 0 Touch the Close key Inch specifications The t
145. A 4 127 11x15 gt A Folio gt A 3 Paper size L A4D 100 141 A49A3 B5 3B 4 H 122 A 42B 4 i 5 gt B5 See o 400 115 B 42A 3 B 5 gt A 4 200 Yo A3 gt B 4 A5943 A 42B 5 NOTE You can also change the magnification ratio in 1 increm touching the key or the key as appropriate ents by 4 Press the Start key to begin the copying procedure 4 7 section 4 BASIC OPERATION 4 XY zoom mode With this mode it is possible for you to select the length and width of the copy image separately The magnification ratio can be set to any 1 increment between 25 and 400 Set the originals to be copied 2 Touch the Reduce Enlarge key The Reduce Enlarge screen will be displayed Inch specifications Ready to copy ty tei me E plan q 2 8x11 aT p LEI Color q vA Auto Exposure Exposure mode User choice Function Program Paper Size Set oon ETE Plain i ETE ar Touch the XY Zoom key The screen to select the magnification ratio will be displayed Inch specifications U F Ready to copy a 154 51 2X81 2 981 2x1 4 H 129 8 2x11 gt 11x17 Paper size LIAdD 100 141 A49A3 A 59A 43 1 eter A A3 gt A4 f A49A5 Metric specifications Asia Pacific Ready to copy ERAD 100 Reduce Enlarge 141 A 4943 81 B 42A 4 B 5 gt B 4 B 5 gt A5 H 122 A49B 4 70
146. Aad D EJ Colour B Bypass Plain Touch the Insert page Insert blank page key Inch specifications Scan next original s Place the originals and press start key Cancel LI 11x8 1 sided 2 sided copy Select Original l paper j type j q Offset Back Edge l AMS l Wee a sa 5 E 7 sa Print from Rear page Scanning finished Metric specifications Scan next original s Place the originals and press start key Press Scanning finished key when starting cop blank page Print from rear page Scanning i finished Wado 1 sided 2 sided Copy Origina Group AMS Back Edge l g 3 Reduce Orig set eae The job build set up procedure is complete Touch the Scanning finished key Copying will start Inch specifications Scan next original s Place the originals and press start key Press Scanning finished key when starting cop LI 11x8 1 sided 2 sided copy Back Edge l AM l hemm EE er Print from Rear page Scanning finished Metric specifications Scan next original s Place the originals and press start key Press Scanning finished key when starting copy WAdo 1 sided 2 sided Copy Select Original paper i type i q AMS Back Edge Reduce l Enlarge preessessessocsessssosesssossosasosassases i Finished Scanning finished 5 61 section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS 24 If there are no pr
147. Check direction Check direction of oriainal Check direction original can be shown at right side of display Follow the steps If setting mode is wrong incorrect copy will result IMPORTANT If the designation for the direction that the originals are set is not correct copying may be accomplished incorrectly Touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 1 section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS 7 Setting the scanning density This procedure sets the copy exposure for the finished copies 1 Touch the Quality key Then in the resulting screen touch the Exposure mode key The Exposure mode screen will be displayed Inch specifications Dancity A Text Photo Off q rint l Exposure Orig image l Manuela Text Photo Off q rint j l Exposure Image Eco P l i mode gt quality 5 l Quality If you want to have the copy exposure selected automatically touch the Auto key If you want to manually set the exposure touch the Manual key and then touch the Lighter key or the Darker key to move the cursor on the exposure scale and adjust the exposure as desired Inch specifications F Ready to Job build Place originals then press Start ke Exposure mode F Ready to Job build Set or Press Start k Touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 1 5 65 section 5 OTHER CONVE
148. Counter Clear limit i Management Management edit New register i 1 Access the screen that contains the copy restriction setting items See Register new department ID codes on page 7 4 or Change restrictions for use on page 7 20 Metric specifications 1 999 999 Inch specifications Limited value 999 999 Counter l Clear Close limit Department Order of indication y 02 2nd Sales Dept Limit i 0001 3rd Sales Dept correction gt ar i 0014 Ath Sales Dept i 00000015 5th Sales Dept eee 3 00000016 6th Sales Dept 00000017 7th Sales Dept Touch the Close key 001 010 The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 CIST Metric specifications Department Order of _ _ 01 1st Sales Dept i Limit l in use AR 0014 Ath Sales Dept 00000015 5th Sales Dept Delete 00000016 6th Sales Dept Down 00000017 7th Sales Dept 001 010 Register y 02 2nd Sales Dept LA Mgt Inf 0001 3rd Sales Dept correction 2 Select Scanner limitation under the Setting item column on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the Change key The Scanner limitation screen will be displayed Inch specifications 1st Sales Dept Setting item Printer limitation Output limitation No limit Scanner limitation No limit Fax Transm Limitation No limit Metric specifications 1st Sales Dept Setting i
149. E ee AE E E eee ee 5 13 2 ided CODY MOGES ca i suciciennreven ti suetnanesanbbeieinadteieananenaDarrkaratecatneaenes 5 1 AMA EE E cece EN E E E TA EET A EA 5 13 A Accessing the copy default settings ccccseeeseeeceeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeees 7 62 Accessing the copy management menu screen eeeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 3 Accessing the machine default settings cceeeeeeeeeeeeneeees 7 41 Adjusting the copy exposure ccccccccecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaeaeaeanaeaeaeaenes 4 2 Atihe end Ol COD IG errre a desea teaiansentastan 4 4 Auto clear function sascizensesonduiess dnensGansecwedvosdapnnraescdedesdsnroayeecescesessdees 2 4 Auto drawer cassette switching ON OFF machine default setting cccccccccecsseseesseeeeeeeeeeeeeseaueaeaeeeeeeeeees 7 42 Auto exposure adjustment copy default Setting cee 7 73 Auto exposure adjustment OCR copy default setting 7 74 Auto low power function ccarcenicecteatccesaaysaetansenacecarcahisessennnanuoiceeecs 4 11 Auto low power time machine default Setting eee 7 48 Auto magnification selection mode ssssssssssssrirrrrrssesrerrrrrrrrrrnnn 4 5 Auto rotation function ic caveeitececctreessstescausesstcemeosseseeeeeeentcaetaeoteseaens 5 30 Auto Rotation mode ON OFF copy default setting 0 7 79 Auto selection mode 2 0 ccc ccccccccccsseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesasaaeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeseaaaaenees 8 3 Auto selection Filing mode
150. EES Margin Page Imag shift B numbering P 2 If you want the size of the originals to be detected automatically touch the Auto key If you want to select a standard original size touch the key that corresponds to the desired size If you want to select another standard original size touch the Other stand Size Others stand Size key and select the desired size If you want to select the dimensions of the originals manually touch the Input size key and then set the corresponding dimensions Inch specifications Fy Ready to Job build Place Is then press Start ke Auto 82x14 11x15 L A i Select 11x17 51 2 X 8 A4 9 1 E 4 yn Bi ex 11 Bile X 5 h A4 A Other stand Size Metric specifications F Ready to Job build Set original Press Start key Select size original 215x400mm l Others i stand Size 3 Touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 1 5 67 section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS 42 Selecting the repeat copy mode This procedure allow you to select the repeat copy mode so that you can make any necessary number of additional copies later 1 Touch the Edit key Then in the resulting screen touch the Modify Copy key The Modify Copy screen will be displayed Inch specifications Fy Ready to Job build Auto ils Off Border Select Modify i Erase 5 orig size i
151. FOR HOME OR OFFICE USE 3371 LISTED 1 T E This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 Cet appareil num rique de la classe B est conforme la norme NMB 003 du Canada THIS PRODUCT COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR CHAPTER 1 SUBCHAPTER J C11 KYOCERA MITA CORPORATION 2 28 1 CHOME TAMATSUKURI CHUO KU OSAKA JAPAN 2 28 1 CHOME TAMATSUKURI CHUO KU OSAKA JAPAN 2 28 1 CHOME TAMATSUKURI CHUO KU OSAKA JAPAN MADE IN CHINA gt PS lt MADE IN CHINA gt PS lt MADE IN CHINA gt PS lt 3 Optical unit When checking the optical unit avoid direct exposure to the la ser beam which is invisible Shown below is the label located on the cover of the optical unit DANGER INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN AVOIDO DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM CAUTION NVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN ACOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM ATTENTION RAYONNEMENT LASER INVISIBLE SI OUVERT DANGEREUX DE REGARDER A L INTERIEUR VORSICHT UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLEN WENN GE FFNET NICHT HINENSEHEN TYPE 2AV1301 MATSUSHITA WAVE LENGHT 770 795nm LASER SOURCE 5mW INPUT 24VDC MAX2 0A 5VDC 300mA VW Acs 4 Maintenance For safety of the service personnel follow the m
152. Form key A list of registered forms will be displayed Inch specifications En Loading Form Overlay first scanned image onto the scanned image or on registered from Metric specifications Scan form Overlay 1st image on the scanned r image or on registered form Select from that list the image that you want to use and then touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 4 Inch specifications 4 Form 005 Form 004 11x8 2 fd 3 Form 003 8x11 4 Loading KON OM i24 Form 002 11x8 2 ia Form 001 11x81 2 A The arrow means direction of registered form Set original and form directions Form selection 8 Form004 100x230 L Form i a Form003 Ada Loading i Form002 Adc EE The arrow means direction of registered form Set original and form directions Set the originals that you want to copy and go directly to step 10 section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS 9 10 11 12 If you are using the optional Document Processor make sure that the original that you want to use as the form is on top of the originals that you want to copy If you are using the platen set the original that you want to use as the form Press the Start key Copying will start If a message appears telling you to set the next original go to the next step Replace the first original with the next one and press the Start key Scanning of that next ori
153. Fy Ready to Job build Auto Off y Off l Border Select Modif q Erase 5 orig size 5 Copy None l Margin Metric specifications F Ready to Job build Set original Press Start key Job Build Step1 Auto None Off Erase Select Modify l Mode size orig f cop jd None Page j numbering NOTE The setting in regard to the margin mode or the centering image shift mode can only be made in the first step of the job build mode and will apply to all steps in the copy job 2 Touch the Margin key or the Centering Imag shift key as appropriate For more detailed information on these two settings refer to the explanation for the margin mode on page 5 6 or the centering image shift mode on page 5 8 as appropriate Inch specifications Fy Ready to Job build Place originals then press Start ke Reposition image to left right or top bottom and also center image Margin on paper Metric specifications Fy Ready to Job build Set original Press Start key Margin Image shift Reposition image to left right or Margin top bottom and center image on paper Image ie Touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 1 Selecting the print page numbers mode This procedure selects the print page numbers mode in order to have page numbers printed on the corresponding copies 1 Touch the Edit key Then in the resulti
154. G GIOGO na p Scanner functions Scan to PC HRS IRD aO O ONOI O Scanner functions Send E mail ace Cyl a Ce Ci Scanner functions TWAIN keke PAEa Fer GOIG a sas If aes Scanner functions Database connection Pee OOO Ore C Col 1 Ole ee PO EO a 10 12 Da Ea ro few f ro rea ro ro Fey f Kog f ro Key f ro O f S Ea f K O S O O 03 S Kel O 02 02 O O 02 02 S z EA Cfojojoli i i i i i i i ollo O OI 2e 16 The book g page separation split copy mode and the transparency backing sheet mode cannot be used in combination with each other 17 The print page numbers mode is only available in the auto magnification selection mode 18 Because a cover can be selected within the booklet stitching and book to booklet modes they cannot be used in combination with the cover mode 19 The transparency backing sheet mode and the cover mode cannot be used in combination with each other 20 The booklet stitching and book to booklet modes cannot be used in combination with original size selection input size 21 The function selected second will be given priority and original size selection auto selection will engage 22 Cannot be used in combination with the punch mode Appendix Functions and settings combination chart 23 The booklet stitching and book to booklet modes cannot be used in combination with the comb
155. Inch specifications Select box No with key 001 ABCD_0000001 4 006 uvwx_ooo0006 011 QRST_ 0000105 016 MNOP_0200104 E o 7 i 002 EFGH_0000002 AEA 0000101 012 UVWX_ 0000106 017 QRST_0200105 i J 003 WKL_ 0200003 008 EFGH_000010 013 ABCD_0200101 018 UVWX_0200104 004 MNOP 0000004 009 IJKL_ 0000103 014 EFGH 0200102 019 ABCD_050010 005 QRST_ 0000005 010 MNOP_0000104 ots IJKL_ 0200103 020 EFGH_0500102 l Document Management Synergy Print Box Metric specifications ob cance cancel Box No with la Document Management Synergy Print Box Touch the Change name key and then enter a name for the documents If you do not want to register a name for the documents go directly to the next step Inch specifications Original Register Ready to register document s 11x81 Biaxtt PI iginals th Start k pods Auto 1 sided F orig size type g _Job001 J 1E Auto size 100 Back Eage sy ar EER set sy size ar EER Change B name asic Original Register A4 D Auto size 100 Back Edge Select Reduce Orig set regi size s BEELI direction 007 Auto 1 sided F size orig type i q _Job001 Change name Refer to 11 Entering characters on page 7 104 for information on entering characters Section 6 DOCUMENT AND OUTPUT MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS 6 Touch the Select orig size Select size orig key the 2 Combining
156. Machine Document Register Print User l default Management Pj orig size i report j Adjustment py 7 62 3 Use the keypad to enter the 4 digit management code The factory default setting for 30 com copiers is 3000 for 40 cpm copiers is 4000 and for 50 cpm copiers is 5000 Inch specifications Enter the administrator number Metric specifications Enter the administrator number 4 If the entered code matched the registered one the Copy default screen will be displayed Inch specifications Default setting Counter Default menu Setting mode Exposure mode Manual Exposure steps 1 step Original image quality Text Photo Eco Print Off Background exp adj Standard Change y Metric specifications Default setting Counter Default menu i Setting mode q Exposure mode Manual t Exposure steps 1 step Image quality original Text Photo Eco Print Off i Background exp adj Standard Change y i l Default setting NOTES e It is possible for you to change the 4 digit management code See Changing the management code on page 7 56 e Refer to the desired procedure s explained under 6 Making copy default settings and perform the corresponding setting s 6 Making copy default settings Perform the following procedure that corresponds to the desired setting Exposure mode Perform the following procedure to select between au
157. Metric specifications Shared Data Box Reset this box Do you really want to reset If you selected Yes all the data in the selected box will be deleted and the touch panel will return to the screen in step 1 If you selected No the touch panel will return to the screen in step 1 without deleting any data 3 Touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the Default setting screen Touch the End key The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab 7 96 Box name amp password Clear data in box 1 Touch the Box editing key under Synergy Print Box The Box editing screen will be displayed Inch specifications Document Management Shared Data Box Synergy Print Box Form box Box Print F editing the list Reset Reset vocument Reset F Box Box save term Box Print Print the list the list Metric specifications Document manag t Shared Data Box Synergy Print Box Form box l Print Print Box Print q the list the list editing the list Box Box savin Box 2 Either touch the synergy print box that contains the information to be modified or enter its number using the keypad Then touch the Enter key Inch specifications Select box No ieee eee Co ce l Default setting Document management Metric specifications Select box No Box No l With key 001 ABCD_0000001 4 006 UVWX_00000064 0
158. NE 120V 60Hz 12A MACHINE No AJK3 MANUFACTURED C Tested To Comply With FCC Standards FOR HOME OR OFFICE USE 3371 LISTED 1 T E This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 Cet appareil num rique de la classe B est conforme a la norme NMB 003 du Canada THIS PRODUCT COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR CHAPTER 1 SUBCHAPTER J C11 KYOCERA MITA CORPORATION COPYING MACHINE 120V 60Hz 12A MACHINE No AJL3 MANUFACTURED C Tested To Comply With FCC Standards FOR HOME OR OFFICE USE 3371 LISTED 1 T E This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 Cet appareil num rique de la classe B est conforme a la norme NMB 003 du Canada THIS PRODUCT COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR CHAPTER 1 SUBCHAPTER J C11 KYOCERA MITA CORPORATION COPYING MACHINE 120V 60Hz 12A MACHINE No AJM3 MANUFACTURED C Tested To Comply With FCC Standards
159. NIENT FUNCTIONS Setting the image quality This procedure sets the image quality according to the type of originals being copied 1 Touch the Quality key Then in the resulting screen touch the Orig image quality key The Orig image quality screen will be displayed Inch specifications Density 4 Tavt Dhata Off Exposure Orig image Fy Ready to Job build Set original Press Start ke Manual 4 Tavt 1 Dhata Off Exposure Image Eco Print mode gt quality i ji 7 Quality 2 Select the image quality mode by touching the Manual key and then touching the Text Photo key the Photo key or the Text key as appropriate Inch specifications Fy Ready to Job build Pl igi Text Photo Set this mode to copy orig with mixed text and photo Photo Add a dimensional effect of photo Text Copy a pencil or fine line F Ready to Job build Set original Press Start key Text Photo Set this mode to copy original mixed text amp photo Photo Add a dimensional effect of photo Text Copy pencil amp fine line clearly Text Photo Touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 1 5 66 9 Turning the eco print mode ON This procedure allows you to turn the eco print mode ON in order to save on toner use 1 Touch the Quality key Then in the resulting screen touch the Eco Print key The Eco
160. NT FUNCTIONS 3 Multi bypass tray paper settings 1 Paper size and type Perform the following procedure in order to use the multi bypass tray to feed copy paper 1 With the content of the Basic tab displayed press the Default Setting Counter key The Default setting screen will be displayed Default Setting Management Interrupt Reset 4 Stop Clear 2 Touch the Bypass setting key The Bypass setting screen will be displayed Inch specifications Default setting Counter Bu o Bypass BOX Counter setting Management Bj check Machine Document Hegister Print User F default gt Management Bj orig size report i Adjustment pj Metric specifications Default setting Counter Co Language Bypass Hard Disk Counter setting Management Bj check Machine Document HegIster Print User default Management long size y report Adjustment By 3 Specify the desired method of selecting the paper size If you select Auto Detection here select the desired unit of measure Centimeter or Inch as well and then go directly to step 5 If you want to select a custom paper size touch the Input size and then go to the next step Inch specifications Default setting Counter Paper size Paper type Plain Select insite paper type ihare Standard j Metric specifications Default setting Counter Paper size Centimeter
161. O OJOJOJOJOJOlOJOJO O OJOJO O O Ee ojojojo olololojololo OJofojojojojojojo SIZES 34 Transparency backing sheet mode mie O sia ors Print page numbers mode 13 13113 O GO 2710 Invert mode Miori Mirror image mode Interrupt copying GO Ae Document management functions form registration AO 2 AMOI OJO Document management functions shared data box storing documents 61 Document management functions synergy print boxes storing documents 62 Document management functions shared data box printing out documents 63 Document management functions synergy print boxes printing out documents Output management functions interrupt print 65 Repeat copy mode print out Job build mode Step 1 1 O OJO IO Recs 67 Job build mode from step 2 Scanner functions Scan to PC O OJ OJO O Scanner functions Send E mail Scanner functions TWAIN COO OD DD RD ee CO Os ES Q Image quality mode text amp photo o ojolo ojolojolo ojol o oj o ojol o oj o oj olo o o Image quality mode photo A EO AO OCOLO PE E E O OIO O Image quality mode text SfolotofololotofolotorofoloTorofoloro ofoloTo lol e com sere mde ain amd CO ee OIOIOIOIOIO OIOIOIOIOIO OIO OIO Copy exposure mode manual exposure CIPS TEeALS CO Oro O ALOA O OO GOJO OJO Eco print mode OIOIOIO 144 0O 14 O O 0
162. Oo H 2 3 Lighter 53 a l O 2 43 k q Lighter a Darker J NOTE If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it touch the Back key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 4 Touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 5 Touch the Close key once again The touch panel will return to the Default setting screen 6 Touch the End key The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab 1 77 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Sort Finished mode ON OFF Perform the following procedure to determine whether or not the Sort and or the Finished modes will be the default setting in the initial mode 1 Display the Copy default screen See 5 Accessing the copy default settings on page 7 62 Inch specifications Default setting Counter a Bypass setting Machine Document Register default Management Pj orig size s Metric specifications BOX Counter i Management check j f Print User f report gt Adjustment py Default setting Counter opy efault a Bypass setting i Machine Document Register default Management Pj orig size s Hard Disk Counter i Management check j f Print User i report gt Adjustment py 2 Select Sort in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the Change key The Sort
163. Press the Start key Scanning of the originals will start Step 2 Leaving the back side of the first original A blank Touch the Print from Front page key Leaving the back side of the original blank will allow the next copy to start on the front side of the next page Inch specifications LI 11x8 1 sided 2 sided copy Select Orig paper i type q inal Offset AMS Back Edge l o Reduce Orig set Metric specifications Scan next original s Place the originals and press start key Press Scanning finished key when starting copy WAdo 1 sided 2 sided Copy Select Orig paper 5 type inal Group AMS Back Edge l Ta G Reduce Orig set Scanning finished section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS Step 3 Making the settings for the second originals B in the illustration on page 5 57 Drawer Cassette No 1 is to be selected for plain paper feed under the Select paper screen 1 Touch the Select paper key The Select paper screen will be displayed Inch specifications Scan next original s Place the originals and press start key Press Scanning finished key when starting copy type s 3 Rear page Reduce Orig set q Enlarge direction joa 1 sided 2 sided copy Select Original page paper X 3 3 Scanning finished Scan next original s Place the originals and press start key Press Scanning finished key when starting cop 1 sided
164. Program tab The content of the Program tab will be displayed Touch the Change name key Inch specifications 100 Recall Reg delete File A Register File B Ready to copy Ern aes Catalog A 5 Catalog B 6 Delete Catalog C T 6 List A Change Catalog D name User choice Function Program Metric specifications F Ready to copy a PE ea Recall Reg delete 1 RAEE 5 File A T B l 3 Catalog C User choice Function Program Change name A Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS 3 Touch the program key 1 8 for which you want to change the registered name The screen to register a name for that program will be displayed Inch specifications Select the number for changing name Catalog C T No registration Metric specifications Select the number for changing name 7 No registration 4 Once you have deleted the old name and entered the new one press the End key Inch specifications 1 F Catalog A i Limit 16 letters including F Catalog A i Limit 16 letters inc key AllDel Letter Symbol 1 NOTE Refer to 11 Entering characters on page 7 104 for information on entering characters 5 Once The set program is registered Is it correct is displayed check the entered name and if it is correct touch the Yes key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 5 51 se
165. Ready to copy am ese the settings and eliminate a great majority of miss copying Inch specifications When On is selected copying stops after one set is ejected This is useful for checking finishing Paper size WAAD 100 If On is selected copying stops after one set is ejected Finishing result can then be checked Set the originals to be copied 2 Touch the Function tab The content of the Function tab will be displayed 6 Press the Start key Copying will start 3 Touch the W Down key The content of the next portion of If a message appears telling you to set the next original go the Function tab will be displayed to the next step 4 Touch the Proof Copy Test copy key The Proof Copy 7 Replace the first original with the next one and press the Test copy screen will be displayed Start key Scanning of that next original will start Inch specifications Ready t ZNS 8 Once you have finished scanning all of the originals touch a BAGI IA SOPI e the Scanning finished key Copying of the test copy set will Memo start Modify q Copy 2 User choice Metric specifications F Ready to copy gap o Memo Eco Print cor Invert i Modify q cop ys 5 40 9 Once the test copy set is complete a screen will be displayed in order to verify whether or not you want to make the initially designated number of copy
166. Register Sett Management Management Management edit j Def Set S Default setting Register Sett Management Management edit 5 Def Set 5 l Default setting Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS 3 Select the department ID code for which you want to check the copy counts and then touch the Total key Inch specifications Department 2nd Sales Dept 3rd Sales Dept Ath Sales Dept 5th Sales Dept 6th Sales Dept 7th Sales Dept 00000015 00000016 00000017 Order of 001 010 l Default setting Management Metric specifications Department 2nd Sales Dept 3rd Sales Dept 4th Sales Dept 5th Sales Dept 6th Sales Dept 7th Sales Dept 00000015 00000016 00000017 NOTES A U Order of p indication 001 010 e The ETC displayed in the list indicates the number of printouts that were made without entering an ID code The printouts included under ETC are as follows Report print out Printer error report print out Print out from a computer for which an ID code is not set When the Non standard printer driver printout Printer is set to ON under the copy management default settings Fax reception print out Fax report print out e It is possible for you to change the order of how the list of ID codes is displayed To so touch the Order of indication key and then touch the Sort by code key and select either
167. Select the copy job that you want to delete and touch the Delete key A verification screen will be displayed Inch specifications Input source Original i 119 Copy 120 D Copy 121 D Copy 122 Q Copy Registration Type 10 10 22 37 Norm copy 10 10 22 40 Norm copy 10 10 22 45 Norm copy 10 10 _ 22 50 Norm copy Medi Co j 10 10 22 50 Metric specifications Modify copy Input source Original Set Registration Type 10 10 22 37 10 10 22 40 10 10 22 45 0 10_ 22 50 Copy 7 Norm copy Copy Norm copy Norm copy 1 5 Copy 2 6 Copy Norm copy 5 45 section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS 3 Touch the Yes key or the No key as appropriate Inch specifications Job 117 Delete this job Do you really want to delete Metric specifications Job 117 Delete this job Do you really want to delete If you selected Yes the selected copy job will be canceled and the touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 If you selected No the touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 without canceling the selected job 4 If you want to cancel another registered copy job repeat steps 2 through 3 5 Touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab 5 46 section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS 21 Copying a large volume of originals in one operation Batch scanning mode With this mode you can scan
168. Total edit Def Set gt Default setting Metric specifications Managem Total Register Sett Management Each Mot Management Management total j Total j edit i Def Set gt 7 17 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS 3 Select the department ID code for which you want to change the registered information and then touch the Mgt Inf Correction key The Department inform edit Department info Editing screen will be displayed Inch specifications anagement edit Department Order of 01 1st Sales Dept 02 2nd Sales Dept Mgt Inf 0001 3rd Sales Dept correction gt in use j f indication 0014 4th Sales Dept 00000015 5th Sales Dept 00000016 6th Sales Dept 00000017 7th Sales Dept Delete 001 010 Register y Default setting Management i Metric specifications Department Order of indication 2nd Sales Dept Mgt Inf Limit i 3rd Sales Dept correction f in use i 4th Sales Dept 00000015 5th Sales Dept 00000016 6th Sales Dept 00000017 7th Sales Dept Delete 001 010 Register y To change the registered ID code proceed to the next step To change the registered department name proceed to step 7 NOTE It is possible for you to change the order of how the list of ID codes is displayed To so touch the Order of indication key and then touch the Sort by code key and select either 1 9 or
169. Touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 5 Touch the Close key once again The touch panel will return to the Default setting screen 6 Touch the End key The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab 7 67 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Paper selection Perform the following procedure to set whether the copier will automatically select the same size of copy paper as the original once an original is set or whether the designated default drawer cassette will be automatically selected 1 Display the Copy default screen See 5 Accessing the copy default settings on page 7 62 Inch specifications Default setting Counter Co Bypass BOX Counter i setting Management Pj check j f Machine Document Register Print User f default Management Pj orig size s report Adjustment py Metric specifications Default setting Counter a Bypass Hard Disk Counter i setting Management check j i Machine Document Register Print User default Management Pj orig size s report Adjustment By 2 Select Select paper in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the Change key The Select paper screen will be displayed Inch specifications Default setting Counter Default menu Setting mode aA Select paper type APS Plain v Default drawer 1st paper Draw
170. Y pew Front page Check direction 0 3 4 Check direction of 1 LA original top side r Ls H Left top corner Paper size UPES Check direction 0 18 Check direction of IE A original Top 15 fam E L O 18 n Left Titi j H Left top i 9 H corner i section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS 7 If you want to create a margin on the back side of the copies that lines up with that on the front side touch the Auto key If you want to set the margins for the front and back sides separately touch the Front Back margin key The screen to set the back side margin will be displayed Inch specifications Paper size Set Ready to copy LY gew 1 Close Check direction of original top side If AUTO is selected for duplex es copying rear will have same margin Front Back setting as that for the front page q margin H Left top H corner i Metric specifications Ready to copy Paper size Set WA4D Check direction Check direction of original Auto If AUTO is selected at the duplex if copying back side will have same margin E Front Back setting as that for the front page margin 8 Use the up down and left right cursor keys to select the desired location and width of each margin Inch specifications Paper size LU 41x82 Back page Check direction Check direction of original top side 4 Left top i corner q Check direction Check di
171. You can register up to 5 different paper sizes for this function e If the type of paper is not registered in any of the settings the corresponding copy counts for that size of paper will be calculated regardless of the type of paper that is used However if the same size of paper is registered in another setting along with a paper type the counts for the first setting will NOT include copies made with the type of paper that is registered in the second setting 1 Select one of the Total size 1 through Total size 5 settings under the Setting item column on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the Change key The corresponding setting screen will be displayed Inch specifications Setting item Value Fax Management On Excess of limit Setting Unable to use Def Val of coun limit 999999 Total size 1 8 x11 No specif Total size 2 8 2x11 No specif Change 4j Total size 3 8 x11 No specif j l Default setting Management Managem Def set Metric specifications Setting item Scanner Managem On Fax Management On Excess of limit Setting You cannot use Def Val of coun limit 999999 Total size 1 A3 No specif Total size 2 B4 No specif Total size 3 A4 No specif Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS 2 Touch the On key Inch specifications Can set totals of paper size and type Metric specifications Can set totals of paper size and type 3 Touc
172. age numbers printed on the corresponding copies in numerical order from Page numbering screen will be displayed the first original There are three styles of page numbers to choose a 48 apa ys Inch specifications from 1 P 1 and 1 n If you select 1 n as the style of page numbers the denominator will F Ready to copy a indicate the total number of pages l Select 2 sided Select Combi paper j Separation Dp orig size j OMI j i Exposure Reduce Auto Batch mode Enlarge 4 Selection scanning j l Orig image Margin Forms l Sort Border Cover Function Metric specifications Ready to copy aao 100s Select 2 sided Select l Exposure Reduce Auto Large of mode gt Enlarge selection originals l Image Margin Page Form l Sort Erase Cover Function 4 Touch the key that corresponds to the style of page numbers that you want to use The screen to make settings for that style will be displayed Inch specifications Paper size Ready to copy Page can be added on bottom of copy NOTE Page numbers will be printed relative to the middle of the bottom of the page The arrow in the illustration indicates the direction in which Paper size Set a 1 Page can be added on bottom of copy Set the originals to be copied 2 Touch the Function tab The content of the Function tab will be displayed 5 16 9 If you want printi
173. age appears touch the Yes key Inch specifications The counted number for this ID code will be deleted Are you sure Metric specifications The counted number for this ID code will be deleted Are you sure Touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 T7 Touch the Close key Check individual departments Perform the following procedure when you want to check the total number of copies made under each individual department ID code and or clear the copy counts for individual departments as well 1 Access the copy management menu screen See 2 Accessing the copy management menu screen on page 7 3 Inch specifications Default setting Counter Copy default Machine Document default Management Bj Metric specifications Language isnt Bypass BUX Counter setting Management check gt Register Print User f orig size report j Adjustment By Default setting Counter Copy default f Language Bypass Hard DISK Counter setting Management check gt Machine Document Register Print User default i Management orig size report j Adjustment by Touch the Each Mgt Total key The Each Management Total screen will be displayed Inch specifications Managem Total Management Each Mot total j Total 5 Metric specifications Managem Total Management Each Mot total Total gt Close
174. age copies Mirror image mode With this mode you can make mirror image copies 5 Touch the On key Inch specifications Ready to copy PeR ey 100 Reverse scanned image left to right mirror image Paper size AAD 100 Set the originals to be copied Reversed scanned image left to right as a reflection in the mirror 2 Touch the Function tab The content of the Function tab will be displayed 3 Touch the W Down key The content of the next portion of the Function tab will be displayed 6 Press the Start key Copying will start 4 Touch the Mirror key The Mirror screen will be displayed Inch specifications F Ready to copy e OHP Memo Rotation i Proof Copy p paaes Eco print Orig set Invert Mi u co Prin direction nver i irror i p 100 Modify Function Metric specifications F Ready 0K00 Peper eresi 100 Test Memo ahaa paces Eco Print Orig Set Invert Mirror Au q gt direction 5 i p Function 5 39 section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS 19 Making a test copy prior to large volume copying Proof mode With this mode you can use the same settings to create a single set 5 Touch the On key of test copies in order to verify the results prior to actually starting to make a large number of copies or copy sets This way if there is a problem with the copies you can cancel print out in order to change F
175. agement edit 5 Def Set j l Default setting 3 Touch the Close key Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS 6 Changing the copy management default settings Perform the following procedure when you want to change the default settings for the copy management function The following default settings are available e Copier function management ON OFF Page 7 26 e Printer function management ON OFF Page 7 27 e Printer error report Page 7 28 e Non standard printer driver printout Printer Page 7 29 e Copy Printer output management Page 7 30 e Scanner function management ON OFF Page 7 31 e Fax function management ON OFF Page 7 32 e Response to exceeded restriction Page 7 33 e Default copy limit Page 7 34 e Total count for specified paper size 1 to 5 Page 7 35 Accessing the copy management default settings 1 Access the copy management menu screen See 2 Accessing the copy management menu screen on page 7 3 Inch specifications Default setting Counter Copy default gt ier Bypass BUX Counter setting j Management check i Machine Document Register Print User default Management orig size j report j Adjustment pj Language E Metric specifications Default setting Counter Bypass Hard DISK Counter setting gt Management check j Machine Document Register Print User q default Management orig size report Adjustment py 7 25 Sect
176. aintenance instructions in the other section of this manual 5 Safety switch The power to the laser unit is cut off when the front cover is opened CAUTION The power plug is the main isolation device Other switches on the equipment are only functional switches and are not suitable for isolating the equipment from the power source ATTENTION Le debranchement de la fiche secteur est le seul moyen de mettre l appareil hors tension Les interrupteurs sur l appareil ne sont que des interrupteurs de fonctionnement ils ne mettent pas l appareil hors tension NEW 3035 4035 5035 COPIER LIMITED WARRANTY 1 Kyocera Mita America Inc and Kyocera Mita Canada Ltd both referred to as Kyocera Mita warrant the Customer s new copier and the new accessories installed with the initial installation of the copier against any defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year or 400 000 copies prints from date of installation by an Authorized Kyocera Mita Dealer for the 3035 or 500 000 copies prints from date of installation by an Authorized Kyocera Mita Dealer for the 4035 and the 5035 whichever first occurs In the event the copier or an accessory is found to be defective within the warranty period Kyocera Mita s only obligation and the Customer s exclusive remedy shall be replacement of any defective parts It is understood that Kyocera Mita shall have no obligation to furnish labor 2 This warranty is valid only as to
177. al Specifications ccccccccseeeseceseeeeeseesnenenees 10 9 5 Installing the optional equipment cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 10 10 Appendix Functions and settings combination chart 10 12 MAKING FULL USE OF THE COPIER S ADVANCED FUNCTIONS 1 Having the copier automatically select 2 Making clear reproductions of copy paper of the same size as the photographs original lt Image quality selection gt lt Auto paper selection mode gt Page 4 3 Page 4 2 abcdefghijk abcdefghijk abcdefghijk abcdefghijk abcdefghijk abcdefghijk abcdefghijk abcdefghijk abcdefghijk E Enlarging reducing the copy image to a desired size between 25 and 400 lt Zoom mode gt Page 4 6 E One touch selection of the copy magnification ratio lt Preset zoom mode gt Page 4 7 N a D NS lt NF 400 4 Making 2 sided copies from various types 5 Copying each image of open faced of originals books etc or 2 sided originals onto lt 2 sided copy modes gt separate sheets Page 5 1 lt Page separation Split copy modes gt Page 5 4 2 8 Adding a space next to the copy images for making notes lt Memo mode gt Page 5 9 T Centering the copy image lt Centering Image shift mode gt Page 5 8 N 11 Printing page numbers on the copies lt Print page numbers mode gt Page 5 16 1 0 Fitting the image of either two or four originals onto a single copy page
178. al expo Photo Standard Change y i Default setting Metric specifications Default setting Counter Default menu Setting mode Adjust auto exposure OCR Standard Adj manual expo Mixed Standard Adj manual expo Text Standard Adj manual expo Photo Standard CY ver emi l Default setting Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS 3 Touch the Lighter key or the Darker key as appropriate to move the cursor on the exposure scale and adjust the exposure as desired Inch specifications Adjust copy exposure default setting Auto 3 p 0 H te 3 _ _ __ f _ O Lighter Adjust default setting of copy exposure Auto 3 2 0 2 3 _ gt H1 Ce NOTE If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it touch the Back key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 4 Touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 5 Touch the Close key once again The touch panel will return to the Default setting screen 6 Touch the End key The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab 7 73 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Auto exposure adjustment OCR Perform the following procedure to adjust the overall exposure level for scanning with OCR Optical Character Recognition software when using the optional scanner functions of th
179. al on the platen a message will appear telling you to set the next original In this case go to the next step D ma DOO Og Clear Start DOO ZA O 8 Replace the first original with the next one and press the Start key Scanning of that next original will start Once you have finished scanning all of the originals touch the Scanning finished key Copying will start 5 10 section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS 6 Making copies with clean edges Border erase modes 1 Erasing blemishes from edges of copies Sheet erase mode Inch specifications With this mode shadows lines etc that occur around the edges of copies made from sheet originals can be erased A border of equal width will be erased around all sides of the copied image The width of the border to be erased can be set to any 1 8 increment between 1 8 and 3 4 A setting of 0 will result in no border being erased The areas that will be erased are shown as in the illustration Metric specifications With this mode shadows lines etc that occur around the edges of copies made from sheet originals can be erased A border of equal width will be erased around all sides of the copied image The width of the border to be erased can be set to any 1 mm increment between 1 mm and 18 mm A setting of O will result in no border being erased The areas that will be erased are shown as in the illustration NOTE
180. ame P Head print Refer to 11 Entering characters on page 7 104 for information on entering characters Once you have finished checking the information for those documents touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 3 If you want to check the information for other stored documents repeat steps 3 through 5 Touch the Close key once again The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 Touch the End key The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab Section 6 DOCUMENT AND OUTPUT MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS 4 Deleting stored documents NOTE Perform the following procedure when you want to delete stored It is possible to change the order of display for the stored documents documents K To do so touch the Order of indication key and then touch the Sort by date key and select either New Old or Old New or the 1 Press the Document Management key The Document Sort by name key and select either A Z or Z A as Management screen will be displayed appropriate A Touch the Yes key or the No key as appropriate ia TET AS 2 gt Job Queue E gt Repeat C4 4 Le Se Inch specifications Document name JOB 005 This document s will be deleted Do you want to delete it 2 Touch the Box Editing key under Shared Data Box The Box editing screen
181. anagement edit Metric specifications New register Setting item Value ID code 0007 Name to display 1st Sales Dept LA l Default setting Management Management edit NOTES e Be sure to register both of the setting items above If you do not an error will occur and you will be unable to continue to the next step e If you attempt to register a department ID code or a department name that is already registered an error will occur and you will be unable to continue to the next step In this case select a different ID code and or name as appropriate Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS 10 NOTE Set the restrictions for using the copier under that department ID code Inch specifications ist Sales Dept Setting item Copy limitation On Printer limitation No limit Output limitation No limit Scanner limitation No limit Fax Transm Limitation No limit Change y Metric specifications 1st Sales Dept Setting item Printer limitation No limit Output limitation No limit Scanner limitation No limit Fax Transm Limitation No limit A L eo For information on how to set restrictions refer to Setting the restrictions for use on page 7 7 11 Once you are finished setting the restrictions for that department ID code touch the Registr key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 3 Inch specifications ist Sales Dept Setting item i Printer limitation No l
182. andeats 5 16 Print status SCE UN ee Sorta teatte caterer cneecaneseasamevs eenc ponescte lt enneeneneene 6 22 PIT IAI E E E E A E 8 12 Primer ocannor al a4 Geenere mee aem erat eat mee renee rata eae a ep ron rameter mee 8 12 Printing out with the repeat COPY MOE s es 5 43 Programi MUG WO Vcc cscacearatnesinestocecines eae ees n a 5 50 PE ONIN Oe cesna E E 5 40 R Register new department ID codes cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 7 4 Registering a copy job for repeat Copying ee 5 42 Registering a function or mode under a function key 5 53 Registering a program eg crsictcpencencee den ccrentexteeceenedpstecupsuiepestuieeetnnanenaaes 5 50 PROG SU ANON S suas pas ccuasaatevensse wenompannieannveneeasemsatonanisneaatoouc 5 53 Registration keys ON OFF copy default setting ee 7 84 Repeat CODY MOG sssrinin iarna nnn ERE 5 42 Repeat copying ON OFF copy default setting ee 7 83 Repor NINE OUT sisina a 7 101 S Saving On toner USE sisii ii i aas aeaa ENa NaRa a 5 48 VS CHING TUNGONG seese ie ranen E AEE EEEa NEER 4 1 Selecting the image quality cecccccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeess 4 3 Selecting the paper SIZE eececccccccccceecceceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeess 4 2 Separate front and back Margin settings nee 5 6 DG BING al OMOINGL crus aisvaciantestvanas ESEESE 4 1 Setting the Key Counter cccccccccecceceeeeeeee
183. ange j Total size 3 A4 No specif j l Default setting Management Managem Def set 7 32 Response to exceeded restriction Perform the following procedure to determine whether further use of the machine by the corresponding department will be discontinued immediately starting with the current job or with the next job or if only an error message will be generated when a department ID code has exceeded its set limit NOTE If the optional Printer Scanner Kit or Fax Kit is installed on your copier even if you select here to have further use of the machine discontinued immediately starting with the current job if a department ID code exceeds its set limit during scanning or during fax transmission the actual restriction will start from the next job 1 Select Excess of limit Setting under the Setting item column on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the Change key The Excess of limit Setting screen will be displayed Inch specifications Setting item Fax Management Value A Excess of limit Setting Unable to use v Def Val of coun limit 999999 Total size 1 8 2x11 No specif Change y Total size 2 8 2x11 No specif Total size 3 8 x11 No specif l Default setting Management Managem Def set Metric specifications Setting item Value Scanner Managem On LA Fax Management On Excess of limit Setting You cannot use v Def Val of
184. ans a EEE 8 12 Drawer Cassette wscevecseteavervcessedavsnsdeedtcuviadsvdeteadmebiexieadieteueteeveas 3 2 Drum eS tee ees nien EA AEEA E 7 91 E EGO pDANLMNOOE csie E rie 5 48 Eco print mode ON OFF copy default setting ee 7 66 Editing copy management information ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 4 Enlarging reducing the CODY Mage siisi 4 5 EVICTING CM ARACT CUS auias Ei E A A E 7 104 Environmental specifications sencccccedeasnsscousbesteerevtetercideeie eee 10 9 Erased border width copy default setting cceceeeeeeeeeee 7 81 Exposure adjustment step copy default Setting cee 7 64 Exposure mode copy default Setting ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 7 63 F Fax eject location machine default Setting ceeeeeeteeeeeees 7 50 eS eee nen ne ee eer ae eee nee ee ee eee ee 8 12 PUNO TAN OMS tasers e a ctee A A a E ease saree E ESR 8 4 Form overlay MOOG sasssa eresia eNEAN AEAEE EANES 5 20 POW TOONS Wao eiaa eer eee ee ee 6 1 H PVM EDI Se cassettes delta seers narae eon sales sats cairn gaa satu ee teme ete eaneeene 8 11 Hard disk management axis etsee cece cece cepeeteetecscscebietestiettdeicesexeeviceoe 7 99 How to set originals in the Document Processor 00ssseeeee 8 2 I If one of the following messages is displayed cccceceeeeeaeeeeeees 9 1 If one of these indicators lights or flashes ccceeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeees 9 3 mother t
185. aper sie sel C hange setting of original and finishing mode Original Finishing Stitching Check direction j gt 2 ea Check direction of el Es Off original top side Stitching f 2 sided Booklet EA None a a eoo Stitch a CONC Paper size Set wW D Original Finished Stitching Check direction ae 2 a Check direction of mm Es Off original titchi 2 sided i Booklet Left Right None 5 23 section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS T7 If the optional Document Finisher with Center Bind amp Fold If you want to add covers touch the Stitching Front cvr Unit is installed on your copier the Saddle Stitch Center Stitching Front cov key and go to the next step Staple key will be displayed and you will be able to select If you do NOT want to add covers go directly to step 11 center binding stapling and folding of the copy sets In this case if you DO want the center stapling and folding operation to be performed touch the Saddle Stitch Center P 2 sided mode mn Inch specifications Staple key and go to the next step Finishing Stitching If you do NOT want the stapling and folding operation to be eH on aro performed go directly to step 9 eee coo fa ee Inch specifications pee Toe Book Saddle Booklet t Stitch i F2 sided mode m Stitching Original Finishing 35 ETB 2 Check direction of Raper size
186. arks may cause burn Label 3 Moving parts inside May cause personal injury Do not touch TOWING ANN Seiden ssnesterencctancmse tucson NOTE DO NOT remove these labels 1 1 AN INSTALLATION PRECAUTIONS E Environment e Avoid placing the copier on or in locations which are unstable or not level Such locations may cause the copier to fall down or fall over This type of situation presents a danger of personal A CAUTION e During copying some ozone is released but the amount does not cause any ill effect to one s health If however the copier is used over a long period of time in a poorly ventilated room or when making an extremely large number of copies the smell may become unpleasant To maintain the appropriate environment for copy work it is suggested that the room be properly ventilated inj ry or damage to the COPIER ssscissssesrersisinin S E Power supply Grounding the copier e Avoid locations with humidity or dust and dirt If dust or dirt become attached to the power plug clean the plug to avoid the danger of fire or electrical SROCK ccccccceeeeseeeceeeeseeeeeenseeeeeesenees e Avoid locations near radiators heaters or other heat sources or locations near flammable items to avoid the danger Of fire cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees e To keep the copier cool and facilitate changing of parts and maintenance allow access space as shown below Leave adequate space especially aroun
187. assette No 1 No 4 7 38 Description If the paper in one drawer cassette runs out during copying the automatic drawer cassette switching function will switch paper feed from the empty drawer cassette to another drawer cassette that contains the same size of paper in the same orientation for uninterrupted copying To enable this function it is necessary to turn the related setting On In order to prevent a drawer cassette that holds a different type of paper from being switched to when the automatic drawer cassette switching function is turned ON it is necessary to select Feed same paper type as well Sets the size of paper that is loaded in drawers cassettes No 1 through No 4 If you want the size to be detected automatically select Auto Detection Automatic size detection If you want to manually set the size of paper select Standard sizes lt lf you select Auto Detection gt You can also select the desired unit of measurement Inch or Centimeter lt lf you select Standard sizes gt You can then select the paper size The setting for drawer cassette No 3 and No 4 will only be available when the optional Paper Feeder is installed on your copier Available settings On Off All types of paper Feed same paper type Auto Detection Standard sizes Inch Centimeter B4 B5 B5R Folio 11x17 8 1 72x 14 11 x 81 2 8 1 2x 11 5 1 2 X 8 1 2
188. at corresponds to the size of paper you want to use and then touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 4 Inch specifications Default setting Counter Select size ISO B5 Comm 10 E 8 213 ns i Envelope Comm Envelope Metric specifications Default setting Counter ISO B5 Comm 10 ex 8 213 Envelope OUFUKU Envelope Comm i Envelope i Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Touch the Select paper type key The Select paper type screen will be displayed Touch the key that corresponds to the type of paper you want to use and then touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 4 Inch specifications Default setting Counter E A J j paper A arenc j J J Vellum Bond Letterhead High Custom 4 Custom 8 quality Metric specifications Default setting Counter paper Vel B Letterhead High Custom 4 Custom 8 ellum ond etternea quality ustom ustom Touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 Touch the End key The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab 7 89 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS 4 Original size registration Perform the following procedure in order to register a custom original size that can be used under the Original size selection procedure 7 90 With the content of the Basic
189. attempt to delete it This procedure will allow you to change the name and password for any one of the synergy print boxes as well as delete at one time all of the data registered in any one box If you register a password for any of these boxes you will need to enter the registered password in order to print out or delete any documents that are stored win that box This procedure will allow you to select the length of time that will elapse before each job ina synergy print box is automatically deleted Set this time to any number of days between 1 and 7 This setting cannot be made independently for each box 2 Accessing the box management default settings key ee ecimicnk Mahedemenh ey Perform the following procedure when you want to access the Inch specifications Document Management screen for each of the various box Default setting Counter management default settings 1 With the content of the Basic tab displayed press the ee Default Setting Counter key The Default setting Counter screen will be displayed default Management Pj orig size Print User i report Adjustment By Ye Defaut setting aanagement Interrupt amp Metric specifications 7 94 Default setting Counter Reset 4 Stop Clear a ren Bypass Hard Disk Counter i setting Management Bj check j i Machine Document Register Print User i default Management Bj orig size gt report j Adjustment By
190. ay the type of paper must be specified under 1 Paper size and type on page 7 87 e You can select to have the Bypass setting screen See page 7 86 displayed whenever the Bypass key is touched See Multi bypass tray setting display ON OFF on page 7 45 Section 3 PREPARATIONS 1 Open the multi bypass tray 2 Adjust the insert guides to the size of the paper to be loaded IMPORTANT e When you are setting paper onto the multi bypass tray make sure that the side facing upward when the package is opened is the side that is facing upward on the multi bypass tray as well In addition if the leading edge of the paper is curled at all straighten it out before setting it on the multi bypass tray e ALWAYS straighten out curled paper before setting it on the multi bypass tray 3 3 Section 3 PREPARATIONS Setting envelopes 3 When using envelopes that are wider than they are tall leave Up to 20 envelopes can be set on the multi bypass tray at a time the flap closed and set the envelopes with the copy side Refer to the following table for the types and sizes of envelopes that facing upward and the flap facing towards the rear of the can be used in this machine copier Then slide the envelopes into the slot along the insert guides as far as they will go When using envelopes that are taller than they are wide Acceptable envelope types size open the flap and set the envelopes with th
191. be copied Touch the Function tab and then the Y Down key The content of the next portion of the Function tab will be displayed Touch the Memo pages key The Memo pages screen will be displayed Inch specifications F Ready to copy e 10076 i H OHP Memo 5 aang i ita i l Eco Print Orig set t Mi A U l co Frin E direction A nver 3 Irror p Modify q Copy 2 User choice Metric specifications F Ready to copy aaao d Memo rm SE Modify q cop j Touch the Layout A key or the Layout B key as appropriate The screen to make the layout settings will be displayed Inch specifications Ready to copy ne Check direction Check direction of original top side Layout Left top i foe CONC i Paper size WAA Layout Check direction Check direction of z original None ls tare ean Jooo Jesa i Be 5 9 section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS 5 Select the desired direction of the layout Inch specifications lt Layout A gt lt Layout B gt Layout Metric specifications lt Layout A gt lt Layout B gt 6 Select the type of the borderline that you want to use to separate the different areas 7 Press the Start key Scanning of the originals will start If you set the originals in the optional Document Processor copying will start automatically If you set an origin
192. bine Inch specifications Merge copy screen will be displayed Inch specifications Paper size Ready to copy LI 11x8 100 l Select 2 sided Select paper j Separation Dp orig size j Exposure Reduce Batch mode j Enlarge scannin Orig image Margin Forms Sort Border U Function Border line Border line None Metric specifications Ready to copy ARAD 100 Select 2 sided Select paper Split 4 size orig e Exposure Reduce Auto Large of mode Enlarge A selection originals ere E EPE ssi ed ose 6 Select the type of the borderline that you want to use to separate the images 5 14 Press the Start key Scanning of the originals will start If you set the originals in the optional Document Processor copying will start automatically If you set an original on the platen a message will appear telling you to set the next original In this case go to the next step Replace the first original with the next one and press the Start key Scanning of that next original will start Once you have finished scanning all of the originals touch the Scanning finished key Copying will start section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS 5 15 section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS 8 Printing page numbers on copies Print page numbers mode When you make copies from multiple originals you can have page 3 Touch the Page Page numbering key The P
193. can be reduced Image resolution reduced Eco Print enables toner consumption reduction 6 Press the Start key Copying will start 5 48 section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS 23 Original set direction Touch the Rear Back Edge key or the Left top corner key aS appropriate It is necessary to specify the direction in which the originals were set whenever you use the 2 sided copy modes the page separation split copy modes the margin mode the centering image shift mode the memo mode the border erase modes the combine merge copy modes the print page numbers mode the booklet stitching mode the auto selection filing mode optional the staple mode optional and the punch mode optional You can also use the following procedure to perform the setting as well 1 Touch the Function tab The content of the Function tab will be displayed 2 Touch the W Down key The content of the next portion of the Function tab will be displayed 3 Touch the Orig set direction key The Orig set direction screen will be displayed Inch specifications F Ready to copy mines OHP Memo 100 Modify Copy User choice Function Program Metric specifications Ready to copy ato 100 Auto Memo Test Rotation _ oa l eel ee ad Eco Print oe t Invert Mirror Modify cop s User choice Function Inch specifications Ready to copy sine
194. cations screen in step 1 Fy Ready to Job bui LI 11x8 1 sided 1 sided copy Select Original 1 sided q paper s type 5 2 sided E Offset ANAC Back Edge _Finished page 0__ az er PEN set Basic a Metric specifications F Ready to Job build WAdD 1 sided 1 sided Copy Select Original 1 sided paper S type gt 2 sided joi kE AMC Back Edge l Ear ce set ee 5 64 6 Specifying the direction that the originals were set This procedure specifies the direction of the set originals 1 2 With the content of the Basic tab displayed touch the Orig set direction key The Orig set direction screen will be displayed Inch specifications 1 sided copy Select Original 1 sided paper j type i 2 sided i 3 Offset Rank Edna a Orig set Basic LU 11x8 1 sided Metric specifications Wado 1 sided 1 sided Copy Select Original 1 sided paper d type 2 sided i Group AMS Rank Edna Touch the Rear Back Edge key or the Left top corner key aS appropriate according to the direction of the originals Inch specifications Fy Ready to Job build Place originals then press Start ke Check direction of ariainal tan side Check direction original can be shown at right side of display Follow the steps If setting mode is wrong incorrect copy will result Metric specifications Fy Ready to Job build
195. center staple and fold up to 10 copy l iach ficati sheets 40 layout pages at one time ncn specitications Paper size 1 nee i Set first page Inch specifications ress Start key P Set first page rir atxi Check direction Set the book original top side direct to back Press Start ke When selecting ON for copying on the front cover follow the instruction 1 Scan front cover book original 2 Start scan book originals Set first page Metric specifications Press START button Set first page Paper size Set Press START button Check direction Set book original top side direction to back When selecting ON for copying on the front cover follow the instruction 1 Scan front cover book original 2 Start scan book originals IMPORTANT 8 If you want to add covers touch the Copy on front cvr Copy on front cov key The Copy on front cover screen If you DO want to copy onto the covers be absolutely certain to set will be displayed the original that you want to have copied onto the cover first At this point if you do NOT want to copy onto the covers go directly to step 10 Inch specifications 1 0 Press the Start key Sat first page ee Scanning of the original will start Press Start key 100 Close i P a T aE When a message appears telling you to set the next original jo or oer go to the next step wn o C left en from i
196. ceplate Remove the jammed staple from the tip of the staple cartridge the end where staples are set Replace the staple holder back in its original position in the Stapling Unit Once it has been fully inserted it will click into place Lift up the Stapling Unit slightly and than lower it into its original position Close the stapler front cover securely Section 8 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT 8 Job Separator When using the optional printer function the paper eject point can be changed according to the used function making it easier to sort paper Copied paper can be ejected to the Job Separator upper section See Copy eject location in Machine default setting on page 7 49 The Job Separator can store up to 100 copies When making 101 or more copies copying will stop when 100 copies are made Copying will resume automatically when the copied sheets are removed 9 Hard Disk The Hard Disk is required in order to use the following modes and functions of your copier e Job reservation during copying e Form overlay of registered forms e Repeat copying e Document management functions e Using the output management functions to change the job printing order cancel and delete print jobs and verify content It is also possible to register up to 1000 department ID codes under document management 8 11 section 8 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT 10 Key Counter The Key Counter determines the numb
197. ch specifications SN lt lt _ lt _ ea er 5 4 Job Queue Repeat Copy e213 Job Build Au Li Enter the re print code Clear Metric specifications Enter the re print code 2 Select the copy job that you want to check the content of and touch the Check detail key Clear Inch specifications Job i Input source Original Set Registration Type 119 Copy 7 1 10 10 22 37 Norm copy 120 Q Copy 5 10 10 22 40 Norm copy 121 Q Copy 2 10 10 22 45 Norm copy NOTES 122 Q Copy 6 10 10 22 50 Norm cop e To reenter a mistaken security code touch the Clear key iL i d Modify Copy i e If you touch the Stop key the touch panel will return to the screen Le eel in step 2 weet Metric specifications i Job Input source Original Set Registration Type Touch the key or the key to set the number of copies or er a 3 E Aaa ienncay copy sets to be made 120 Q Copy 5 10 10 22 40 Norm copy 121 W Copy 2 10 10 22 45 Norm copy Inch specifications 122 0 Copy 6 10 10 22 50 __Norm cop Modify copy_ If you designated a security code when you registered the copy job for repeat copying the code input screen will be displayed In this case go to the next step If you did NOT designate a security code when you registered the copy job for repeat copying the Check details Reprint screen will be displayed In this case go directly
198. cifications Paper misfeed System error Main switch off on 1 11x87 Count Set Plain 2 8x11 l 1 J Color i UJ 11x8 3 11x8 Bypass El Plain Plain a 11x8 1 Open left cover2 2 Remove paper 3 Close cover Recycled Metric specifications Metric specifications Pa JA Paper misfeed System error Main switch off on 1 Open left cover 2 2 Remove paper 3 Close cover Count Set 7 2 AdD i Colour i Bypass Fe Plain section 9 TROUBLESHOOTING 2 Remove the misfed paper 2 Pull up the lever to remove the misfed paper If the misfed paper cannot be removed go to the next step 3 Close the left cover 2 e Misfeed in multi bypass tray JAM14 20 21 23 If the message below appears a misfeed has occurred in the multi bypass tray Remove the misfed paper using the procedure given below Inch specifications Paper misfeed 1 Remove paper in bypass 2 Open left covert 3 Remove paper 4 Open front cover if you can not remove paper 5 Turn right the green knob 6 Remove paper 7 Close the cover Metric specifications Paper misfeed 1 Remove paper in bypass 2 Open left cover 1 3 Remove paper 4 Open front cover if you can not remove paper 5 Turn green knob clockwise 6 Remove paper 7 Close cover 1 Remove all the paper remaining in the multi bypass tray 5 Rai
199. city e DO NOT attempt to perform any operations not explained in this handbook e CAUTION Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure e Do not look directly at the light from the scanning lamp as it may cause your eyes to feel tired or painful E Cautions when handling consumables A CAUTION e DO NOT attempt to incinerate the toner container or the waste toner box Dangerous sparks may cause DUNS oraseadneaeessanbueilenestra pstasteandiearimendinedsatenninne e Keep the toner container and the waste toner box out of the reach of children ceccccseeeeeeeeeeeeees e lf toner happens to spill from the toner container or the waste toner box avoid inhalation and ingestion as well as contact with your eyes and n a a E E E EEEE E E E E EEEE S If you do happen to inhale toner move to a place with fresh air and gargle thoroughly with a large amount of water If coughing develops contact a physician If you do happen to ingest toner rinse your mouth out with water and drink 1 or 2 cups of water to dilute the contents of your stomach If necessary contact a physician If you do happen to get toner in your eyes flush them thoroughly with water If there is any remaining tenderness contact a physician If toner does happen to get on your skin wash with soap and water e DO NOT attempt to force open or destroy th
200. city Delete invalid deta from the HDD d ofHDD Check HDD capacity Delete invalid data l Able to check the free space and capacity Delete invalid deta from the HDD d of HDD 7 99 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS 7 100 Touch the On key under Delete invalid data right side of the touch panel The operation to delete invalid data will Start Inch specifications HDD management mode Delete invalid data Delete invalid deta from the HDD Item i Setting mode Free Space 18 569 MB Capacity 19 092 MB Metric specifications HDD management mode Close Delete invalid data Delete invalid deta from the HDD Setting mode Free space 18 569 MB Capacity 19 092 MB Touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 Touch the End key The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS 9 Report print out Perform the following procedure to print out one of the following reports lt Copy report gt Lists all of the values for the copy default settings lt Machine report gt Lists all of the values for the machine default settings lt Toner coverage report gt Lists the average toner density black ratio for each size of copy paper used under each of the copy printer and fax functions of this machine NOTE Make sure that 11 x 8 1 2 A4 size paper is loaded in one of the dra
201. coun limit 999999 Total size 1 A3 No specif Total size 2 B4 No specif Total size 3 A4 No specif omer y Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS 2 To discontinue further use of the machine immediately starting with the current job when a department ID code has exceeded its set limit touch the Stop job immediatly key To cancel further use of the machine starting from the next job touch the Stop after job done key To have an error message generated touch the Only warning key Inch specifications Select proper setting when limit exceeded Stop job immediatly Stop after job done Only warning Metric specifications Excess of limit Setting Stop job immediatly Stop after job done Only warning NOTE If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it touch the Back key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 1 Touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 1 7 33 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Default copy limit 2 Use the numeric keys on the keypad to enter the default copy limit The limit can be set to any 1 page increment up to Perform the following procedure when you want to change the default 999 999 copy limit for new department ID codes Inch specifications 1 Select Def Val of coun limit under the Setting item column on the left side of the touch panel and then touch
202. ction 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS 4 Deleting a registered program 1 5 52 Touch the Program tab The content of the Program tab will be displayed Touch the Delete key Inch specifications P Si F Ready to copy o ae 10054 Recall Reg delete File A Register File B Delete i name Function Program 5 B T B Paper size Set Ad D 100 Reg delete Catalog A Register Catalog B 3 Catalog C T 4 Catalog D 8 List A Basic User choice Function F Program Touch the program key 1 8 that corresponds to the program that you want to delete Inch specifications caan SA l T No registration Metric specifications Select the number of program to delete Catalog A 5 File A Catalog B 6 File B Catalog C T No registration 4 Touch the Yes key or the No key as appropriate Inch specifications Delete program Program l Program name Catalog A This program will be deleted Are you sure Metric specifications Delete program Program Program name Catalog A This program will be deleted Are you sure If you selected Yes the selected program will be deleted and the touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 If you selected No the touch panel will return to the screen in step 3 without deleting the selected program section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS 25 Registration k
203. d press the Default Setting Counter key The Default setting screen will be displayed Je Default Setting C ounter anagement Interrupt Reset 4 Stop Clear LAN Metric specifications Enter the administrator number 2 Touch the Machine default key on the left side of the touch 4 If the entered code matched the registered one the panel Machine default screen will be displayed Inch specifications Inch specifications Default setting Counter Default setting Counter Copy ENE Language j Default menu i Setting mode Bypass Counter l Auto drawer switching On All types of paper setting j Management check Paper size 1st drawer Auto Inch E D Baad Sant U 3 Paper size 2nd drawer Auto Inch achine ocumen egister rin ser i default i ee a a 4 report i Adjustment Dy Paper size a drawer Auto Inch Paper size 4th drawer Auto Inch Metric specifications Metric specifications Default setting Counter Default setting Counter Machine default C HERA Language E Management y A Default menu Setting mode i Paper size 2nd cassette Auto Centimeter default j Management B orig size j report Adjustment By i l Paper size 4th cassette Auto Centimeter Change y l Default setting Bypass Hard Disk Counter i Auto cassette switching On All types of paper setting gt Management Pj check i of Paper size 1st cassette Auto Centimeter
204. d mode back to their previous values Close key Touch this key when you want to return to the previous screen Inch specifications F Ready to copy ci ee 00 Reduce Enlarge i Barc 100 f 129 64 Zom 82x11 1 1x17 11x17 8 ox11 XY Zoom BUXI4 11X17 11x17 gt 5x8 l 200 78 25 51 x8 4 gt 11x17 f 8 2x14 98 2x11 Paper size LIAAD 141 A42A3Y 75 A52A4 11x15 gt A 4 100 127 70 A39A4 J Folio gt A 3 A49A5 as 200 90 25 A53A3 Folio gt A 4 Metric specifications Asia Pacific F Ready 000 0 A E 100 H Reduce Enlarge 141 A49A3 4 81 B 4A 4 B 5 gt B 4 B 59A 5 122 A42B4 70 A3 gt A4 A59B5 B49B5 B43A3 f 50 B 5 A 4 i 200 86 A39B4 4 25 i A5 gt A3 A 4B 5 Section 2 NAMES OF PARTS NOTE You can change or add new keys to those displayed in the Basic and the User choice tabs by following the Customize screen layout Main functions procedure on page 7 85 or the Customize screen layout Add functions procedure on page 7 86 as appropriate Section 2 NAMES OF PARTS 2 8 section 3 PREPARATIONS 1 Loading paper Paper can be loaded into the two drawers cassettes and the multi bypass tray 1 Note when adding paper After taking new paper out of its packaging be sure to fan through them a few times to separate the sheets and use a flat surface to ali
205. d pages of the finished copies read from left to right 2 If Right is selected as the binding direction Copying will be performed so that the stacked and folded pages of the finished copies read from right to left 5 22 3 If Top is selected as the binding direction Copying will be performed so that the stacked and folded pages of the finished copies read from top to bottom els 4 It is possible for you to select whether or not to copy onto the front and or back cover sheets BEE Do NOT copy Copy on outside Copy on inside Copy on both sides NOTES e The asterisk indicates the side of the cover on which copying will be accomplished e The illustrations above are an example of when Left is selected as the binding direction 1 Set the first original to be copied Touch the Function tab The content of the Function tab will be displayed Touch the Booklet key The Booklet screen will be displayed Inch specifications Paper size Set 1 Fy Ready ike ere VA LY 11x81 Select 2 sided Select Combi paper j Separation orig size j omme j Exposure Reduce Auto Batch mode 4 Enlarge Selection scanning gt Orig image Margin Forms Border Cover Function Progr Paper size Set WaAdAD 100 Select 2 sided Select Exposure Reduce Auto Large of mode Enlarge selection 4 originals Image Margin Page F
206. d the vents to allow air to be properly ventilated out of the COPIED ccceeeeeeeeeseeeeeees Q WN NN N iN I 1 yji Ifi Iji Ifi an ee N f N G N be N Yeth 1 1 IO ll 4 N1 YN LEN 1 DUEN W i N N Ya 9 ey NS N N j Other precautions e Adverse environmental conditions may affect the safe operation and performance of the copier Install in an air conditioned room recommended room temperature around 73 4 F 23 C humidity around 50 and avoid the following locations when selecting a site for the copier Avoid locations near a window or with exposure to direct sunlight Avoid locations with vibrations Avoid locations with drastic temperature fluctuations Avoid locations with direct exposure to hot or cold air Avoid poorly ventilated locations e Delicate floor material may be damaged if this product is moved after installation S A WARNING e DO NOT use a power supply with a voltage other than that specified Avoid multiple connections in the same outlet These types of situations present a danger of fire or electrical shock e Plug the power cord securely into the outlet If metallic objects come in contact with the prongs on the plug it may cause a fire or electric shock e Always connect the copier to an outlet with a ground connection to avoid the danger of fire or electrical shock in case o
207. dards Low Power Mode The device automatically enters Low Power Mode when 15 minutes have passed since the device was last used The amount of time of no activity that must pass before Low Power Mode is activated may be lengthened See 5 Energy saving modes on page 4 11 and Auto low power time on page 7 48 for more information Off Mode Only when using the copier functions of this machine The device automatically enters Off Mode when 60 minutes have passed since the device was last used The amount of time of no activity that must pass before Off Mode is activated may be lengthened For more information see 5 Energy saving modes on page 4 11 and Auto sleep time on page 7 47 Sleep Mode If the copier has printer and or facsimile function The device automatically enters Sleep Mode when 60 minutes have passed since the device was last used The amount of time of no activity that must pass before Sleep Mode is activated may be lengthened For more information see 5 Energy saving modes on page 4 11 and Auto sleep time on page 7 47 Automatic 2 Sided Copy Function The Energy Star Program encourages the use of 2 sided copying which reduces the load on the environment and this device includes 2 sided copying as a standard function For example by copying two 1 sided originals onto a single sheet of paper as a 2 sided copy it is possible to lower the amount of pap
208. de have been separated into different sections in order to allow even those using a copier for the first time to use this machine efficiently properly and with relative ease A basic introduction to each section can be found below for reference Refer to the related section when using this copier Section 1 IMPORTANT PLEASE READ FIRST This section contains explanations on information that is necessary for you to know prior to using this copier for the first time after purchase For example it contains notes and cautions on installation and operation that should be strictly obeyed in order to ensure its safe and proper operation Section 2 NAMES OF PARTS This section contains explanations on the names and functions of the parts of the copier and its operation panel Section 3 PREPARATIONS This section contains explanations on procedures for loading copy paper Section 4 BASIC OPERATION This section contains explanations on the basic procedures required to make simple copies Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS This section contains explanations on using the various convenient functions of this copier Section 6 DOCUMENT AND OUTPUT MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS This section contains explanations on the procedures for registering frequently used business forms and documents on the optional Hard Disk printing them out when desired and managing printing conditions Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT This section contains explanations on th
209. departments Up to 1000 when the optional Hard Disk is installed on this copier e Register department ID codes of up to 8 digits between 0 and 99999999 e Check the total number of copies made under all department ID codes as a whole or by each individual department e Set copy limits to any 1 page increment up to 999 999 e Clear the copy counts for all department ID codes at one time or for each individual department e Check copy counts for your own department without the need to enter the management code Just enter the corresponding department ID code IMPORTANT In order to access the Change restrictions for use procedure under Editing copy management information it is necessary to select On under Copier function management ON OFF When the optional Printer Kit Printer Scanner Kit or Fax Kit are installed in your copier it is necessary to select On under the corresponding Printer function management ON OFF Scanner function management ON OFF or Fax function management ON OFF procedure See 6 Changing the copy management default settings on page 7 25 7 1 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS 1 Copy management procedures Procedure Editing copy management information Checking the copy management counts Turning the copy management function ON OFF Changing the copy management default settings 7 2 Description e Register new department ID codes
210. e Date Time 30 10 01 14 02 Time difference GMT 08 00 Change MGMT code with 5000 Auto sleep On Energy Saver key setting Low power mode Change y Default setting 7 58 Touch the Low power mode key or the Sleep mode key as desired Inch specifications When pressing Energy Saver key state can be set Low power Sleep mode Metric specifications When pressing Energy Saver key state can be set Low power Sleep mode If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it touch the Back key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 Touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 Touch the Close key once again The touch panel will return to the Default setting screen Touch the End key The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS 4 Copy default settings The following table indicates the copy default settings available in this copier Change any or all of the settings as desired in order to make the most effective use of your copier Reference Default setting Description Available settings Factory setting page Exposure mode Selects between auto exposure and manual Manual Auto Manual 7 63 exposure as the default copy exposure mode in the initial mode Exposure adjustment Changes the incremental step to be used during 1 s
211. e toner container or the waste toner box 5 S Other precautions e After use ALWAYS dispose of the toner container and the waste toner box in accordance with Federal State and Local rules and regulations e Store all consumables in a cool dark location e lf you will not be using the copier for a prolonged period of time remove all paper from the drawer s cassette s and the multi bypass tray and seal in its original packaging SAFETY OF LASER BEAM 1 Safety of laser beam This copier has been certified by the manufacturer to Class 1 level under the radiation performance standards established by the U S DHHS Department of Health and Human Services in 1968 This indicates that the product is safe to use during normal operation and maintenance The laser optical system enclosed in a protective housing and sealed within the external covers never permits the laser beam to escape 2 The CDRH Act A laser product related act was implemented on Aug 2 1976 by the Center for Devices and Radiological Health CDRH of the U S Food and Drug Administration FDA This act prohibits the sale of laser products in the U S without certification and applies to laser products manufactured after Aug 1 1976 The label shown below indicates compliance with the CDRH regulations and must be attached to laser products marketed in the United States On this copier the label is on the right side COPYING MACHI
212. e auto or manual Metric specifications Select default mode of copy exposure auto or manual NOTE If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it touch the Back key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 4 Touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 5 Touch the Close key once again The touch panel will return to the Default setting screen 6 Touch the End key The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab 7 63 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Exposure adjustment step Perform the following procedure to change the incremental step to be used during adjustment of the copy exposure 1 Display the Copy default screen See 5 Accessing the copy default settings on page 7 62 Inch specifications Default setting Counter Copy default j rone y Bypass setting Machine Document Register default Management Pj orig size BOX Counter i Management Pj check j f Print User report gt Adjustment py Metric specifications Default setting Counter Za Bypass Hard Disk Counter setting Management check Machine Document Register Print User default Management Pj orig size s report Adjustment By 2 Select Exposure steps in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the Change key The Exposure steps
213. e copy side facing upward and the flap facing away from the direction of 3 1 8 X 7 1 2 insertion Then slide the envelopes into the slot along the insert guides as far as they will go Comm 10 3 3 8 X 9 1 2 Envelope DL 110 x 220 mm Envelope C5 162 x 229 mm Comm 6 3 4 3 5 8 x 6 1 2 ISO B5 176 x 250 mm Envelope C4 229 x 324 mm NOTES Oufuku Hagaki 200 x 148 mm e If the optional Printer Kit or Printer scanner Kit is installed on your YOUKEI 2 162 x 114 mm copier and you attempt to print from a computer onto envelopes that are wider than they are tall be sure to leave the flap closed and set YOUKEI 4 234 x 105 mm the envelopes with the side to be printed onto facing upward Orient the edge with the flap towards the front of the copier and then slide the envelopes into the slot along the insert guides as far as they will go 1 Open the multi bypass tray e The proper orientation will actually depend upon the type of envelope being used e Incorrectly loading envelopes can result in printing in the wrong orientation or on the wrong side e When setting envelopes on the multi bypass tray BE SURE to specify the type of envelopes that will be used under 3 Multi bypass tray paper settings on page 7 87 3 4 section 4 BASIC OPERATION 1 Basic copying procedure P Si S Ready to copy Tiel EI Plain 1 Warm up Turn the power switch ON At the end of warm up Ready to copy
214. e procedures for changing the various default settings available for adjusting the copier to fit your copy needs and on the procedures for managing copy us Section 8 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT This section contains explanations on the optional equipment that are available for use with this copier Section 9 TROUBLESHOOTING This section contains explanations on handling problems that may occur during operation of this copier such as when an error indication appears or if a paper jam occurs Section 10 MAINTENANCE AND OPERATION INFORMATION This section contains explanations on maintaining the copier in proper condition and on replacing the toner container as well as information on the specifications for this copier CONTENTS Section 1 IMPORTANT PLEASE READ FIRST 1 1 CAUTION LABELS n nennen 1 1 INSTALLATION PRECAUTIONS cccccssssssssscssssssseseesssseseee 1 2 PRECAUTIONS FOR USE vacesccssssssssssessssessssvesssseseeernnssseeeee 1 3 Section 2 NAMES OF PARTS ccssceeseeeeees 2 1 t Main Dody acces cae esses E 2 1 2 Operation panel creveraunszeacanscanverarvtecainonapanleriniennnducinindrraccee 2 3 J TOUCA PANCI senaga E EERE Er FE EE 2 5 Section 3 PREPARATIONS cccccsseeeeseeenees 3 1 le Loading Paper cect tees cetera sees es eae eet cece eared eects ees 3 1 1 Note when adding papet 0 0 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 1 2 Loading paper into the drawer cassette
215. e to dirt and damage When removing the jammed paper be sure not to touch the drum area that is located inside the machine with your hands or with jewelry such as watches and rings etc A CAUTION 1 Pull up the left cover 1 handle to open the left cover 1 The copier s fixing unit is extremely hot Take sufficient care when working in this area as there is a danger of getting burned 5 Close the left cover 1 2 9 6 section 9 TROUBLESHOOTING 6 Press the Start key after the Press Start Key Re starting When the optional Fax Kit is installed the message below message appears appears Perform the appropriate action by following the If the message below appears proceed to the next step message Inch specifications Inch specifications X BBY isime poner plug from the socket 1 Open left covert 1 11x87 Count Set 2 Remove paper l Plain 2 8x11 l IZ Color i LU 11x8 q 3 11x8 i Plain 3 Close cover d a 11x8 2 d Recycled 1 Open left cover 2 Remove paper 3 Close cover 3 AAD Bypass Plain Plain AAD Recycled T7 Repeat the steps 1 to 5 e Misfeed in left cover 2 JAM 18 22 If the message below appears a misfeed has occurred in the left 8 The message below appears Perform the appropriate action cover 2 Remove the misfed paper using the procedure given below by following the message Inch specifications Inch spe
216. e type of paper standard paper recycled paper etc to be loaded in the drawer cassette in Paper type drawer cassette No 1 No 4 on page 7 44 1 Pull the drawer cassette out toward you as far as it will go Do not pull more than one drawer cassette out at a time 2 Hold the width adjustment lever and move it to align the width guide with the required paper width Paper sizes are marked inside the drawer cassette 3 Hold the length adjustment plate and move it to align with the required paper length 3 2 4 Set the paper flush against the left hand wall of the drawer cassette IMPORTANT e Make sure that there are no folds etc in the paper when it is set in a drawer cassette Such paper may be the cause of paper jams e There is a sticker 4 in the illustration indicating paper capacity attached to the inside of the drawer cassette Do not load paper above this limit e When you are loading paper into a drawer cassette make sure that the side facing upward when the package is opened is the side that is facing upward in the drawer cassette e Adjust the length adjustment plate and the width guide BEFORE loading paper into a drawer cassette Failure to do so may result in skewed paper feed or a paper jam e Make sure that the paper is set securely against the length adjustment plate and the width guide If there is a gap between the paper and the adjustment plate or the width guide r
217. eadjust the plate and the guide to fit the paper snugly 5 Set the supplied paper size sheet so that the size of the paper loaded can be checked by looking at the front of the drawer cassette 6 Gently push the drawer cassette back in NOTE Before leaving the copier in disuse for a prolonged period of time remove the paper from the drawer s cassette s and seal it in its original packaging to protect from moisture Also when storing paper in a high temperature and high humidity environment seal it in a moisture proof bag 3 Loading paper into the multi bypass tray Up to 200 sheets of standard copy paper 75 g m 80 g m of a size between 11 x 17 A3 and 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 AGR can be set on the multi bypass tray at one time When copying onto special paper be sure to use the multi bypass tray NOTE The types of special paper and the number of sheets that can be loaded in the multi bypass tray are e Transparencies 25 sheets e Standard paper 120 g m 130 sheets e Standard paper 160 g m 100 sheets IMPORTANT e When copying onto OHP transparencies be sure to fan through them a few times to separate the sheets before setting them on the multi bypass tray e When copying onto non standard size paper perform the procedure in 1 Paper size and type on page 7 87 and select the paper size e When setting special paper such as OHP transparencies and thick paper on the multi bypass tr
218. eady 0K 0 0 VA eames mode so that if the entered code doesn t match the registered i security code it will not be possible to use the repeat copy mode Inch specifications l Orig set 111 Modify q Copy i Metric specifications F Ready to copy ay Sait 4 Memo Rotation L Ttc y Moaity q cop Function NOTES 5 Touch the On key e The optional Hard Disk must be installed on this copier in order to Inch specifications use this mode p All data for repeat copying will be deleted when the power switch is Ready to copy rie 1 turned OFF ae e Repeat copying registration is not available for print out under document management or with the form overlay mode EH e You can prohibit repeat copying as well as make repeat copying the EE E T E default setting in the initial mode See Repeat copying ON OFF on Mo r page 7 83 saved document Paper size Set 1 Registering a copy job for repeat copying Security When select On job can be saved You can recall and re print at anytime You can set a password to secure saved document 1 Set the originals to be copied EK 2 Touch the Function tab The content of the Function tab will be displayed If you want to register a security code go to the next step 3 Touch the W Down key The content of the next portion of l l l If you do NOT want to register a security code go direct
219. eat steps 4 E ee ee and 5 GGG acces AAN 7 Touch the End key The touch panel will return to the ia l ear screen in step 2 Touch the End key once again The touch panel will return Metric specifications to the contents of the Basic tab Shared Data Box Synergy Print Box Form box acces RRA i Document Document Document Document Form F registr printing registr S printing 5 registr i Box Box Box q Editing Editin Editing gt 3 Either touch the synergy print box that contains the documents to be deleted or enter its number using the keypad Then touch the Enter key The Box editing screen will be displayed Inch specifications Cancel Select box No Box No 3 with ke 001 ABCD_0000001 4006 UVWX_0000006 4 011 QRST_000010549016 MNOP_0200104 E C B l 002 EFGH_0000002 4007 ABCD_0000101 4 012 UVWX_00001064 017 QRST_0200105 003 IJKL_0200003 008 EFGH_00001024 013 ABCD_0200101 4018 UVWX_0200106 004 MNOP_00000044 009 IJKL_0000103 4 014 EFGH_02001024 019 ABCD_0500101 ws l 05 QRST_0000005 4010 MNOP_0000104 015 IJKL_02001034 020 EFGH_0500102 nt Bo Metric specifications ETET aa F with ke 001 ABCD_0000001 4 006 UVWX_0000006 4 011 QRST_000010549016 MNOP_0200104 E C E l 002 EFGH_0000002 4007 ABCD_0000101 4 012 UVWX_00001064 017 QRST_0200105 l 003 IJKL_0200003 008 EFGH_00001024 013 ABCD_02001014018 UVWX_0200106 004 MNOP_00000044
220. ection is selected the speed of 1 sided copying will be somewhat slower than normal When making copies with Adj print Direction selected set the paper as shown in illustration A and with the first image being copied set face down If the optional Built in Finisher is installed on your copier set the paper as shown in illustration 8 and with the first image being copied set face down KOHA If the optional Document Finisher or Built in Finisher is installed on your copier and you have selected either the Staple mode or the Hole Punch mode the direction that the copy image is created in may not conform to the desired position of the staples or holes Drawer Cassette Adj print Direction Speed Priority Reference page Available settings Factory setting Plain Preprinted Recycled Letterhead Color Colour Prepunched Rough Bond High quality Vellum Custom 1 Custom 8 On Off Adj print Direction Speed Priority Speed Priority 7 39 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Default setting Auto sleep time Auto low power time Copy eject location Fax eject location Default operation mode 7 40 Description Sets the amount of time that will elapse before the auto sleep function engages and turns the copier OFF O if no operation is performed on the copier during that time It is recommended that you try to set a longer time interval before the auto
221. ed Cover the screen to make the back cover settings will be displayed Cover Mode Booklet 3 User choice Function Inch specifications Readv to copv ma e F Set 4 Touch the Cover key The screen to make the front cover E M PY LY 11x8 settings will be displayed Front cover Inch specifications H Paper size Set Blank j Back copy L 11x81 1 f 2 sided i Front copy copy Front cover Insert Color or Thick etc paper as a front back cover Paper size Set Able to copy on same paper WAAD M Set the cover paper for specify drawer Front cover Paper size Set q AAD 00 Insert front amp back cover paper Colour Eee E l T7 Select the desired settings for the back cover Set cover paper in dedignated paper cassette Inch specifications Ready to copy Eine Rear cover E ee eee _ _ ar 3 j Front copy copy i Paper size Set HAJD Front cover ee l Blank Back copy Blank Back copy 7 9 32 section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS 8 Press the Start key Scanning of the originals will start If you set the originals in the optional Document Processor copying will start automatically If you set an original on the platen a message will appear telling you to set the next original In this case go to the next step D mi DOO Ox Clear DOD OJOJOO 9 Replace the first original with the next one and pre
222. ed key Copying will start Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS 5 25 section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS 11 Making booklets from book originals Book to Booklet mode With this mode you can add covers and either copy onto them or not so that the finished copy sets will appear like a magazine etc NOTES e Only 8 1 2 x 11 11 x 8 1 2 11 x 17 A5R B5R A4R B4 and A3 size originals and 8 1 2 x 11 11 x 8 1 2 11 x 17 B5R B5 A4R A4 B4 and A3 size copy paper can be used in this mode e It is possible for you to change the drawer cassette that will be used to feed the cover sheets See Cover drawer cassette on page 7 71 Inch specifications e If the optional Document Finisher with Center Bind amp Fold Unit is installed on your copier you will be able to select center binding stapling and folding Only 8 1 2 x 11 and 11 x 17 size copy paper can be center folded and stapled Metric specifications e If the optional Document Finisher with Center Bind amp Fold Unit is installed on your copier you will be able to select center binding stapling and folding Only A4R B4 and A3 size copy paper can be center folded and stapled With a cover The original that will be used as the cover will be scanned first so that when the finished copies are folded that page will act as the front and back cover to the copy set Without a cover When the finished copies are folded the fro
223. ed O Qa 10 10 O elte evfelisile 11 0113 Ol O 2 sided copy modes 2 sided s2 sided Sot tet tt tobe o foto oo rete tasfo To ts oO ezasi moa Bozai O O Xi 10 10 OO Of O O OO 0 0 0 0 0 0 O Page separation Split copy modes 2 sided 1 sided OIO gt 10 10 O eae 15 15 35 16 OIO 6 Page separation Split copy modes Book 1 sided O1 22 0O110 10 10l10 d 04 O O 08 23 23 35 18 111 0113 O O 6 Booklet Stitching mode O l22 0O l10l10 10 l10 10 a O O O 35 181111 01131010 64 Book to Booklet mode O O O O O O O O 04 04 CALS Ee CIEST IE IETJE EIRO 65 Margin mode OOOO rO OCO A A PN CREC TEC REST ECAEC LEC IEC TECTESIESCZES Centering Image shift mode OIO O OIO OIGO OIOIO OIO O O amp Border erase modes Sheet erase O ESIE es Seem ea cerca a ceed cece Border erase modes Individual border erase o lo ojo lolo lo ojajololo MNlo oj oj ololo o o o Bordererase modes Book erase O 22e 15 23 23 05 SOPE Combine Merge Copy modes Ce O 15 15 23 23 05 gt lt 25 O Memo mode O ait 2 O 2 O O O 26 O 30 11 16 gt 28 O O O Stetsfoto O O ed O Fea e E ER pagga gaoa O S Ea aori iT ee OIZ O amp asak aeto JGO SeeD ADA a Scanner functions Database connection 10 13 10 14 Index Numerics NM hc se AA cect E E
224. ed press the Default setting Counter key The Default setting screen will be displayed Stop Clear 2 Touch the BOX Management Hard Disk Management key Inch specifications Default setting Counter Bypass BOX Counter setting j Management Bj check Machine Document Register Print i default Management Bj orig size gt report Metric specifications Default setting Counter Z reson Bypass Hard Disk Counter setting p Management check Machine Document Register Print User i default Management orig size report Adjustment Bj Use the keypad to enter the 4 digit management code The factory default setting for 30 com copiers is 3000 for 40 cpm copiers is 4000 and for 50 cpm copiers is 5000 If the entered code matched the registered one the HDD Management mode HDD Management screen will be displayed Inch specifications Enter the administrator number Metric specifications Enter the administrator number i Touch the On key under Check HDD capacity left side of the touch panel The overall size of the hard disk as well as the currently available space will be displayed If you want to delete any invalid data go to the next step If you are finished with this procedure go directly to step 6 Inch specifications HDD management mode Check HDD capacity Delete invalid data Able to check the free space and capa
225. ed settings Program function 5 50 1 Registering a DIOOFAIN azesc2sicecpsseccanvactadseuicoducnsimenctyoacesess 5 50 2 Using programmed settings to make copies 9 51 3 Changing a registered program name sssssssssseseeeeeeeeee 6 51 4 Deleting a registered program ceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 52 25 FROOISIEAUON KOVS sssi iossnimnii ionadan RE 5 53 1 Registering a function or mode under a function key 5 53 2 Deleting a registration key nnnnnneeeeeeeeeeeeenene nee 5 99 26 Easily add covers and insert sheets between various sets of originals in one operation Job build mode ee 5 57 1 Using the job build MODE cscascecenerescesdearerieeceocteeheateeins 5 57 2 Selecting the settings and functions eee 5 62 Section 6 DOCUMENT AND OUTPUT MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONG 6 1 1 Document management functions c cceeeeeeee cess eeeeeeees 6 1 1 What are the document management functions 6 1 2 Form REGIS WAM ON ccccsatinecnsacdexeniunanetnasndenenesiansnadnesadeadenesbeess 6 1 3 Shared data DOK aed sense viecc watvace seiniau iniii eirian ieai 6 4 4 Synergy print boxes cccccccceesecaseeeessseeeeeeeeeeeeseaseaeeees 6 9 2 Output management functions cc ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 20 1 What are the output management functions 6 20 2 Display of the output
226. eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneess 8 12 Setting the number of Copies to be made eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeerenees 4 3 Shared data DOK seasvensesuevtaonannscavennease sav ANAE EREE RESAN RESER EEANN 6 4 Sheet erase Mode racist vena ssnnenbvanantes Cataatnerviuadin cisansiadivandeniaiinets 5 11 Silent mode ON OFF machine default setting ee 7 53 ISS OS a E 4 11 Sory FINISHER MOUS srera aana soan n EEEREN AREAREN 5 29 Sort Finished mode ON OFF copy default setting 00 7 78 Special paper action setting machine default setting 7 46 1 IS CI MC ANOS E E E A E EA E 10 7 AY COMING AEE ETE E E AA AE E A E EE 4 3 synergy Prini DOKE sssaaa aiiai a eiaa iai 6 9 TEM NOG AOE ee teins PE E E E eine E EE 4 3 Text ONO MOdE ace EA 4 3 Time difference machine default Setting ccccseeseeeeeteeees 7 55 Toner COMANSET sorier aena EE NE 10 3 Touch panel sound ON OFF machine default setting 7 52 Transparency backing sheet mode cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeees 5 36 Turning the copy management function ON OFF eeeee 7 25 U Using programmed settings to Make COPIES cccceeeseseeeeeees 5 51 W WV ADO se E saay sacle eadecgdotnarciauaseedeiwcneantenseanen 4 1 Waste TONET BOX i secaexsshecastneete ese EA AE RENAA eee 10 3 When paper misfeedS nase aecincrnendiecctusadedeenserusdecenosnnesiendengediereesenieseeeder 9 4 X XY ZOOM MOJE erereniene
227. eeees 7 88 Original size registration cccccccccesssessseeeseeeeeeeeesesseeeesseeeeeees 7 90 EAPC NESI Scape stiatatanretacsaeeduacteiscnaneceancaugeaunantietaasesaunsoeesue 7 91 Checking the total counter and printing out the counter ODOT siecia satedaiee tienen gues meedtesmstinnda ieee cate seaabaaina 7 93 Box management default settings eseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 94 G8 BOX SeNNOS scai mener eee meen emer men tee Merete rt ete oe 7 94 2 Accessing the box management default settings 7 94 3 Making box management default settings 0 7 95 Hard disk management actacede ca ssadeececencacies chadineiexsessieeceanene soreness 7 99 REDON OE sssi 7 101 Changing the language used for messages cee 7 103 Entering characters scxnecsiexsancedsemnadnmianeasicaindsannsinsetainnnasiosuosnestnes 7 104 1 Character input screens seseseseseeeeeerrnn re rrrereeneee n 7 104 2 Character input procedure s s sssseseeseesssseerrrrrrrrrrree 7 106 CONTENTS Section 8 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT 8 1 1 Document Processor s ciavecccesccierscesvenveevizesedecnetsesnvescces sees 8 1 2 Paper Feeder n onnnnnnnnnneenesnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnennrnnrnnerernnesnnnn 8 5 3 Paper Feeder caicepeccsceecevsssccdetceceasiecer eens etsnceadseeavetoneeaustt 8 5 4 Document Finisher sssicctceserictdcatensietceteraieiies anccessuneretecdeass 8 5 5 Document Finisher sceveccsesec
228. el and verify the direction in which the originals were set Inch specifications Paper size LU 44x81 10056 Finished Set the book original EA top side direct to back H Left top fe corner Paper size Set Paper size OAD WAAD Finished Check direction Finished Check direction Set book original top Check direction of original Es EE side direction to back Back Edge eer 1 9 Press the Start key Copying will start 5 19 section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS 9 Overlaying one image over another Form overlay mode This mode can be used to scan the first original the form into Touch the On key memory and have its image overlaid onto copies made from The screen to set the shading level of the form image will be subsequent originals If the optional Hard Disk is installed on your displayed copier it is also possible to register and store in memory in advance l Inch specifications the images that you want to use as original forms p Ready to copy ieee Overlay first scanned image onto the scanned image or on registered from Paper size YA Overlay 1st image on the scanned image or on registered form NOTE Refer to 2 Form registration on page 6 1 for the procedure to register images as forms 4 Touch the key or the key to select the level of shading that you want to use for the original form 1 Touch the Function tab The content of t
229. elect the main mode Select main mode screen will be displayed Inch specifications Default setting Counter Default menu Setting mode Sleep mode changing time 60 Minute A Av Low power mode chng time 15 Minute v D Select Copy output mode Inner tray v e Select FAX output mode Inner tray Select the main mode Copy mode Change y l Default setting j Metric specifications Default setting Counter Default menu Setting mode ae Sleep mode changing time 60 Minute a Low power mode chng time 15 Minute v Select COPY output mode Inner tray Select FAX output mode Inner tray Select main mode COPY Mode Change y l Default setting i Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Select the Copy mode key or the FAX mode key as appropriate Inch specifications Select the default display panel mode when the power is on Copy mode FAX mode Select the default display panel mode when the power is on NOTE If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it touch the Back key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 4 Touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 5 Touch the Close key once again The touch panel will return to the Default setting screen 6 Touch the End key The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab 7 51 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
230. ement mode Language selection function Requires the optional Hard Disk 10 7 section 10 MAINTENANCE AND OPERATION INFORMATION Power SOUTCe oh sicaescciuceescoscamoenss beacieysduiaoenbasneeeatensemiacexGunoes Inch specifications 120 V AC 60 Hz 12 A Max Metric specifications 220 240 V AC 50 or 60 Hz 6 5 A Max 3 gilt 6 9 ogee ener ence Onr nRT eres mer renee meer ere eer mere 23 W x 25 2 5 D x 29 1 3 H 585 mm W x 646 mm D x 745 mm H Vy CIOM It pa E SE Approx 165 Ibs Approx 82 kg Noise EMISSION ccccccseccessesesseecesseceseeecsseecesseeerseseesees lt 70dB A Required Space oases sire scan datveudetind sack ocnuidnte asx wad sccel satacetideadee 23 W x 25 2 5 D 585 mm W x 646 mm D Optional equipment eicesescderecderteeveneres ieedeecier reeds Document Processor Paper Feeder Document Finisher Bult in Finisher Job Separator Hard Disk Key Counter Document Tray Printer Kit Printer Scanner Kit Fax Kit Specifications are subject to change without notice 10 8 Section 10 MAINTENANCE AND OPERATION INFORMATION 4 Environmental Specifications Power consumption 30 cpm copiers 40 cpm copiers 50 cpm copiers Inch Metric Inch Metric Inch Metric specifications specifications specifications specifications specifications specifications e During copying 670 wh or less 670 wh or less 685 wh or less 685 wh or less 720 wh or less 760 wh or less e During standby 175 wh or less 2
231. ement report and clear the copy counts for all q On i Printer limitation cae finial ee of the registered department ID codes Scanner limitation No limit Fax Transm Limitation No limit P CZF 1 Access the copy management menu screen l i See 2 Accessing the copy management menu screen on Default setting Management Management edi E ist Sales Dept Metric specifications Inch specifications 1st Sales Dept f OO l Setting item Value EET A Copy Language Management l default r guag g k Bypass BUX Counter setting Management check On Printer limitation On Output limitation No limit v Machine Document Register Print User i default Management orig size gt report Adjustment py Scanner limitation No limit Fax Transm Limitation No limit Change y Metric specifications Touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 Deau SEUNG ROUNEN 6c f J f f Touch the Close key Bypass Hard DISK Counter setting gt Management check gt Machine Document Register Print User i default Management Bj orig size gt report j Adjustment P i 2 Touch the Management total key The Management total screen will be displayed Inch specifications Managem Total Register Sett Management Each Mot Management Management total gt Total edit 5 Def Set 5 Default setting Metric specifications Managem
232. ennen Book erase Touch the key or the key to change the displayed border width to that desired In metric specification copiers the desired border width can also be entered directly by touching the Keys key and then using the keypad Inch specifications REEONACK O 9 Paper size Set LU 41x81 Sheet Individual q Erase BordrErase Metric specifications Paper size Ready to copy HAAD 0 18 0 36 d None j Border Individual Leese tasomoe J L E Go directly to step 10 section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS 6 Touch the Individual BordrErase Individual Erase Mode key The screen to set the top bottom left or right border will be displayed Inch specifications Ready to copy Border Erase Paper size Erase the border shadow of original or shadow from centor of book Individua BordrErase Metric specifications REEONA CKO 9 Erase Mode Paper siz WAAD None Erase edge of original or center of book eeeeane eee and copy Border Individual erase Erase Mode Touch the key that corresponds to the border whose width you want to change The screen to set that border width will be displayed Inch specifications Ready to copy Paper size Set LU 411x817 Check direction of original top side Pig NEL BordrErase 2 fa H Left top H corner Check directi
233. ent Register Print default Management orig size P report Copy default j Language User Adjustment By Metric specifications Default setting Counter a ae d Bypass Hard Disk Counter setting Management Bj check s Machine Document Register Print User F default Management Bj orig size gt report Adjustment by 2 Select Background exp adj in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the Change key The Background exp adj screen will be displayed Inch specifications Default setting Counter Default menu Setting mode Exposure mode Manual La Exposure steps 1 step Change y Up Original image quality Text Photo Down Eco Print Off Background exp adj Standard l Default setting Metric specifications Default setting Counter Default menu Setting mode A up aA Exposure steps 1 step v h A Down Image quality original Text Photo Eco Print Off Background exp adj Standard Change y l Default setting Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS 3 Touch the Lighter key or Darker key to adjust density Inch specifications Able to adjust exposure of paper background Metric specifications Able to adjust exposure of paper background NOTE If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it touch the Back key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 4
234. ent code used by the copy manager IMPORTANT If you change the management code from its factory default be sure to keep some sort of record of the new management code If for any reason you forget the registered management code you will need to contact your service representative 1 Display the Machine default screen See 2 Accessing the machine default settings on page 7 41 Inch specifications Default setting Counter i Language y Management pi Bypass BOX Counter setting j Management Bj check Machine Document Register Print User default Management Pj orig size report Adjustment Metric specifications Default setting Counter Bypass Hard Disk Counter setting Management check Machine Document Register Print User default Management Pj orig size s report Adjustment 2 Select Management code change Change MGMT code with in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the Change key The Management code change Change MGMT code with screen will be displayed Inch specifications Default setting Counter Default menu i Setting mode Silent mode On Date Time 2001 10 30 14 02 Time difference GMT 08 00 Management code change 5000 Metric specifications Default setting Counter Default menu Setting mode Key sound ON OFF On A Silent mode On v Date Time 2001 10 30 14 02 Time diff
235. enter area 1 2 inches Metric specification Outside border specification 0 18 mm Outside border Center area 6 mm 0 36 mm Center area 12 mm 1 999 Off On On 7 83 Off On Off Off On On 7 84 Exposure Mode Exposure 7 85 Reduce Enlarge Mode Sort Finished Reduce 1 2 sided Enlarge Original size Sort Finished Orig quality 1 2 sided Quality orig Original size Orig quality Quality orig All functions and modes Margin 7 86 other than those in the Border Erase Basic tab and the Erase Mode main functions in the Combine User choice tab Merge 10 None Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS 5 Accessing the copy default settings Perform the following procedure when you want to access the screens for each of the various copy default settings 1 With the content of the Basic tab displayed press the Default Setting Counter key The Default setting screen will be displayed Stop Ke Clear 2 Touch the Copy default key on the left side of the touch panel Inch specifications Default setting Counter Default setting Bypass Counter i setting j Management Bj check j f Print User i report Adjustment Bj Machine Document Register default Management Pj orig size gt Metric specifications Default setting Counter Default setting zd i Bypass Hard Disk Counter i F setting Management Pj check j f
236. entering F Ready to Job build Set original Press Start ke At Auto None Erase Select Modify Mode size orig gt cop E None Margin Page Imag shift numbering W 2 Touch the Sheet Erase Border erase key or Individual BordrErase Individual Erase Mode key and then set the desired border width Inch specifications Ready to Job build Erase the border shadow of original Individual BordrErase Metric specifications Fy Ready to Job build Set original Press Start ke Erase Mode Erase edge of original copy Border Individual erase Erase Mode Touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 1 section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS 41 Manually selecting the size of the originals This procedure allow you to select the size of the originals manually using the touch panel 1 Touch the Edit key Then in the resulting screen touch the Select orig size Select size orig key The Select original size Select size original screen will be displayed Inch specifications Fy Ready to Job build Off ee Off Border Select Modify l Erase gt orig size gt Copy 5 None Margin E I Pages y l Metric specifications F Ready to Job build Set original Press Start key Job Build Step1 Auta None Off Erase Select Modify l Mode size orig gt cop E None
237. ept 00000016 6th Sales Dept 00000017 7th Sales Dept 001 010 l Default setting Management i Metric specifications Department Order of Lindeaton 01 1st Sales Dept 02 2nd Sales Dept LA 0001 3rd Sales Dept 0014 4th Sales Dept 00000015 5th Sales Dept 00000016 6th Sales Dept 00000017 7th Sales Dept Delete Down Register 001 010 2 Select Printer limitation under the Setting item column on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the Change key The Printer limitation screen will be displayed Inch specifications 1st Sales Dept Setting item Value Printer limitation No limit Scanner limitation No limit Fax Transm Limitation No limit Change y Default setting Management Management edit Metric specifications Limit in use ist Sales Dept i Setting item Value l Copy limitation No limit Printer limitation No limit Scanner limitation No limit Fax Transm Limitation No limit Change y Default setting Management Management edit 3 To set the maximum number of printouts that can be made under this ID code touch the Counter limit key and proceed to the next step To allow unlimited printing touch the No limit key and to cancel printing privileges completely touch the Is not permitted key and proceed to step 5 Inch specifications No limit l Counter q limit l Is not q permitted Metric
238. ept W oom f 00000017 7th Sales Dept 4 Use the numeric keys on the keypad to enter the maximum 001 010 number of documents that can be transmitted under this ID Deru seting Managemen L ONUL code The document limit can be set to any 1 page increment up to 999 999 2 Select Copy limitation under the Setting item column on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the Change Fax Transm Limitation key The Copy limitation screen will be displayed Inch specifications 1 999 999 Limited value Inch specifications No limit Counter l f Isnot permitted 1st Sales Dept Setting item Value Copy limitation No limit Printer limitation No limit Scanner limitation No limit Fax Transm Limitation No limit Default setting Management Management edit i Metric specifications 1st Sales Dept __ Settingitem ie o SSS item Value Copy limitation No limit Printer limitation No limit Scanner limitation No limit Fax Transm Limitation No limit Change y Touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 Default setting Management Management edit 7 13 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS 3 To set the maximum number of copies that can be made under this ID code touch the Counter limit key and proceed to the next step To allow unlimited copies touch the No limit key and to cancel copying privileges complete
239. er Bypass Hard Disk Counter setting Management Bj check gt Machine Document Register Print User default Management Pj orig size gt report j Adjustment By Basic Register mode Addition Mode elels Erace Select paper a AV ee ee Merge Merge User choice LL amp 7 8 a 0 Noe B None Batch scanning 7 re g 10 None Auto selection 11 l2 None Margin NOTE 2 Select Customize Add function in the settings list on the If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it touch the left side of the touch panel and then touch the Change Back key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 key The Customize Add function screen will be displayed Inch specifications p 4 Touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the Default setting Counter screen in step 2 i 7 ing ey aT ar Off to the Default setting screen a Display register key On Customize Main function Default menu Setting mode l 5 Touch the Close key once again The touch panel will return Customize Add function EAEN 6 Touch the End key The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab Metric specifications Default setting Counter Default menu i Setting mode Modify copy On Default Off A Display Register key On Customize Main function Customize Add function Default setting 7 86 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEME
240. er Plain v Paper type 3rd drawer Plain Paper type 4th drawer Plain Check bypass sizing Off Change y Default setting U Down Metric specifications Default setting Counter Default menu Setting mode Paper type 2nd cassette Plain Paper type 3rd cassette Plain Paper type 4th cassette Plain Check bypass sizing Off Change p Default setting Paper type 1st cassette Plain A 7 45 Custom paper type for 2 sided copying Perform the following procedure to set whether or not each custom type of paper custom 1 custom 8 will be available for use in 2 sided copying 1 Display the Machine default screen See 2 Accessing the machine default settings on page 7 41 Inch specifications Default setting Counter Bypass BOX Counter setting Management Bj check s Machine Document Register Print User F default Management orig size gt report Adjustment Co Metric specifications Default setting Counter ad ee Bypass Hard Disk Counter setting j Management Bj check gt Machine Document Register Print User i default Management Bj orig size gt report j Adjustment P i 2 Select Select paper type 2sided in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the Change key The Select paper type 2sided screen will be displayed Inch specifications Default setting Counter Default menu i Setting mode
241. er 1 handle to open the left cover 1 While rotating the gear as shown clean the transfer roller by moving the cleaning brush from left to right along with the transfer roller Once the cleaning operation is completed return the cleaning brush to the copier and close both the left cover 1 and the front cover Section 10 MAINTENANCE AND OPERATION INFORMATION 2 Replacing the toner container and waste toner box If Add toner to resume copying appears on the message display 2 Push up the toner container release lever and slowly pull the replenish the toner Although several copies can be made after the old toner container out until the handle can be seen message appears it is recommended that you replace the toner container immediately After replacing the toner container be sure to also replace the waste toner box Also be sure to clean the related parts when you replace a toner container Dirty parts can cause lower performance by your copier IMPORTANT e Replenish toner only when the message is displayed e When replacing a toner container do not leave any items such as floppy disks etc nearby Inch specifications Ready to copy eine eer Set A WARNING High voltage is present in the charger section Take sufficient care when working in this area as there is a danger of electrical shock A CAUTION Do not pull the toner container all the way as it can fall off Add toner to resume 4
242. er for cover paper Bypass Default magnification Manual Change y Default setting Metric specifications Default setting Counter Default menu i Setting mode Select paper APS Select paper type APS Plain Default cassette 1st paper Cassette for cover paper Bypass Default mode Manual Change y i Default setting 7 68 3 Touch the APS key to have the same size of copy paper as the original selected automatically and the Default drawer cassette key to have paper fed from the designated default drawer cassette Inch specifications Set auto paper selection mode APS Default drawer Metric specifications Close Setting paper select mode NOTE If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it touch the Back key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 4 Touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 5 Touch the Close key once again The touch panel will return to the Default setting screen 6 Touch the End key The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab Paper type auto paper selection mode Perform the following procedure to set which types of paper can be selected under the auto paper selection mode 1 Display the Copy default screen See 5 Accessing the copy default settings on page 7 62 Inch specifications Default setting Counter
243. er of copies that have been made It is useful for copier centralized management on a department or even company level The Key Counter may count up when either data from a computer is printed out or fax pages are printed out lt a mM z e Setting the Key Counter Insert the Key Counter securely into the Key Counter opening NOTE When the Key Counter function is used copies cannot be made unless the Key Counter is inserted into the copier If the Key Counter is not inserted securely Insert key counter appears on the message display 11 Document Tray The Document Tray lets you place originals and other documents next to the machine before using them etc It also contains space for storing paper clips etc 8 12 12 Printer Kit If the Printer Kit is installed this copier can be used as a printer For more detailed information see the printer s Operation Guide Since the network board is equipped this copier can also be used as a network printer allowing access from multiple computers The optional printer network kit and hard disk are also available 13 Printer Scanner Kit If the Printer Scanner Kit is installed this copier can be used as a printer or a network scanner For more detailed information see the Operation Guide for the Printer Scanner Kit Since the network board is equipped this copier can also be used as a network printer allowing access from multiple computers The optio
244. er used For more information see 1 Making 2 sided copies from various types of originals 2 sided copy modes on page 5 1 Paper Recycling The Energy Star Program encourages the use of environmentally friendly recycled paper Your sales or service representative can provide information about recommended paper types When you are using the copier functions of this machine replace all references to the Sleep Mode with the Off Mode viii Please read this Operation Guide before using the copier Keep it close to the copier for easy reference The sections of this guide and parts of the copier marked with symbols are safety warnings meant to protect the user other individuals and surrounding objects and ensure correct and safe usage of the copier The symbols and their meanings are indicated below DANGER Indicates that serious injury or even death will very possibly result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance with the related points WARNING Indicates that serious injury or even death may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance with the related points CAUTION Indicates that personal injury or mechanical damage may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance with the related points Symbols The A symbol indicates that the related section includes safety warnings Specific points of attention are indicated inside the symbol AN R General warning
245. erence GMT 08 00 Management code change 5000 Change y 7 56 3 NOTE Use the keypad to enter a new 4 digit management code Inch specifications anagement code change Able to change management code key E Metric specifications Able to change management code key W If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it touch the Back key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 Touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 Touch the Close key once again The touch panel will return to the Default setting screen Touch the End key The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Auto sleep ON OFF 3 Touch the On key if you want to use the auto sleep function Perform the following procedure to set whether or not to have the Inch specifications auto sleep function automatically engage and turn the copier OFF O if no operation is performed on the copier for a designated amount of F Autom turns into sleep mode if no oper within a set time tl me q after last setting or when copying is done 1 Display the Machine default screen See 2 Accessing the machine default settings on page 7 41 Inch specifications Default setting Counter Metric specifications Autom turns into sleep mode if no oper within a set time after
246. erri rrinin naini aE 4 8 Z PA olola FINO lt ANE 4 6 A1 For best copy results and machine performance we recommend that you use only KYOCERA MITA original supplies for your KYOCERA MITA copier QUALITY CERTIFICATE This machine has passed all quality controls and final inspection KYOCERA MITA AMERICA INC Headquarters 225 Sand Road Fairfield New Jersey 07004 0008 TEL 973 808 8444 FAX 973 882 6000 New York Branch 1410 Broadway 23rd floor New York NY 10018 TEL 917 286 5400 FAX 917 286 5402 Northeastern Region 225 Sand Road Fairfield New Jersey 07004 0008 TEL 973 808 8444 FAX 973 882 4401 Midwestern Region 201 Hansen Court Suite 119 Wood Dale Illinois 60191 TEL 630 238 9982 FAX 630 238 9487 KYOCERA MITA CANADA LTD 6120 Kestrel Road Mississauga Ontario L5T 188 Canada TEL 905 670 4425 FAX 905 670 8116 KYOCERA MITA MEXICO S A DE C V Av 16 de Septiembre 407 Col Santa In s 02130 Azcapotzalco Mexico D F M xico TEL 55 5383 2741 FAX 55 5383 7804 2003 KYOCERA MITA Corporation http www kyoceramita com lt x KYOCERd is a trademark of Kyocera Corporation Western Region 14101 Alton Parkway Irvine California 92618 7006 TEL 949 457 9000 FAX 949 457 9119 Southeastern Region 1500 Oakbrook Drive Norcross Georgia 30093 TEL 770 729 9786 FAX 770 729 9873 Southwestern Region
247. etting Management Bj check j f Machine Document Register Print User default Management Pj orig size report Adjustment py Metric specifications Default setting Counter a setting Management check j f NOTE Machine Document Register Print User default Management Pj orig size s report Adjustment By If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it touch the Back key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 2 Select Preset limit in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the Change key 4 cd Touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the The Preset limit screen will be displayed screen in step 2 Inch specifications Default setting Counter 5 Touch the Close key once again The touch panel will return to the Default setting screen Default menu Setting mode Sort Sort On Offset Off LA Auto Rotation Rotate i 6 Touch the End key The touch panel will return to the Default margin width Left 1 4 0 i PET Default erase width Border s Center 1 2 i contents of the Basic tab Preset limit 999 Set Change y Default setting Metric specifications Default setting Counter Default menu Setting mode A up y Down Auto Rotation Rotate Default margin width Left 6mm Omm Default erase width Border 6mm Center 12mm Preset limit 999 Set Change
248. etting Counter Bypass Hard Disk Counter i setting Management Bj check Machine Document Register Print User i default Management Pj orig size report Adjustment py Select Default drawer cassette in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the Change key The Default drawer cassette screen will be displayed Inch specifications Default setting Counter Default menu i Setting mode Select paper APS Select paper type APS Plain v Y down Default drawer ist paper v Down Drawer for cover paper Bypass Default magnification Manual Change y Metric specifications Default setting Counter Default menu i Setting mode Select paper type APS Plain v Default cassette ist paper Cassette for cover paper Bypass Default mode Manual 3 Touch the key that corresponds to the desired drawer cassette Inch specifications Select priority drawer 1st paper 2nd paper 3rd paper 4th paper l Default setting Copy default as Metric specifications Select paper cassette for default setting 1st paper 2nd paper 3rd paper 4th paper l Default setting Copy NOTES e If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it touch the Back key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 e The setting for drawer cassette No 3 and No 4 will only be available when the optional Paper Feeder is installed on yo
249. evetesceeacexascseeeesansseeneceseticeresecets 8 9 6 Document Finisher wcis 2 c2 2esc2cseseoteetesteedtscdententtedeadardieadesde 8 9 7 UE FINS Wer scssi 8 9 8 QOD Separator x icageciesisecesvses ceatectchbvetescemsearenyehicetereee dete 8 11 O lel co DISR osre tr ater eee eeleeen tenn naire cnrtce ene ncn 8 11 10 Key Counter g eeee eee neennnnr Neen Ne emer ee cmc nn feree ee eaenereoeer mmm 8 12 11 Document Tay xgess sa cincavsicsedense szectecuvendc tense zesseeeveedaeeteess 8 12 2 oP IN ce state Saatennee honed reece E 8 12 13 Printer Scanner Kit ancncevecsescarievssnavervessevenieviedesssevercesseie 8 12 EEE a AE EES V AE EET 8 12 Section 9 TROUBLESHOOTING cceeeeee 9 1 1 If one of the following messages is displayed eee 9 1 2 If one of these indicators lights or flashes eeeeeeeeeeeees 9 3 3 When paper misfeeds cccccccccecsesceeeeececseseeesetenenenenennes 9 4 H MANNS see asec cetacean nee as cen sencseet A 9 4 2 Removal procedures 2 0 cccectezesecedshereisnnsezeseccdexcdeesssavens 9 4 4 If other trouble OCOUNS waste acsaerdretesnnienrranndtomniennnmcmeeens 9 13 Section 10 MAINTENANCE AND OPERATION INFORMATION siciecesescceesscoswecexenescnevienes 10 1 1 Cleaning the copier cas cnsrernenswasseierastcisacszentaioe stanenesasieneetxencsexstact 10 1 2 Replacing the toner container and waste toner box 10 3 Bi OSC CANONS sssi A 10 7 4 Environment
250. eys You can register up to 3 functions and or modes from among those 3 Touch the 4 in 1 key and then the Register key displayed in the Function tab under the registration keys The functions and modes in the Basic tab and the User choice tab can be registered under registration keys as well Ready to copy pire Inch specifications Layout 1 Registering a function or mode under a function i Check direction of key l DN original top side Perform the following procedure when you want to register a function or mode under a registration key To register a function or mode under a registration key refer to the following sample procedure which shows how to register the 4 in 1 combine merge copy mode under a registration key Paper size Set IMPORTANT i a eee N of In order to register functions and or modes under registration keys you must first turn the setting ON under Registration keys ON OFF on page 7 84 4 In the Register screen touch the Register key once again The screen to register functions and or modes under registration keys will be displayed 1 Touch the Function tab The content of the Function tab will be displayed Inch specifications ar ar 2 Touch the Combine Merge copy key The Combine Merge copy screen will be displayed Inch specifications Ready to copy cin ew Select 2 sided Se
251. f an electric short If an earth connection is not possible contact your SEIVICS FEDICSERIAIVG titi scitrnmmimonnenenecndens Other precautions e Connect the power plug to the closest outlet possible to the copier e The power supply cord is used as the main disconnect device Ensure that the socket outlet is located installed near the equipment and is easily accessible E Handling of plastic bags A WARNING e Keep the plastic bags that are used with the copier away from children The plastic may cling to their nose and mouth causing suffocation S A PRECAUTIONS FOR USE E Cautions when using the copier A CAUTION A WARNING e DO NOT pull the power cord when removing it from the outlet If the power cord is pulled the DO NOT place metallic objects or containers with wires may become broken and there is a danger water flower Vases flower pots cups etc on or of fire or electrical shock ALWAYS grasp the near the copier This of situation presents a power plug when removing the power cord from danger of fire or electrical shock should they fall S the OULICL oecccccccesscssssescesessessssssvesectsssssseee J e ce seca cease E EEE A A DEE deste e ALWAYS remove the power plug from the outlet DO NOT remove any of the covers from the when moving the copier If the power cord is copier as there is a danger of electrical shock Q damaged there is a danger of fire or electrical from high v
252. f copies and printouts made will be the total count of copies etc made on this machine as a whole You displayed can also print out the information as a counter report If you want to print out a counter report touch the Print report key NOTES Inch specifications e You can also check the total number of printouts made under each of the optional printer scanner a fax functions ea Copy Printer You can add itio nal ly ch eck th e num ber of o rigi nals scan ned on th is Black amp White a a03 e M aaah machine Num of um of pages Copy Original l S L L L nme ds l Default setting 1 With the content of the Basic tab displayed press the Default Setting Counter key Metric specifications The Default setting screen will be displayed Close Number print Printer Black amp White 4 Default Setting Management Interrupt 3 Reset 4 Stop 6 Clear NOTE Make sure there is 11 x 8 1 2 A4 size paper loaded in one of the drawers cassettes when you print out the counter report Num of pages O Original ae a a 2 Touch the Counter check key The Counter check screen will be displayed 4 once you are finished checking the counts touch the Close y Inch specifications The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 Default setting Counter Inch specifications a er ere Bypass BOX Counter setting Management check AR Machine Document Register
253. fer to the Operation Guide for the corresponding optional unit Available optional units The following optional units can be installed on your copier SS Document Original Cover Key Counter Document Tray Processor ne 5 ez a A I fi Fax Kit LIA Za paa m l N EEE Document Document Paper Feeder Finisher Finisher Built in Finisher Job Separator 10 10 Section 10 MAINTENANCE AND OPERATION INFORMATION Document Processor The Duplex Document Processor automatically feeds one sided originals one by one for scanning It also reverses two sided originals automatically for duplex copying and page separation copying Paper Feeder Two Paper Feeders of the same type as drawer cassette in the main body can be added Capacity and the paper loading method is the same as those for the standard drawer cassette in the main unit Paper Feeder The Paper Feeder holds up to 3 000 sheets of 11 x 8 1 2 A4 or B5 B5 is for Asia Pacific specification copiers only size standard paper Pull the Paper Feeder out towards you as far as it will go and then load up to 1 500 sheets of paper in each rows Document Finisher This unit lets you store a large volume of copies and shifts the position of each copy set for ease of sorting It can staple finished copy sets and bind them It is also possible to use the Document Finisher to punch holes in them for filling purposes optional Document Finisher The Document Finisher stores
254. fications Scan next original s Place the originals and press start key P S finished ki h tarti WALDO 1 sided E PU oo gt oe gt _ Group Back Edge l oo 3 oe ee set 2 sided Copy Scanning finished Step 6 Making the settings for the fourth originals D in the illustration on page 5 57 Drawer Cassette No 1 is to be selected for plain paper feed under the Select paper screen 1 Touch the Select paper key The Select paper screen will be displayed Inch specifications Scan next original s Place the originals and press start key S h h 1 sided 2 sided copy q Select ae J aper FIE l Back Edge Print from q T i Ea uce oa set E d La Scanning f i j J finished Metric specifications Scan next original s Place the originals and press start key Press Scanning finished key when starting copy blank page Print from rear page Scanning finished 1 sided 2 sided Copy Select ae aper b ae i cor Back Edge gt Bases co al 18 19 Touch the key that corresponds to drawer cassette No 1 Touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 17 Inch specifications Scan next original s Place the originals and 3 11x8 B Bypass J Color Plain a 81x14 Plai Metric specifications Scan next original s Place the originals and press start key Press Scanning
255. finished key when starting copy Select paper J Colour amp Plain Plain Set the fourth originals D to be copied Press the Start key Scanning of the originals will start Step 7 Making the settings for a blank rear cover The multi bypass is to be selected for color paper feed under the Select paper screen 2 Touch the Select paper key The Select paper screen will be displayed Inch specifications Scan next original s Place the originals and press start key Press Scanning finished key when starting co eer 1 sided 2 sided copy Select Original aper gt type gt AMS Back Edge po Reduce Orig set Quality f Metric specifications Scan next original s Place the originals and press start key Press Scanning finished key when starting na 1 sided 2 sided Copy 4 f Insert i 4 lank q Select papery a j EE plank page AMS Back Edge P a Scanning finished Print from rear page section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS 2 22 23 Touch the Bypass key Touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 20 Inch specifications Scan next original s Place the originals and Press Scanning f 11x8 Plain 11x8 Color 812x14 Plain Scan next original s Place the originals and press start key Press Scanning finished key when starting copy Close 3
256. fy the binding direction of both the originals and the finished copies Inch specifications Paper size Set Set first page 1 yt P LE 11x8 ress Start k Check direction Set the book original l Off top side direct to back l Copy on AA None l Saddle St 5 F Set first page Aiie Press START button 100 Original Set book original top Off side direction to back C icon rae None Book Booklet binding Right binding If the optional Document Finisher with Center Bind amp Fold Unit is installed on your copier the Saddle Stitch Center Staple key will be displayed and you will be able to select center binding stapling and folding of the copy sets In this case if you DO want the center stapling and folding operation to be performed touch the Saddle Stitch Center Staple key and go to the next step If you do NOT want the stapling and folding operation to be performed go directly to step 8 Inch specifications Paper size LE 11x8 2 ae Set first page Press Start key g 45678 Set the book original A top side direct to back 88 Paper size m Check direction Set book original top Off side direction to back AP Copy front Booklet 5 27 section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS Touch the Bind amp Fold key g Touch the On key Itis possible for you to
257. gain Number print Number in Black amp White is limit value Scan Transm Fax Transm Scanner Scan pages Trsm pages Commun Time Number print Number in Black amp White is limit value Scan Transm Fax transm Scanner Scan pages Trsm pages Commun Time 1 Use the numeric keys on the keypad to enter your department ID code and then touch the Enter key The Basic screen will be displayed Inch specifications 2 Perform the desired copy operation as usual Once you are finished copying press the Management key Each Mot Total S i Metric specifications Each Mot Total S 7 37 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS 2 Default settings The state that the copier enters at the end of warm up or when the Reset key is pressed is called the initial mode The modes functions and other settings that are automatically pre set for the initial mode are called default settings These default settings are separated into two categories Copy defaults and Machine defaults and can be changed as desired to suit your copying needs 1 Machine default settings The following table indicates the machine default settings available in this copier Change any or all of the settings as desired in order to make the most effective use of your copier Default setting Auto drawer cassette switching ON OFF Paper size drawer c
258. gin and the copies will be automatically stapled and ejected face down onto the tray Remove all of the finished copies from the tray section 8 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT 4 Copying in the Hole Punch mode optional Copies can be automatically hole punched 1 Touch the Sort Finished key The Sort Finished screen will appear Inch specifications Paper size Set Ready to copy e 100 Select 2 sided Select are paper j Separation P orig size j omamne j Exposure Reduce Auto Batch mode Enlarge Selection scanning gt Orig image Margin Forms quality Page gt Overla gt Yv Down Sort Border Cover Paper size WAAD 10085 i Merge copy y Large of gt originals Select 2 sided Select paper y Split 4 size orig Exposure Reduce Auto mode Enlarge selection Image Margin Page Form quality l i numbering overla v Down Sort Erase Program 2 Touch the Punch mode key The hole Punch screen will appear Inch specifications Paper size LU 41x81 100 Check direction of original top side Sort On Metric specifications Ready to copy anao Check direction of aa ofolhal o Staple Mode gf Punch Mode y _ _ IMPORTANT When the optional punch unit is not installed the Punch mode key will not appear Back Edge i Leit top H Corner lt Inch specification copiers gt Touch the 2 holes key or the 3
259. ginal will start Once you have finished scanning all of the originals touch the Scanning finished key Copying will start 5 21 section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS 10 Making booklets from sheet originals Booklet Stitching mode With this mode you can use 1 sided or 2 sided originals to make open faced two sided copies in such a way that the finished copies can be stacked and folded into a booklet format You can also select to have color paper or relatively thick paper fed as front and or back covers to the copy sets NOTES e Only 8 1 2 x 11 11 x 8 1 2 11 x 17 B5R B5 A4R A4 B4 and A3 size copy paper can be used in this mode e It is possible for you to change the drawer cassette that will be used to feed the cover sheets See Cover drawer cassette on page 7 71 Inch specifications e If the optional Document Finisher with Center Bind amp Fold Unit is installed on your copier you will be able to select center binding stapling and folding Only 8 1 2 x 11 and 11 x 17 size copy paper can be center folded and stapled Metric specifications e If the optional Document Finisher with Center Bind amp Fold Unit is installed on your copier you will be able to select center binding stapling and folding Only A4R B4 and A3 size copy paper can be center folded and stapled 4 If Left is selected as the binding direction Copying will be performed so that the stacked and folde
260. gn the leading edges of the paper before loading that paper into a drawer cassette or setting it on the multi bypass tray Set the paper in the drawer cassette with the side that was facing upward when you opened the package facing upward Sek e When copying onto used paper paper which has already been copied onto at least one side DO NOT use paper that is stapled or clipped together as this can be the cause of damage to the copier and or create problems in the copy image e If you use paper that is curled at all straighten the paper out before loading it into a drawer cassette or setting it on the multi bypass tray or it can Cause a paper jam IMPORTANT IMPORTANT Using special paper In this copier the type of paper loaded in each drawer cassette and on the multi bypass tray can be specified under Paper type drawer cassette No 1 No 4 on page 7 44 and 1 Paper size and type on page 7 87 respectively Among the special paper that can be use with this copier there is a wide range in paper quality and construction especially in those types of paper noted below For that reason there is a greater possibility of problems occurring during copying with these type of paper Whenever you do use such special paper as noted here it is recommended that you first make a test copy and verify the results lt Special paper for which extra caution is recommended gt e Preprinted e Labels e P
261. h Sales Dept i 00000016 6th an Dae oes next step Ea o o 00000017 7th Sales Dept a i To allow unlimited copying and printing touch the No limit 001 010 jae i key and then proceed to step 5 Inch specifications Close U Order of l P indication 5 i 4 2nd Sales Dept Mgt Inf HAL No limit 3rd Sales Dept correction X In use i i J Counter TESE 4th Sales Dept f 4 limit 00000015 5th Sales Dept nae l 00000016 6th Sales Dept i i 00000017 7th Sales Dept l 001 010 i 4 Management Management edit New register l Default setting Management Metric specifications No limit l Counter q limit NOTE If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it touch the Back key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 7 10 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Use the numeric keys on the keypad to enter the maximum Scanning restrictions number of copies and printouts that can be made in total Perform the following procedure when you want to set the maximum under this ID code The limit can be set to any 1 page number of originals that can be scanned under the corresponding increment up to 999 999 department ID code when the optional Printer Scanner Kit is installed Inch specifications IN your copier NOTE 1 999 999 This setting will only be available when On is selected as the Scanner function management ON OFF setting Limited value 999 999
262. h specifications Default setting Counter Default setting Bypass BOX Counter setting Management Bj check gt Machine Document Register Print User F default Management orig size gt report Adjustment py Copy default j Language Metric specifications Default setting Counter Default setting Co Bypass Hard Disk Counter setting Management Bj check Machine Document Register Print default Management orig size s report Language User f Adjustment By 2 Select Select Copy output mode in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the Change key The Select Copy output mode screen will be displayed Inch specifications Default setting Counter Default menu Setting mode Low power mode chng time 15 Minute Select Copy output mode Inner tray Select FAX output mode Inner tray Select the main mode Copy mode l Default setting Metric specifications Default setting Counter Default menu Setting mode Sleep mode changing time 60 Minute Low power mode chng time 15 Minute Select COPY output mode Inner tray Select FAX output mode Inner tray Select main mode COPY Mode Change l Default setting Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS 3 Touch the key that corresponds to the desired location Inch specifications Set the default conv outnut destination Job separator Metric specifications Set the defa
263. h the Select size key Inch specifications Can set totals of paper size and type Paper size Paper type 81 2x11 With no ent Managem Def set Select specif Select i aaa esos size dane paper type P i Default setting Management Managem Def set Metric specifications Can set totals of paper size and type Paper size Paper type A4 With no Select specif Select i eel size 7 commune paper type P i Default setting Management Managem Def set NOTE If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it touch the Back key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 1 7 35 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS 4 Touch the key that corresponds to the desired paper size 6 Touch the key that corresponds to the desired paper type and then touch the Close key and then touch the Close key Inch specifications Inch specifications With no i Thick Transp i aa cy ie coor Envee Custom2 2 custome 6 Management Managem Def set Total size 1 Management Managem Def set Total size 1 Metric specifications Metric specifications specif i T ranap 1 High i Management Managem Def set Total size 1 5 ox8 0 l Management Managem Def set Total size 1 l T7 Touch the Close key 5 To specify a paper type as well touch the Select paper type l l The touch panel will retur
264. he Function tab The desired shading level can be set to any 10 increment will be displayed between 10 and 100 A sample of the effect that the selected shading level will produce will be displayed to the right of the entry field 2 Touch the Forms Overlay Form overlay key The Forms Overlay Form overlay screen will be displayed age Place f first th tart Inch specifications ace from first then press star i Forms Overla Ready to copy e i 100 Select 2 sided Select Combi paper Separation gt orig size OM Ine Exposure Reduce Auto Batch mode Enlarge Selection gt scannina Orig image Margin Forms Sort Border Cover User choice Z Function _ Program Metric specifications Inch specifications Metric specifications a Ready to copy u ae 100 Select 2 sided Select Exposure Reduce Auto Large of mode Enlarge selection originals Image Margin Page Form Form qualit gt Imag shift p numbering overla selection Sort Erase Cover Function Program 5 If the optional Hard Disk is installed on your copier it is also possible to register and store in memory in advance the images that you want to use as original forms If you want to use a previously registered image as the form touch the Form Selected Form selection key and go to the next step If you want to scan in a new image go directly to step 9 5 20 Touch the Loading
265. he Off key to turn the sound on the touch panel ON or OFF as desired Inch specifications Select panel key sound mode off on Select panel key sound mode off on NOTE If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it touch the Back key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 4 Touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 5 Touch the Close key once again The touch panel will return to the Default setting screen 6 Touch the End key The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab Silent mode ON OFF Perform the following procedure to set whether or not to use the silent mode which shortens the length of time that the laser data writing motor continues to spin after each copy job is finished Turn the silent mode ON if the noise of the motor bothers you in any way 1 Display the Machine default screen See 2 Accessing the machine default settings on page 7 41 Inch specifications Default setting Counter ne Bypass BOX Counter setting Management Bj check s Machine Document Register Print User default Management orig size s report Adjustment py Copy default j Metric specifications Default setting Counter a oee Bypass Hard Disk Counter setting Management Bj check Machine Document Register Print User default Management orig size s report Adjustme
266. he auto exposure adjustment Adjust the exposure to the correct degree using the copy exposure adjustment keys To change the overall exposure perform the exposure adjustment for the each copy quality mode Replace the toner container Replace the paper with new paper 3 1 9 13 section 9 TROUBLESHOOTING Trouble Checkpoint Procedure Reference page Copies come out too dark Is the copier in the auto exposure mode To change the overall exposure perform the 7 73 auto exposure adjustment Is the copier in the manual exposure mode Adjust the exposure to the correct degree 4 2 using the copy exposure adjustment keys To change the overall exposure perform the 7 75 exposure adjustment for the each copy 7 76 quality mode 7 77 Copies are dirty Is the platen or the original cover dirty Clean the platen and or the original cover 10 1 Open the front cover and pull and push back 10 5 in the cleaning shaft Is the transfer roller contaminated Clean the transfer roller with the cleaning 10 2 brush Copy image is askew Are the originals set correctly When setting originals on the platen align 4 1 their edges with the correct original size scale for their size When setting originals in the optional 8 2 Document Processor adjust the original insertion guides to the size of the originals correctly Misfeed occurs frequently Is the paper set correctly in the Set paper properly 3 1 drawer cassette Is paper c
267. he default setting for the width of the erased borders See Erased border width on page 7 81 5 11 section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS 3 Erasing blemishes from the edges of copies using 1 Set the original to be copied individual border settings Individual border erase mode Inch specifications With this mode shadows lines etc that occur around the edges of copies made from sheet originals can be erased but in this case you can designate separate widths for each of the top bottom left and right borders The width of each border to be erased can be set to any 1 8 increment between 0 and 2 The area that will be erased as the top border is shown as a the bottom border is shown as 6 the left border as and the right border as in the illustration Metric specifications With this mode shadows lines etc that occur around the edges of copies made from sheet originals can be erased but in this case you 2 Touch the Function tab The content of the Function tab can designate separate widths for each of the top bottom left and will be displayed right borders The width of each border to be erased can be set to any 1 mm increment between 0 and 50 mm The area that will be erased as the top border is shown as a the bottom border is shown as 6 the left border as and the right border as in the illustration Inch specifications Paper size Set Ready to copy ieee Select 2
268. he original contains a mixture of both text and photographs Photo mode Touch the Photo key until it is highlighted Select this mode to bring out the depth in photographs Text mode Touch the Text key until it is highlighted Select this mode especially to reproduce originals written in pencil of which contain thin lines NOTES e It is possible for you to change the image quality mode that will be the default setting in the initial mode See Original quality onpage 7 65 e It is also possible for you to adjust the copy exposure in each of the image quality modes See Manual exposure adjustment text photo mode on page 7 75 Manual exposure adjustment text mode on page 7 76 and Manual exposure adjustment photo mode on page 7 77 section 4 BASIC OPERATION Paper Size pty 11x8 Paper Size HA4 D 100 Metric specifications 7 Setting the number of copies to be made Use the keypad to change the number of copies to be made that is displayed on the touch panel to the actual number that you want to make Up to 999 copies can be made at one time NOTE It is possible for you to limit the number of copies or copy sets that can be made at a time See Copy limit on page 7 82 8 Start copying Press the Start key Once the lamp in the Start key is lit green and Ready to copy is displayed copying is possible Inch specifications Now copying
269. he originals touch Metric specifications 6 i the Scanning finished key Copying will start aa ee j i Function 5 47 section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS 22 Saving on toner use Eco print mode With this mode you can reduce the amount of toner that is used to 4 Touch the Eco Print key The Eco Print screen will be make the copies displayed Use this mode with for example making test copies when you do not especially need to print out high quality copies You can also make the eco print mode the default setting in the initial mode See Eco F Reacy to copy or ea oe print mode ON OFF on page 7 66 Lons Images will be printed out relatively lighter than normal Seen _ ea Inch specifications With the eco print With the eco print mode turned OFF mode turned ON Metric specifications FF Ready to copy aao Modify co eo oe Set the originals to be copied 5 Touch the Off key or the On key as appropriate 2 Touch the Function tab The content of the Function tab Inch specifications will be displayed F Ready to copy a aes 3 Touch the W Down key The content of the next portion of H Eco Print the Function tab will be displayed Ben BOUE MImage is light Eco print is saving toner consumption and it is economically Metric specifications Ready to copy e 100 Eco Print Toner consumption
270. heck gt Machine Document Register Print User default Management Pj orig size s report Adjustment By 2 Select Default margin width in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the Change key The Default margin width screen will be displayed Inch specifications Default setting Counter Default menu Setting mode Sort Sort On Offset Off Auto Rotation Rotate v Default margin width Left 1 4 0 Default erase width Border 1 4 Center 1 2 Preset limit 999 Set Change y Default setting Metric specifications Default setting Counter Default menu Setting mode A up y Down Auto Rotation Rotate Default margin width Left 6mm Omm Default erase width Border 6mm Center 12mm Preset limit 999 Set Change y Sort Sort On Group Off La l Default setting 7 80 3 Touch the lt q key or the B key and the A key or the Y key as desired to change the default margins and margin widths to the desired setting Inch specifications Adjust default setting of margin width Front page Adjust default setting of margin width Front page l Default setting Copy default NOTE If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it touch the Back key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 4 Touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the screen in step
271. her tray Finisher main tray Finisher sub tray Inner tray Job separator Finisher tray Finisher main tray Finisher sub tray Mailbox 1 Copy mode FAX mode Default setting Touch panel sound ON OFF Silent mode ON OFF Day amp time Time difference Changing the management code Auto sleep ON OFF Changing the energy saving mode Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Description Available Factory Reference settings setting page Sets whether or not the touch panel will emit a beep On Off sound each time a key is touched The copier can be switched to a silent mode which On Off shortens the length of time that the laser data writing motor continues to spin after each copy job is finished Turn the silent mode ON if the noise of the motor bothers you in any way Year 2001 2049 Month 1 12 Day 1 31 Time 00 00 23 59 Year 2001 1 54 Month 01 Day 01 Time 00 00 Sets the current date and time Sets the time difference from the world standard time 12 00 12 00 GMT Changes the management code that is used by the copy 0000 9999 manager IMPORTANT If you change the management code from its factory default be sure to keep some sort of record of the new management code If for any reason you forget the registered management code you will need to contact your service representative 30 cpm copiers 7 56 3000 40 cpm copiers 4000 50 cpm copiers
272. i g 5 f Select On when using custom size or changing paper type See 2 Accessing the machine default settings on page 7 41 Inch specifications Default setting Counter Display and check bypass setting mode when selecting Select On when using custom size or changing paper type Bypass BOX Counter i setting j Management check E Machine Document Register Print User i default Management Pj orig size s report Adjustment py Metric specifications Default setting Counter Bypass Hard Disk Counter setting Management Bj check gt Machine Document Register Print User default j Management Pj orig size gt report j Adjustment By NOTE If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it touch the Back key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 Touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the 2 Select Check bypass sizing in the settings list on the left 4 screen in step 2 side of the touch panel and then touch the Change key The Check bypass sizing screen will be displayed Inch specifications l 5 Touch the Close key once again The touch panel will return Default setting Counter to the Default setting screen Default menu Setting mode p 6 Touch the End key The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab Paper type 1st drawer Plain La Paper type 2nd draw
273. ide of both the front and back covers to be copied onto or to have either or both of them left completely blank Select also whether or not you even want to include a back cover at all a cc o o 2 sided copy Duplex Copy The illustrations above show the result when sets of 2 sided copies are being made If you are making sets of 1 sided copies copying will not be performed on the rear side of the covers even if the 2 sided copy Duplex Copy or Back copy settings are selected 5 31 section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS 1 Set the originals to be copied 5 Select the desired settings for the front cover Inch specifications Paper size Set Touch the Function tab The content of the Function tab F Ready to copy eae will be displayed Front cover Touch the Cover Mode key The Cover Mode screen will be diw Inch specifications Ready to copy e o 100 Select 2 sided Select Combi paper Separation orig size 5 Omne 5 Exposure Reduce Auto Batch mode gt Enlarge Selection j scanning Paper size Set WAdD 100 Orig image Margin Page Forms quality Centering Overlay i Sort Border Cover h Function Metric specifications Ready to copy Senne 100 Select 2 sided Select eco j u j i Er oe 6 Touch the Cover key or the No cover key as appropriate eas to select whether or not you want to include a back cover TTR alee oo If you select
274. ided Separation 2 sided Split key The 2 sided Separation 2 sided Split screen will be displayed Inch specifications 100 E Ready to copy E Combine Batch scanning Orig image Margin Forms i Sort Border Cover User choice Function Program Metric specifications FF Ready to copy ancl soa Se 100 Merge copy Large of originals l Image Margin Form q qualit Imag shift Ate overla l Sort ers Cover Function If you are copying from 2 sided originals touch the 2 sided 2 sided 2 sided 2 sided key If you are copying from open faced originals touch the Book 2 sided Book gt 2 sided key If you are copying from 1 sided originals touch the 1 sided 2 sided 1 sided gt 2 sided key If you selected 2 sided 2 sided 2 sided 2 sided or Book 2 sided Book 2 sided go to the next step If you selected 1 sided 2 sided 1 sided 2 sided go directly to step 5 Inch specifications Ready to copy i o Able to copy 1 sided separate or 2 sided copy using 1 sided original Book original or 2 sided original AE B22 sided 2 sided 4 i 22 sided Book Book gt 1 sided gt 2 sided Metric specifications Ready to copy aao Able to copy 1 sided separate or 2 sided copy using 1 sided original book original or 2 sided orig
275. iecdcetecssdciuesbecdceteuen nn Gadiveisetiesereiess 2 1 O OP TIONAL EQUIPMEN scescsscecesstssseceiesceecceecenestecatenstuseneatennocesent 8 1 Original quality copy default setting cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 65 Orginal SEU direti sisri ien N S ARAE 5 49 Original Size registration wsiscovinnsesericisertisnsinduhaeaaianarteneatiandiscatiweanns 7 90 Orginal SIZE SCISCHON sassarese EARS 5 34 Originals that can be used with the Document Processor 8 1 Output Management FUNCTIONS ccccccecccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeess 6 20 Pp Page separation Split copy modes ssssrerrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrreerns 5 4 PD Fe ee E E A A 8 5 Paper selection copy default setting s sssernrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrnn 7 68 Paper size drawer cassette No 1 No 4 machine default setting 0 nnnnnnnnnnn0000nnnnnnnnnenennennnnrnnenneenennenne 7 43 Paper type auto paper selection mode copy default setting 7 69 Paper type drawer cassette No 1 No 4 Machine default setting ccccccceceeecesesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseseaneaeeeeeeeees 7 44 PRoto MOOG epi sensed ce a A 4 3 Precautions for the use of Document Processor ceeee 8 1 PRECAUTIONS FOR USE sos ccevecdtccecenvetncssoveevesseceatieosvesesvevecqsuece 1 3 Preset Zoomi MOOG asseisissicisokiidinrr Arines Eaka NOANA SRN ARTA E 4 7 Print page numbers Mode snssinieicsnaenincansrinranasivansnaeecansuaeasawsnaiavec
276. ification Paper misfeed X Careful for Drum Paper misfeed X Careful for Drum 1 Open left covert i 1 Open left cover1 2 Remove paper amp 2 Remove paper 3 Close cover f l SS 3 Close cover 1 Cautions 2 Removal procedures G Misfeed in paper feed section A Wi N N G e Misfeed in drawer cassette JAM 10 to 13 15 to 17 If the message below appears a misfeed has occurred in the High voltage is present in the charger section Take drawer cassette or optional Paper Feeder Remove the misfed sufficient care when working in this area as there is paper using the procedure given below a danger of electrical shock aa Inch specifications Paper misfeed 1 Open cassette1 2 Remove paper 3 Set cassette A CAUTION The copier s fixing unit is extremely hot Take sufficient care when working in this area as there is a danger of getting burned Metric specifications Paper misfeed e Do not reuse misfed paper i 1 Open cassette1 e If paper is torn during removal be sure to remove all loose scraps 2 Remove paper from inside the copier or they could cause misfeed later A Sa e After misfed paper has been removed warm up will begin The Misfeed indicator will turn off and the copier will return to the same settings prior to the misfeed 1 Open the drawer cassette 9 4 2 Remove the misfed paper while taking care not to tear it If the paper should be torn
277. ift screen will be displayed Inch specifications Ready to copy vee A l Select 2 sided Select Combi q paper gt Separation gt orig size Omane i l Exposure Reduce Auto Batch q mode gt Enlarae Selection scanning 100 Booklet l Orig image Margin Forms l Sort Border Cover Finished Erase Mode Function Progra Metric specifications Ready to copy aap 1003 Select 2 sided Select l Exposure Reduce Auto Large of q mode Enlarge l selection originals j l Image Margin Page Form q qualit Imag shift f numbering j overla l Sort Erase 4 Finished Mode Cover Function Touch the Margin key The screen to set the front side margin will be displayed Inch specifications Paper size Set Ready to copy LY 11x8 Reposition image to left right or top bottom and also center image on paper Paper size Set WAAD 10036 Reposition image to left right or top bottom and center image on paper 5 Use the up down and left right cursor keys to select the desired location and width of each margin Inch specifications Paper size Set Check direction of original top side Paper size WALD Check direction Check direction of original Auto Back page H Left top Q 6 If you are making 2 sided copies touch the Back page margin key The Back page margin screen will be displayed Inch specifications Paper size Set F Ready to copy L
278. iginals in the optional Document Processor copying will start automatically If you set an original on the platen a message will appear telling you to set the next original In this case go to the next step 8 Replace the first original with the next one and press the Start key Scanning of that next original will start Once you have finished scanning all of the originals touch the Scanning finished key Copying will start section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS 2 Copying two page originals onto separate sheets Page separation Split copy modes 1 Page separation Split copy from book originals 1 Set the originals to be copied With this mode the two facing pages of an open faced original such as a book a magazine and the like are each copied onto a separate sheet of paper 2 Touch the Function tab The content of the Function tab will be displayed NOTES 3 Touch the 2 sided Separation 2 sided Split key Inch specifications The 2 sided Separation 2 sided Split screen will be e Only 8 1 2 x 11 11 x 17 A5R B5R A4R B4 and A3 size displayed originals and 11 x 8 1 2 size copy paper can be used in this mode a Depending upon the size of the originals the image will be enlarged Inch specifications or reduced to fit the size of the copy paper F Ready to copy Metric specifications cones y e Only A5R BSR A4R B4 A3 8 1 72 x 11 and 11 x
279. imit Output limitation No limit Scanner limitation No limit Fax Transm Limitation No limit l Default setting Management Management edit Metric specifications 1st Sales Dept Setting item i Printer limitation No limit Output limitation No limit Scanner limitation No limit Fax Transm Limitation No limit A mA CF l Default setting Management Management edit i l Default setting Management Management edit i 1 Touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 Inch specifications Department 01 1st Sales Dept 02 2nd Sales Dept 0001 3rd Sales Dept 0007 1st Sales Dept 0014 4th Sales Dept 00000015 5th Sales Dept 00000016 6th Sales Dept Order of indication s Mgt Inf correction 5 peee Up 2nd Sales Dept 3rd Sales Dept 1st Sales Dept 4th Sales Dept 5th Sales Dept 6th Sales Dept 00000015 00000016 001 011 NOTE Limit in use If you want to register an ID code for a new department touch the Register key and repeat steps 4 through 12 1 3 Touch the Close key Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Setting the restrictions for use Perform the following procedure when you want to set certain restrictions for using the copier under each department ID code The setting items available for restriction will differ depending upon whether you have selected All or Each as the Copy Printer output
280. inal Specify the binding direction of the originals Inch specifications lt for 2 sided originals gt fl Register Metric specifications lt for 2 sided originals gt A Register Select the binding direction you want for the finished copies Inch specifications lt for 1 sided or 2 sided originals gt Original Metric specifications lt for 1 sided or 2 sided originals gt lt for open faced originals gt sided 2 sided P sided 2 sided lt for open faced originals gt Open from left lt for open faced originals gt Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS 6 Follow the instructions on the right side of the touch panel and verify the direction in which the originals were set IMPORTANT If the designation for the direction that the originals are set is not correct copying may be accomplished incorrectly Inch specifications lt for 1 sided or 2 sided originals gt lt for open faced originals gt Paper size Paper size LY 41x87 1 Finished Check direction Check direction Fant Set book original top neck dieelioniot side direction to back Metric specifications lt for 1 sided or 2 sided originals gt lt for open faced originals gt Paper size ectia Finished Check Check direction of Set book original top original Eis EE side direction to back Left Right _binding T7 Press the Start key Scanning of the originals will start If you set the or
281. ine merge copy modes or the memo mode 24 The cover mode cannot be used in combination with original size selection input size 25 The cover mode cannot be used in combination with the combine merge copy modes or the memo mode 26 The cover mode and the invert mode cannot be used in combination with each other 27 The function selected second will be given priority and the function selected first will be canceled 28 The transparency backing sheet mode and the invert mode cannot be used in combination with each other 29 The transparency backing sheet mode cannot be used in combination with original size selection input size 30 The transparency backing sheet mode cannot be used in combination with the sort finished mode the staple mode or the punch mode 31 The selected paper setting will be canceled in order to switch to the auto paper selection mode 32 The combine merge copy modes and the memo mode cannot be used in combination with original size selection input size 33 Cannot be used in combination with the batch scanning mode 34 Cannot be used in combination with interrupt copying 35 Not available in combination with the form overlay mode 6 Image quality OCR 4 Form overlay mode Cover mode OJOJOJOJO OOO OO 8 O ololofolo 8 O
282. ing Copy d Metric specifications Select default mode of original quality NOTE If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it touch the Back key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 4 Touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 5 Touch the Close key once again The touch panel will return to the Default setting screen 6 Touch the End key The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab 7 65 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Eco print mode ON OFF Perform the following procedure to determine whether or not the eco print mode will be the default setting in the initial mode 1 Display the Copy default screen See 5 Accessing the copy default settings on page 7 62 Inch specifications Default setting Counter Za ronn Bypass BOX Counter i setting Management Bj check j f Machine Document Register Print User default Management Dj orig size report j Adjustment py Metric specifications Default setting Counter a Bypass Hard Disk Counter setting Management check j i Machine Document Register Print User default Management Pj orig size s report Adjustment By 2 Select Eco Print in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the Change key The Eco Print screen will be displayed Inch s
283. io See page 4 6 4 100 same size key Touch this key when you want to copy the original image at its actual size 100 43 Sort OFF key Touch this key when you want to make copies without sorting them Sort ON key Touch this key when you want to make copies in the sort mode 45 Sort Finish key Touch this key when you want to access the Sort Finish screen See page 5 29 Registration keys Touch the appropriate key when you want to access the corresponding function or mode Any function or mode in the Function tab can be registered to be displayed as one of the registration key See page 5 53 47 Basic tab Touch this tab when you want to return the display to the contents of the Basic tab 2 6 User choice tab Touch this tab when you want to display the contents of the User choice tab Inch specifications l Hs j 5 Y ttt q i 2 sided Select Orig image i Border i Separation P orig size quality j i Erase j User choice Metric specifications l Merge copy pi User choice Function tab Touch this tab when you want to display the contents of the Function tab Inch specifications Ready to copy ieee a wn y Select 2 sided Select Corbi q paper Separation orig size omane l Exposure Reduce Auto Batch q mode Enlarge 4 Selection scanning j l Orig image Margin Forms a ove
284. ion 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Touch the Management Def Set key Copier function management ON OFF The Managem Def Set screen will be displayed Perform the following procedure when you want to turn copy Inch specifications management ON or OFF for the copier functions of this machine 1 Select Copy management under the Setting item column i on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the Managem Total Register Sett Management Change key The Copy management screen will be displayed Management Each Mgt Management Management total Total gt edit gt Def Set A Inch specifications Default setting Value Metric specifications Print Managem Printer error report Others Mgt Reg print Copy Printer output mgt Scanner Managem Fax Management Close Managem Total Register Sett Management Default setting Management Managem Def set Management Each Mot Management Management total S Total 5 edit 5 Def Set i M etric specificati ons Default setting Setting item Value Print managem 3 Select the default setting that you want to change and then WET touch the Change key EcarerManagem change p Fax Management Inch specifications Default setting Management Managem Def set som ae 2 To turn copy management ON for the copier functions of this Print Managem machine touch the On ke
285. ion message appears touch the Yes key Inch specifications The count value of this ID code will be deleted Are you sure Metric specifications The count value of this ID code will be deleted Are you sure Touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 3 Touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 Touch the Close key 5 Turning the copy management function ON OFF Perform the following procedure when you want to turn copy management ON or OFF 1 Access the copy management menu screen See 2 Accessing the copy management menu screen on page 7 3 Inch specifications Default setting Counter efault setting Bypass BUX Counter setting p Management check Machine Document Register Print User default Management orig size s report Adjustment Metric specifications Default setting Counter Bypass Hard DISK Counter setting Management check Machine Document Register Print User default Management orig size gt report j Adjustment 2 To turn copy management ON touch the On key To turn copy management OFF touch the Off key Inch specifications Managem Total Register Sett Management Each Mot Management Management total i Total j edit ji Def Set S l Default setting Metric specifications Managem Total Register Sett Management Each Mot total j Total j Management Man
286. ions Place originals in Document processor Paper size ist pg orig Off u Able to scan mix size originals at l Auto 8 2x14 one time using Document processor F X i f l 11x17 and copy them in unified paper size l Electronic ling Metric specifications Place originals in Document processor Panar T Set the originals to be copied in the Document Processor 1st original 2 Press the Auto Selection key Off Fp LBS Able to scan different size originals at The lamp in the Auto Selection key will light and the auto ASTB4L and copy them fo unified paper size selection filing mode screen will be displayed _ han soni SaaS a NOTE O In order to have the binding direction set properly for stapling or hole punching etc finished copies be sure to specify the size of the very G 2 first original being copied 5 Select the desired drawer cassette Inch specifications Ready to copy irks Set 3 Touch the Auto selection key or the Electronic Filing key ae as appropriate If you selected Auto selection go directly to step 6 ave oa T a re eG d a 11x8 x nia 5 E Exposure If you selected Electronic Filing go to the next step Inch specifications Metric specifications Ready to copy Ready to copy in Able to copy mix size originals at 3 A one time using Document processor q uto B Bypass Ge Plain
287. is cnceiccusnensasivewadeeaccnnpecneeidiuadiriavadcns 8 5 Copying in the Staple mode xsieccsssecsecense ces sepsaassevceneieteesedsexhendeenetess 8 7 Cover drawer cassette copy default setting eees 7 71 Cover MOQE eo stayetece has ecreansoteo inant snesadiandseconaessseceesandesison eee oseaenanaeceres 5 31 Custom paper type for 2 sided copying machine default setting ccccccceecessesesseeseeeeeeeeeeeseaeaaaseeeeeeees 7 46 Customize screen layout Add functions copy default setting 7 86 Customize screen layout Main functions copy default setting 7 85 D Day amp time machine default Setting seeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 54 Default drawer cassette copy default Setting eee 7 70 Default magnification ratio copy default Setting eee 7 72 Default operation mode machine default Setting cee 7 51 DST AUN SOMOS seroraren i ieee cates tence aes el eaters 7 38 Delete department ID COdES seseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 16 Deleting a registered program ccccceeeceeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeanaaes 5 52 Deleting a registration key sacncersvaensiserseicsnosnsnsnunesauntzsiiatrentsxecbaseus 5 55 Document Finisher siccccisicdacciietnctwctenanwencevietncew eueunsencdvbevkeseveayens 8 5 8 9 Document management functions ssssssseeeeenesenennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnn 6 1 DOCUMENT PIOCESSOF sarren et 8 1 BOCU y ae r ci
288. is copier 1 Display the Copy default screen See 5 Accessing the copy default settings on page 7 62 Inch specifications Default setting Counter Copy default Language Bypass BOX Counter i setting Management Bj check j f Machine Document Register Print User i default Management Pj orig size s report Adjustment pj Metric specifications Default setting Counter Bypass Hard Disk Counter setting Management Bj check gt Machine Document Register Print User default Management Pj orig size gt report j Adjustment By 2 Select Adjust auto exposure OCR in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the Change key The Adjust auto exposure OCR screen will be displayed Inch specifications Default setting Counter Default menu Setting mode Adjust auto exposure Standard Adjust auto exposure OCR Standard Adj manual expo Mixed Standard Adj manual expo Text Standard Adj manual expo Photo Standard Default setting Metric specifications Default setting Counter Default menu i Setting mode Adjust auto exposure OCR Standard Adj manual expo Mixed Standard Adj manual expo Text Standard Adj manual expo Photo Standard l Default setting 7 74 3 Touch the Lighter key or the Darker key as appropriate to move the cursor on the exposure scale and adjust the ex
289. is warranty on behalf of Kyocera Mita 7 THIS WARRANTY IS MADE IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS EXPRESS OR IMPLIED AND KYOCERA MITA SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE THIS WARRANTY SHALL NOT EXTEND TO AND KYOCERA MITA SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTAL DAMAGES WHICH MAY ARISE OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE COPIER KYOCERA MITA AMERICA INC KYOCERA MITA CANADA LTD 225 Sand Road 6120 Kestrel Road Fairfield New Jersey Mississauga Ontario L5T 1S8 07004 0008 USA Canada WARNING This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna Increase the
290. isk is NOT installed Check print Change the Interrupt Cancel Delete Check job status print order printing contents force print sn aja When the optional Hard Disk IS installed Check print Change the Interrupt Cancel Delete Check job status print order printing contents force print 1 Print or fax jobs will automatically be moved to a position immediately after the job currently being printed It is not possible to move copy jobs ahead of print and fax jobs 2 Display of the output management functions Press the Job Queue key The Print status screen will be displayed Inch specifications Job Input source Original i i State 123 Q Copy 100 100 10 10 23 00 Printing 124 Printer Waiting 127 p Fax Waiting ZN fee ee 5 10 10 23 00 a O Beien LD soo aueue V E Repeat Copy C E vob Burd 10 10 23 50 Input source Original Registration State Copy 100 100 10 10 23 00 Printing Printer Waiting Waiting Copy 5 10 10 23 00 Waiting aa ECHR a ET o Rev l F aa ECHR a ET o 13 _Prntstatus__f 10 10 23 50 6 21 Section 6 DOCUMENT AND OUTPUT MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS 3 The Print status screen This screen displays the currently set printing conditions and the job queue of documents waiting to be printed Inch specifications Input source Original Set Registration State Copy 100 100 10 10 23 00 Printing Printer Waiting Waiting 5 10 10 23 00 Waiting
291. it back in all the way The drawer cassette currently in use is out of order and cannot be used Contact your service representative immediately Continue copying using another drawer cassette No paper that can be used in the selected mode is loaded Check the paper The orientation of the original and the selected paper are different Change the orientation of the original If the Start key is pressed same size copying will be performed The number of copies reached the limit set in the copy management mode and no more copies can be made Clear the copy count from the management mode There is not enough toner in the copier Replace the toner container immediately as only one copy can be made at a time There is not enough toner in the copier to make copies Replace the toner container immediately A system error has occurred Turn the power switch OFF and then ON A system error has occurred Disconnect the power plug from the outlet and connect it again If the optional Fax Kit is installed in your copier when the power cord is unplugged from the outlet original data or reserved communication information stored in the memory may be lost 9 1 section 9 TROUBLESHOOTING Message Call service Time for maintenance Close Document processor cover Memory full Paper misfeed Paper misfeed Careful for Drum Duplex tray inoperable call service Duplex uni
292. key The message display returns to the Function screen Set the originals to be copied Press the Start key Scanning of the originals will start The number of scanned originals will be displayed Repeat this operation for all originals when using the platen After all the originals have been scanned touch the Scanning finished key Copying will begin and finished copies will be ejected face down onto the tray with each full set shifted slightly from the previous one Remove all of the finished copies from the tray H Left top i Corner 4 H Left top l H corner Copying in the Sort OFF mode This mode automatically groups copies made from multiple originals with all the copies produced from an individual original stacked together in one set 1 oO Oo A QO Touch the Sort Finished key The Sort Finished screen will appear Inch specifications Paper size Ready to copy LY 11x81 1003 Select 2 sided Select paper gt Separation gt orig size Exposure Reduce Auto Batch mode Enlarge 4 Selection 4 scanning j Orig image Margin Forms quality Page Overlay Sort Border Cover U Function Program Combine Basic Paper size WAAD 100 Select 2 sided Select Exposure Reduce Auto Large of mode Enlarge selection originals Image Margin Page Form quality Imag shift Dj numbering pj overla Sort Erase Cover Function Program
293. klets from book originals Book to Booklet Mode ccccccecccecesessseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaneneeees 5 26 12 Automatic sorting of copy sets without the Document Finisher Sort Finished mode sesccscsraccsnancndencbaiesiedceeieedenmnscasecuatendes 5 29 t AWO Totan UNCION cece cece cca sees eee teres 5 30 14 Adding a front and or back cover to your copy sets ISOVEr MODE acies E teat AEE AAR 5 31 15 Original size selection mode ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeneees 5 34 16 Feeding paper as a backing sheet for OHP transparencies Transparency backing sheet mode eee 5 36 17 Inverting black and white Invert Mode 0 eseeeeeeeees 5 38 18 Making mirror image copies Mirror image mode 5 39 19 Making a test copy prior to large volume copying PPOOT mode sassinoro AER RETR 5 40 20 Making more of the same copies after a copy job is finished Repeat copy mode sensincossnsecercrravenundenansniavessrunamianahenutanlaienon 5 42 1 Registering a copy job for repeat Copying 5 42 2 Printing out with the repeat copy mode ns 5 43 21 Copying a large volume of originals in one operation Batch scanning mode casio seesapeseaencasuedosedenxedeatacieccescnedesueeest 5 47 22 Saving on toner use Eco print Mode ccccceeeeeeeeeeeees 5 48 23 Orginal set CIRECHION sz 25cecectcnaccaccetoassnecetenaicacectensotnctaneneesete 5 49 24 Memorizing frequently us
294. l be displayed Inch specifications 1st Sales Dept Setting item Printer limitation Output limitation No limit Scanner limitation No limit Fax Transm Limitation No limit C hange l Default Metric specifications ist Sales Dept Setting item Value l Copy limitation On q Printer limitation On Output limitation No limit Scanner limitation No limit Fax Transm Limitation No limit l Default setting Management Management edit Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS 3 To allow printing privileges for this ID code touch the Can use key To cancel printing privileges completely touch the Is not permitted key Inch specifications Can use permitted l Management Management edit New register f Metric specifications Printer limitatio Can use permited l Management Management edit New register i NOTE If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it touch the Back key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 Touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Output limitation 2 Select Output limitation under the Setting item column on Perform the following procedure when you want to set the maximum the left side of the touch panel and then touch the Change number of copies and printouts that can be made under the key oo cor
295. l be displayed Margin Centering ___ Z Register a orlainal igp sides 3 Touch the Margin Centering Margin Imag shift key The ae if Margin Centering Margin Image shift screen will be Mech An ascent aan Mee aIND GR 7 displayed Inch specifications Paper size Set Paper size Ready to copy Li nev Select 2 sided Select Combi paper j Separation j orig size i omame Exposure Reduce Auto Batch mode Enlarae Selection scanning Check direction of original Orig image Margin Forms Sort Border Cover i Erase Moge n __ Function _ Metric specifications Paper size Se IMPORTANT REEONA CKO 9 AAD aa If the designation for the direction that the originals are set is not Select 2 sided Select Ear correct copying may be accomplished incorrectly i l Margin Pag imagen Finished Mode Mode E 6 Press the Start key Function Program r Copying will start section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS 5 Adding a space next to the copy images for making notes Memo mode With this mode you can leave a space for adding notes next to the 1 copied image It is also possible to fit the images of 2 originals onto the same copy page along with a blank space for each 2 Copying one original onto one copy page layout A NOTE Only 8 1 2 x 11 11 x 8 1 2 11 x 17 B5R B5 A4R A4 B4 and A3 size copy paper can be used in this mode Set the originals to
296. l go and then push it back into the copier to a point just BEFORE the roller 1 0 Push the electrostatic section with the blue handle to the touches the white pad of the grid cleaner right and then pull it out about 2 inches 5 cm Repeat this step a few times ZA SN IMPORTANT DO NOT push the electrostatic section all the way back into the copier in this step as that may result in problems appearing in the printed images 1 4 With the electrostatic section pulled out about 2 inches 5 cm remove the grid cleaner and then push the electrostatic section all the way back into the copier 1 2 Attach the grid cleaner to the machine body aligning with the notches 10 5 Section 10 MAINTENANCE AND OPERATION INFORMATION 1 6 Gently pull out the cleaning shaft with the green handle as far as it will go and then push it back into the copier Repeat this step a few times IMPORTANT Do not pull the cleaning shaft with force or pull it out completely 1 7 Remove the blue cleaning brush 1 9 Clean the separator by moving the cleaning brush from left and right several times along the separator as shown in the illustration 20 Once the cleaning operation is completed return the cleaning brush to the copier and close both the left cover 1 and the front cover IMPORTANT Wait about 5 minutes after the cleaning operation is completed for the electrostatic section to dry before attempting to start c
297. l will return to the screen in step 4 If you want to check the information for other stored documents repeat steps 4 through 6 T7 Touch the End key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 Touch the End key The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab Section 6 DOCUMENT AND OUTPUT MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS 5 Deleting stored documents from a box Perform the following procedure when you want to delete stored documents 1 Press the Document Management key The Document Management screen will be displayed qro Iammo al Manager gt Job Queue 2 Touch the Box Editing key under Synergy Print Box The screen to select the synergy print box will be displayed Inch specifications Select function 25 10 19 20 Shared Data Box Synergy Print Box Form box BBE saisai AAA Document Document Document Document Form reg j printing reg printing reg Box Editin Box Box Editing Editing gt Metric specifications Shared Data Box Synergy Print Box Form box arsaa AAA i Document Document Document Document Form registr 5 printing 5 registr oD printing 5 registr Box Box Box q Editing Editin Editing gt 3 Either touch the synergy print box that contains the documents to be deleted or enter its number using the keypad Then touch the Enter key The Box editing screen will be displayed
298. l will return to the screen in step 3 Touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 3 Touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 Touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the Default setting screen Touch the End key The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab O N 0 7 46 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Special paper action setting When copying onto prepunched preprinted or letterhead paper and performing both 1 sided copying and 2 sided copying from the same drawer cassette the positioning of the holes in relation to the copied image may be different for each copy or the front and rear images of 2 sided copies may be copied onto the opposites sides of the paper If you select Adj print Direction both 1 sided and 2 sided copies will be created with the same orientation 1 Display the Machine default screen See 2 Accessing the machine default settings on page 7 41 Inch specifications Default setting Counter Bypass BOX Counter i setting j Management Bj check j f Machine Document Register Print User i default Management Pj orig size report Adjustment py Metric specifications Default setting Counter Bypass Hard Disk Counter setting Management Pj check j i Machine Document Register Print User default j Management Pj orig size s repo
299. last setting or when copying is done Z Bypass BOX Counter setting Management Bj check s Machine Document Register Print User default Management orig size s report Adjustment py Metric specifications NOTES Co y A Sout e If auto sleep interferes with your copying operations turn this 4 function OFF However it is recommended that you try to set a Machine Bocument y Register a longer time interval until auto sleep engages before you actually turn it OFF e If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it touch the Back key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 2 Select Auto sleep in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the Change key The Auto sleep screen will be displayed Inch specifications 4 Touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 Default setting Counter Default menu i Setting mode Date Time 2001 10 30 14 02 Time difference GMT 08 00 Management code change Auto sleep E Energy Saver key settin Low power mod Change y i ji a ad 6 Touch the End key The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab 5 Touch the Close key once again The touch panel will return to the Default setting screen Metric specifications Default setting Counter Clo Default menu i Setting mode Date Time 30 1
300. lect Corbin i paper j Separation gt orig size j i l Exposure Reduce Auto Batch q mode Enlarge Selection j scannin 100 Orig image Margin ae Sor Border Cover l ET Mode Booklet i HAAD io d Select 2 sided Select i Metric specifications l Exposure Reduce Auto Large of q mode i Enlarge A selection originals l Image Margin Page Form q quality gt Imag shift gt numbering gt overla 5 l Erase Cover 4 Function Program 5 53 section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS 9 5 54 Touch the registration key under which you want to register the function Register this selecting mode OK will be displayed Inch specifications Select the number of program to registered l 1 No 4 Al registrat l 2 No dq a registrat i a registrat Metric specifications Select the number of program to reg No J A registrat 2 No 7 Z registrat J Z registrat Touch the Yes key The Combine Merge copy screen will be displayed again Inch specifications Register this function Register No 1 Register this selecting mode OK Metric specifications Register this function Register No 1 Register this selecting mode OK NOTE If in the screen to register functions and or modes under registration keys you select a previously registered key the following screen will be displayed Inch specificatio
301. lection PaT High Plan ag Custom 1 Custom 5 Select paper type s for Auto Paper Selection ai Custom 1 Custom 5 t Plain H Colour Preprinted NOTES e It is possible to select the type of paper that has been designated for the drawer cassette currently in use e If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it touch the Back key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 4 Touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 5 Touch the Close key once again The touch panel will return to the Default setting screen 6 Touch the End key The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab 7 69 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Default drawer cassette Perform the following procedure to set one drawer cassette that will be selected automatically regardless of the size of paper loaded in that drawer cassette It is NOT possible to select the multi bypass tray as the default drawer cassette 4 7 70 Display the Copy default screen See 5 Accessing the copy default settings on page 7 62 Inch specifications Default setting Counter Z ronn Bypass BOX Counter setting Management p check Machine Document Register Print User i default Management Pj orig size s report Adjustment py Metric specifications Default s
302. ll return to the Default setting screen 6 Touch the End key The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab 7 15 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Manual exposure adjustment text mode Perform the following procedure to adjust the median exposure value when the text mode is selected for the image quality 1 Display the Copy default screen See 5 Accessing the copy default settings on page 7 62 Inch specifications Default setting Counter Copy default j rone y Bypass setting Machine Document Register default Management Pj orig size BOX Counter i Management Pj check j f Print User report 5 Adjustment py Metric specifications Default setting Counter Bypass Hard Disk Counter setting Management check gt Machine Document Register Print User default Management Pj orig size s report Adjustment By 2 Select Adj manual expo Text in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the Change key The Adj manual expo Text screen will be displayed Inch specifications Default setting Counter Default menu Setting mode Adjust auto exposure OCR Standard v Adj manual expo Mixed Standard Adj manual expo Text Standard Adj manual expo Photo Standard Change y Default setting Metric specifications Default setting Counter Default menu Setting m
303. ly touch the Is not permitted key and proceed to step 5 Inch specifications No imit limit i isnot permitted Metric specifications l No imit limit i Is not permited NOTE If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it touch the Back key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 4 Use the numeric keys on the keypad to enter the maximum number of copies that can be made under this ID code The copy limit can be set to any 1 page increment up to 999 999 Inch specifications 1 999 999 No limit Touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 7 14 Printing restrictions Perform the following procedure when the optional Printer Kit or Printer Scanner Kit is installed in your copier and you want to set the maximum number of printouts that can be made under the corresponding department ID code NOTE This setting will only be available when On is selected as the Printer function management ON OFF setting 1 Access the screen that contains the copy restriction setting items See Register new department ID codes on page 7 4 or Change restrictions for use on page 7 20 Inch specifications Close Department Order of i indication gt i Mgt Inf Limit correction 7 in use 01 1st Sales Dept 02 2nd Sales Dept 0001 3rd Sales Dept 0014 4th Sales Dept 00000015 5th Sales D
304. ly to the Function tab will be displayed step 7 9 42 section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS Touch the keys Keys key to highlight that key and 2 Printing out with the repeat copy mode then enter the security code that will enable repeat copying for these originals Once you press the Repeat Copy key the Modify copy list will be displayed so that you can verify the copy jobs that are registered for repeat copying It is possible to reprint check the contents of and F Ready to copy Fee 1 delete the copy jobs that are registered in this list Inch specifications 4 Reprinting a registered copy job When select On data can be saved 1 Press the Repeat Copy key The Modify copy list will be You can sai Ihe pasewardaseeuie displayed saved document OS w oO a A LLL 3 43 gt Job Queue i gt Repeat Copy Job Build Au a a Security When select On job can be saved You can recall and re print at anytime You can set a password to secure saved document NOTES 2 Select the copy job that you want to reprint and touch the e The security code can be between 1 and 8 digits long Reprint key e If you forget the security code that you enter here repeat copying will not be possible for these originals Be sure to keep some sort of Inch specifications record of the security code Job i Input source Original Set Registration Type
305. m d t Paper size eady to copy LM 11x814 Select 2 sided Select paper Separation p gt orig size j Exposure Reduce Auto Batch mode Enlarge Selection j scanning 100 Combine Forms S Overla 5 Booklet Orig image Margin Sort Border Cover Finished Erase Mode Inch specifications Paper size F Ready 0K00 0 V2 MAAD Select 2 sided Select Exposure Reduce Auto Large of mode A Enlarge selection originals Image Margin Page Form ualit Imag shift numbering H overla Cover __Function __ Sort Erase Finished Mode Metric specifications 6 Selecting the image quality The image quality is selected according to the type of original Touch the Function tab and then the resulting Orig image quality mage quality key that is displayed within that tab in order to access the Orig image quality Image quality orig screen Inch specifications P Si Ready to copy Ty axe 1006 Text tPhoto TexttPhoto Set this mode to copy orig l with mixed text and photo q Photo Add a dimensional effect of photo Text Copy a pencil or fine line Metric specifications _ Ready to copy WAAD Text Photo Text Photo Set this mode to copy original mixed text amp photo Photo Add a dimensional effect of photo Text Copy pencil amp fine line clearly Text photo mode Touch the Text Photo key until it is highlighted Select this mode when t
306. management functions 6 21 3 The Print status SCPC Mc ccccscsztcteoensesdentencacteaseosmeatecsees 6 22 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS 7 1 10 11 Copy management mode cccecccesseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaneaeaeeeeeeeeees 7 1 1 Copy management procedures ssassn 7 2 2 Accessing the copy management menu screen 7 3 3 Editing copy management information eee 7 4 4 Checking the copy management counts ce 7 21 5 Turning the copy management function ON OFF 7 25 6 Changing the copy management default settings 7 25 7 Making copies when copy management is turned ON 7 37 Default settings cccccccccecseseeeeeceaneeseeeeesaseaseeeesseaeaeeeeeeenans 7 38 1 Machine default settings 00 0 0 cceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaseneeees 7 38 2 Accessing the machine default settings cccc 7 41 3 Making machine default settings cccccsseseeeeeeeeeeees 7 42 4 Copy default settings ccccccccsssssseeeseeeeeeeeeeeseaseeeeees 7 59 5 Accessing the copy default settings eeeeeeee 7 62 6 Making copy default settings eeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 63 Multi bypass tray paper settings cseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaneneeees 7 87 1 Paper size And type cccccecccessseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeaeeeees 7 87 2 Selecting other Standard SIZES cccccccesseeeseeeeeee
307. multiple sets of originals and then have 4 Touch the On key them all copied at the same time Scan one set of originals of the same type and then register that as a single step in the copy job and you can copy an extremely large volume of originals in one batch a lik originals then press Start key Han a Inch specifications Copy scanned images off Platen as one job or scanned originals using document processor ale ic Set original Start ke Originals scanned through the platen and Document Processor can be Set the originals to be copied CE a 2 Touch the Function tab The content of the Function tab will herdisplayed 5 Press the Start key Scanning of the originals will start 3 Touch the Batch scanning Large of originals key The Continuous scanning Multiple scanning screen will be displayed eee as Stop Inch specifications Clear F Ready to copy ieee 100 Select 2 sided Select c bi i paper j Separation orig size AMDI l Exposure Reduce Auto Batch q mode Enlarge f Selection j scanning f l Orig image Margin Forms l Sort Border Cover q Finished Erase Mode Function Booklet Replace the first originals with the next set and press the Start key Scanning of those next originals the next step in F Ready to copy nao the copy job will start Large of 7 Once you have finished scanning all of t
308. n on page 7 3 Inch specifications Default setting Counter Co Bypass BOX Counter i setting Management check j f Machine Document Register Print User default Management Pj orig size report Adjustment py Metric specifications Default setting Counter Language E Copy i default gt Bypass Hard DISK Counter i setting Management check j f Machine Document Register Print User i default Management Pj orig size gt report Adjustment py Management 33 2 Touch the Management edit key The Management edit screen will be displayed Inch specifications Managem Total Register Sett Management Each Mot Management Management total j Total gt edit A Def Set gt l Default settin Metric specifications Managem Total Register Sett Management Each Mot total Total gt Management Management edit I Def Set Default settin 7 20 3 Select the department ID code for which you want to change the restrictions and then touch the Limit in use key The Limit in use screen will be displayed Inch specifications Department Up renee 2nd Sales Dept 3rd Sales Dept Mgt Inf Limit i correction 4 in use poes 4th Sales Dept 00000015 5th Sales Dept 00000016 6th Sales Dept 00000017 7th Sales Dept U Order of i P indication i 2nd Sales Dept Mgt Inf Limit 3rd Sales Dept correction 7 in use 4th Sales Dept
309. n 1 sided and 2 sided 1 With the content of the Basic tab displayed touch the 1 sided 2 sided key The 1 sided 2 sided screen will be displayed Inch specifications Fy Ready to Job build LU 11x8 1 sided 4 aidnd a Select Orig 1 sided paper gt type 2 sided at inal Offset AMS zoora Orig set direction joa ree Basic idad Dan 1 sided Select Original 1 sided paper A type j 2 sided Group AMS oe l aut Reduce Orig set NOTE The setting in regard to making either 1 sided or 2 sided copies can only be made in the first step of the job build mode and will apply to all steps in the copy job Touch the 1 sided key or the 2 sided key as appropriate and then select the binding direction you want for the finished copies Follow the instructions on the right side of the touch panel and verify the direction in which the originals were set Inch specifications Ready to Job build Cildiicu Check direction q apy Check direction of original top side Set original Press Start ke Fy Ready to Job build Check direction of original 1 2 sided Right Copy binding l To H Left top i ZEN EO IMPORTANT If the designation for the direction that the originals are set is not correct copying may be accomplished incorrectly section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS Touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the
310. n 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS keyboard Inch specifications Example Abcde 1 Touch the Capital key The Capital will be displayed Touch the A key on the keyboard Inch specifications 4 Once you have finished entering the information touch the End key Inch specifications 2 Touch the Letter key Inch specifications 7 106 Section 8 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT 1 Document Processor The Document Processor automatically feeds one sided originals one by one for scanning It also reverses two sided originals automatically for duplex copying and page separation copying Originals that can be used with the Document Processor e Sheet originals only e Original weights Single sided original of 35 g m to 160 g m two sided original of 50 g m to 120g g m e Original sizes 11 x 17 A3 maximum to 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 A5R minimum e Capacity 100 sheets 8 1 2 x 11 A4 and smaller 75 g m or 80 g m 70 sheets 8 1 2 x 14 Folio and larger 75 g m or 80 g m 30 sheets in auto selection mode 2 Precautions for the use of Document Processor Do not use any of the originals given below with the Document Processor Also do not set originals with punch holes or tear off strips positioned at the leading edge e Transparency films e Carbon paper and extremely creased or folded originals originals of sort material such as vinyl e Non square originals wet originals o
311. n the photo adjustment photo mode is selected for the image quality mode Sort Finished mode ON Determines whether or not the Sort and or the OFF Finished modes will be the default setting in the initial mode Auto Rotation mode Determines whether or not the Auto Rotation mode will be the default setting in the initial mode If Auto Rotation is turned ON the image will be automatically rotated even if the orientation of the Original is different from that of the paper loaded in the drawers cassettes Margin width Determines the default value of the location and width of the margins in the margin mode 7 60 Available settings Factory setting 1st paper Bypass 2nd paper 3rd paper 4th paper Bypass 3 3 Standard setting 0 3 3 Standard setting 0 3 3 Standard setting 0 3 3 Standard setting 0 _ Sort mode Sort mode On Off On Finished mode Finished mode Off On 1 set Output Off each page Rotate No Rotate Rotate Inch specification Inch 0 3 4 inches specification Metric specification Left 1 4 inches 0 18 mm Top 0 inches Metric specification Left 6 mm Top 0 mm Manual Reference 1 13 7 14 7 79 7 80 Default setting Erased border width Copy limit Repeat copying ON OFF Registration keys ON OFF Customize screen layout Main functions Customize screen layout Add functio
312. n to the screen in step 1 key and proceed to the next step If you do not want to specify a paper type proceed to step 7 Inch specifications NOTE You can check the copy counts for the paper sizes registered under Can set totals of paper size and type o a the Total size T through Total size 5 settings on the total size report COREEA papery that is printed together with the copy management report For 817x11 e information on how to print out a copy management report refer to Default setting Management Managem Def set Metric specifications Can set totals of paper size and type Paper size Paper type A4 With no Select specif Select size 5 ctu paper type p f Managem Def set 7 36 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS 7 Making copies when copy management is turned NOTES ON e If you enter the wrong D code touch the clear key and reenter the correct ID code e If an invalid unregistered department ID code is entered an error alarm will sound Enter the correct ID code e If you enter your department ID code and touch the Each Mgt IMPORTANT Total key you can check the copy counts for your own department When copy management is turned ON copying will only be possible when a valid department ID code is entered Once you are finished copying BE SURE to press the Management Inch specifications key so that the Enter ID code screen is displayed a
313. nal printer network kit and hard disk are also available 14 Fax Kit If the Fax Kit is installed this copier can be used as a fax Also if the Fax Kit is used together with the optional Printer Scanner Kit this copier can be used as a network fax allowing transmission and reception by a computer For details see the Operation Guide for the fax In some cases this function may not be used section9 TROUBLESHOOTING 1 If one of the following messages is displayed When any of the following messages appears on the message display take the indicated action Message Close xxx cover x Add paper in drawer Add paper in cassette Set drawer Close paper cassette Paper drawer is out of order Select another paper drawer Paper cassette is out of order Select other paper cassette Check paper size Reposition original Exceeds pre registered copying quantity Copy limit for this ID code has been reached No copying possible Ready to copy Add toner Add toner to resume copying System error Main switch off on System error Disconnect power plug from the socket Procedure Reference page The cover indicated is open Close the cover securely There is no paper in the drawer cassette indicated Load paper One of the drawers cassettes is not closed properly Pull it out and push
314. nat PP vi E Fax Kit Page 8 12 E Printer scanner Kit Page 8 12 E Printer Kit Page 8 12 vii Lore We have determined as a participating company in the International Energy Star Program that this product is compliant with the standards laid out in the International Energy Star Program About the International Energy Star Program International Energy Star Program has as its basic goals the promotion of efficient energy use and the reduction of the environmental pollution that accompanies energy consumption by promoting the manufacture and sale of products that fulfill program standards International Energy Star Program standards require that copies come equipped with a Low Power Mode where energy consumption is reduced after a certain amount of time elapses since the device was last used as well as an Off Mode where the device automatically turns itself off after there is no activity within a set amount of time When the copier includes printer and fax functions the printer and fax must enter a Low Power Mode where power consumption is automatically reduced after a certain amount of time elapses since they were last used and they must also support a Sleep Mode where power consumption is reduced to a minimum when there is no activity within a set amount of time This product is equipped with the following features as a result of its compliance with International Energy Star Program stan
315. nation with original size selection 15 The book g page separation split copy mode cannot be used in combination with the combine merge copy modes or the memo mode Q Image quality mode text amp photo 2 Image quality mode photo 3 Image quality mode text Ca oO 4 Copy exposure mode auto exposure Copy exposure mode manual exposure O O OGOGO CO GaGa G Ol Ol olololol O Eco print mode OJO OJO O O OJO O O OOO Original size selection standard size GIGIO MAAA KIOO Original size selection input size 9 Original size selection auto selection Original size selection custom original size A Same size 100 1 1 copying OJOJOJOJOJO O OJO Pek OJOJOJOJOJO O a slo s s olololololo e PERE es NO 2 XY zoom mode 3 Auto magnification selection mode ojo Aih pan ep O o oO o OIIO NIN PEE Zoom mode O oa 45 Paper selection OJOJO O O OJOJO O O Sere O OJOJO O O Pelosi O OGO ow ORIO OJO O O Original set direction a Batch scanning mode Auto rotation function Popoh Epp Ep OJOJOJOJO O O OJO O OJOJOJOJO O O HO O ow OJO OKJ OJO O o O ow _ NO if OJOJOJOJOJO JO IO JOlOlOlOsfOjOjO N I OIO C Auto selection filing mode filing 21 Proof mode ok NIN NIN
316. ndication box data L JoBoos 1 WED 15 32 i WED 15 Check Rev Box Q soBoo3 WED 15 34 O JoBoo2 WED 15 35 Q JoBoo1 WED 15 37 001 005 Delete It is possible to change the order of display for the stored documents To do so touch the Order of indication key and then touch the Sort by date key and select either New Old or Old New or the Sort by name key and select either A Z or Z A as appropriate 6 14 Check the displayed information If you want to print out the first page of the selected documents touch the Print from 1st Head print key If you want to change the name of the selected documents touch the Change doc name key and then enter the new name Inch specifications Close Item Details User name E Document name Job006 es Registration size 11x8 2 j Orig set direction Back Edge page 1 Input source Copy Print Registration date 25 10 01 14 39 from ist Metric specifications Item Details Luc i a Document name Job006 eae Registration size A4 f i Orig set direction Back Edge 1 page Input source Copy Resolution 600dpi Registration date 25 10 01 14 39 p NOTE Refer to 11 Entering characters on page 7 104 for information on entering characters 6 Once you have finished checking the information for those documents touch the Close key The touch pane
317. ng it touch the Back key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 Touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 Printing privileges ON OFF Perform the following procedure when the optional Printer Kit or Printer Scanner Kit is installed in your copier and you want to turn printing privileges ON or OFF for the corresponding department ID code NOTE This setting will only be available when On is selected as the Printer function management ON OFF setting 1 Access the screen that contains the copy restriction setting items See Register new department ID codes on page 7 4 or Change restrictions for use on page 7 20 Inch specifications Close Department Order of a indication j 01 1st Sales Dept 02 2nd Sales Dept 0001 3rd Sales Dept Mgt Inf Limit i correction gt in use i i Delete 0014 Ath Sales Dept 00000015 5th Sales Dept 00000016 6th Sales Dept 00000017 7th Sales Dept 001 010 Register y l Default setting Management Metric specifications 0001 3rd Sales Dept correction Dj in use AR 0014 4th Sales Dept vY i 00000015 5th Sales Dept ages 00000016 6th Sales Dept Down f 00000017 7th Sales Dept 001 010 Register 2 Select Printer limitation under the Setting item column on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the Change key The Printer limitation screen wil
318. ng of the page numbers to be started from a page other than the first page touch the Setting 1st page key The Setting 1st page screen will be displayed Inch specifications Paper size Ready to copy DI 11x817 100 Start 1 1 Setting Setting ist page start Cindi Maye tt Denominator Check direction of original top side Last page Auto Setting Set denom f Left top i last page n inator gt H corner Paper size Set ee Check direction of original Start pag 1 1 Setting Setting ist page Startpage gt Last paye Denominator Last page Auto Setting Set H Left top eepe a EZA Touch the key or the key to select from which page printing of the page numbers will start Inch specifications Paper size Ready to copy LY mew Setting ist page Check direction of original top side A fe H Left top H corner Paper size WyAAD 10036 Check direction of original Back Edge Left top i k me corner Touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 5 Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS 8 If you want the first page number that is printed to be something other than 1 touch the Setting start Setting Start page key The Setting start screen will be displayed Inch specifications Paper size Ready to copy D new Start 1 Setting Setting ist page j start
319. ng screen touch the Page Page numbering key The Page Page numbering screen will be displayed Inch specifications Ready to Job build Place originals then press Start key Auto Off Off Border Select Modify Erase g orig size 5 Copy j d None Margin Centering gt Auto None Off Erase Select Modify l Mode size orig cop E None Margin Imag shift NOTE The setting in regard to the print page numbers mode can only be made in the first step of the job build mode and will apply to all steps in the copy job 2 For more detailed information on this setting refer to the explanation for the print page numbers mode on page 5 16 Inch specifications Ready to Job build Page can be added on bottom of copy Metric specifications Ready to Job build Set original Press Start key Page can be added on bottom of copy 3 Touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 1 Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS 5 69 section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS 5 70 section6 DOCUMENT AND OUTPUT MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS 1 Document management functions NOTE The optional Hard Disk must be installed on this copier in order to use this function 1 What are the document management functions Document management functions refer to those functions that enable you to scan and save documents onto the copier s ha
320. ns Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Description Determines the default value for the width of the border to be erased in the two border erase modes Sets the limit for the number of copies or copy sets that can be made at a time Sets whether or not to prohibit repeat copying as well as whether or not to make repeat copying the default setting in the initial mode Sets whether to turn the repeat copy mode ON or OFF Sets whether or not to make repeat copying the default setting in the initial mode This setting is displayed when the optional Hard Disk is installed Sets whether or not to allow a Register key to be displayed in the screen for those function and modes which can be registered under the registration keys Functions and or modes can only be registered under registration keys through the Register key Changes the order of the main functions and modes that are displayed in the Basic and the User choice tabs in order to make the display more appropriate to the way you use the copier Up to 6 functions and modes can be listed and displayed Adds often used functions and or modes and changes the order of their layout in order to make the display more appropriate to the way you use the copier Available settings Factory Reference setting Inch specification Inch Outside border specification 0 3 4 inches Outside border Center area 1 4 inches 0 1 1 2 inches C
321. ns Register this function This number is already registered Register No 1 Register this selecting mode OK Metric specifications Register this function This number is already registered Register No 1 Register this selecting mode OK If you selected Yes the selected function will be registered under the registration key If you selected No the touch panel will return to the screen in step 5 without registering the selected function Touch the Close key The Combine Merge copy key will now appear on the right side of the touch panel as a registration key Inch specifications R d Paper size eady to copy LY 81x11 oe 100 Select 2 sided Select aan paper gt Separation gt orig size omang Exposure Reduce Auto Batch mode 4 Enlarge Selection scanning j Orig image Margin Forms qualit 4 Centering j Overlay Sort Program Metric specifications Ready to copy AIRAU R ae er paper size original Merge copy pi Exposure Reduce Auto Large of mode Enlarge selection originals Image Margin Page Form quality orig P Imag shift i numbering overlay Sort Erase Cover Finished D E Mode d Booklet y NOTE The functions and modes in the Basic tab and the User choice tab can be registered under registration keys as well A Register key will be displayed in the screen for those functi
322. nsparencies can be set on the multi bypass tray at one time e Make sure that paper of the same size and orientation as the transparencies has been loaded into a drawer cassette 3 Touch the Function tab and then the Y Down key The content of the next portion of the Function tab will be displayed Copying onto the backing sheet With this setting after the original is copied onto the transparency the same image will be copied onto the backing sheet as well The asterisk in the illustration indicates the transparencies 4 Touch the OHP backing OHP back key The OHP backing OHP back screen will be displayed Inch specifications Fy Ready Coote 6 A Tyas ee OHP Memo s Orig set Eor y ren a 100 Modify i Cop 2 User choice Metric specifications Leaving the backing sheet blank F Ready to copy gap 10075 With this setting the original will be copied onto the transparency but 7 7 i ack aif Testco f emo the backing sheet will be left blank The asterisk in the illustration l indicates the transparencies deci Miror y Program 5 36 9 6 Touch the Copy key or the Blank key as appropriate Inch specifications P Si e F Ready to copy Diew 4 Insert a blank paper between piece of OHP film or copy to a OHP back paper Place the OHP film in the bypass Metric specification
323. nt Box arses AAP i Document Document Document Document Form registr 5 printing 5 registr gt printing i registr i Box Box Box Editing Editing j Editing 3 Either touch the synergy print box that contains the Job cancel documents to be printed out or enter its number using the k Then h the Enter key The D ment printing 007 Box ABCDEFGHIJK___Select 0 Ae Vy Mert Jee i ore re pede j A ASE a EE pE i i screen WI e alsplayed l Q J0B004 1 WED 15 33 LA i TPR l O JoB003 1 WED 15 34 Inch specifications T Jono arene Lv Select i D W soBo01 1 WED 15 37 _ Down Cancel faee Finis 001 005 selecting ys Select box No Box No with key d 001 ABCD_0000001 4006 UVWX_0000006 7 011 QRST_0000105 4016 MNOP_0200104 o o 002 EFGH_0000002 MAA 012 UVWX_0000106 017 QRST_0200105 i 003 lJKL_0200003 i 004 MNOP_00000044 009 IJKL_0000103 4 014 EFGH_0200102 4019 ABCD_0500101 i Touch the End key The touch panel will return to the 005 QRST_0000005 f010 MNOP_0000104 f 015 IJKL_0200103 020 EFGH_0500102 i i contents of the Basic tab Document Management Synergy Print Box Metric specifications Select box No Box No with key 001 ABCD_0000001 4006 uvwx_o000006 011 QRST_0000105 fo16 MNOP_0200104 o i ee HE 002 EFGH_0000002 OAN 012 UVWX_0000106 017 QRST_0200105 BE a eee ig 003 IJKL_02000034008 EFGH_0000102 4 013 ABCD_0200101
324. nt and back of the copy set will be blank 5 26 1 Set the open faced book etc original to be copied 2 Touch the Function tab The content of the Function tab will be displayed 4 Touch the Booklet key The Booklet screen will be displayed Inch specifications 100 F Ready to copy e a Select 2 sided Select Combin paper Separation 5 orig size j j 5 Exposure Reduce Auto Batch mode 4 Enlarge Selection scanning gt Orig image Margin Forms quality Centering j Page Overlav i Sort Border Cover re a ele j User choice Function Program Metric specifications F Ready to copy E ao 100 Select 2 sided Select Exposure Reduce Auto Large of mode Enlarge selection 4 Originals Image Margin Page Form qualit Imag shift gt numbering gt averlav Sort Erase Cover ET Mode j Moge ee Function Program Touch the Book Booklet key The screen to specify the binding direction of the originals and the finished copies will be displayed Inch specifications Ready to copy Ti ae Edit one or two sided original pages and out put a book Booklet Use Book booklet for book original Book q Booklet Metric specifications Paper size Set Ready to copy WALD Edit 1 and 2 sided originals and output as book Use Book booklet for book original section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS 9 Speci
325. nt by 2 Select Silent mode in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the Change key The Silent mode screen will be displayed Inch specifications Default setting Counter F Default menu i Setting mode A Up Key sound ON OFF On Silent mode On D vY Date Time 2001 10 30 14 02 kA Time difference GMT 08 00 Management code change 5000 Metric specifications Default setting Counter Default menu i Setting mode l Key sound ON OFF On Silent mode Off Date Time 30 10 01 14 02 kA Time difference GMT 08 00 Change MGMT code with 5000 Change y Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS 3 Touch the On key if you want to use the silent mode Inch specifications Use this mode if you are distracted by moter sounds Shorten laser motor rotating time for before after copying Use this mode if you are distracted by motor sound NOTE If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it touch the Back key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 4 Touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 5 Touch the Close key once again The touch panel will return to the Default setting screen 6 Touch the End key The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab 7 53 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Day amp time 3 Touch the key
326. nt to delete and touch the Yes key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 3 Inch specifications ID code 0007 Name to display 1st Sales Dept Are you sure you want to delete this ID code Metric specifications ID code 0007 Name to display 1st Sales Dept Are you sure you want to delete this ID code NOTE If you want to delete another ID code repeat steps 3 and 4 Touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Change registered information Perform the following procedure when you want to change a previously registered department name or the corresponding D code 1 Access the copy management menu screen See 2 Accessing the copy management menu screen on page 7 3 Inch specifications Bypass BUX Counter setting Management check gt Machine Document Register Print User default Management orig size gt report Adjustment By Metric specifications Default setting Counter Copy default E Language Management 3 Bypass Hard DISK Counter setting j Management check Machine Document Register Print User default Management orig size gt report j Adjustment By 2 Touch the Management edit key The Management edit screen will be displayed Inch specifications Managem Total Register Sett Management Management Each Mot Management Management total
327. nterrupt key Interrupt mode OK will be displayed 4 Default Setting Management Interrupt Energy Saver D PN DOO x Clear 2 Remove the originals that were currently being copied and put them aside 3 Set the new originals and perform the desired copy procedure 4 9 section 4 BASIC OPERATION 4 Job reservation Copy jobs can be scheduled even while another copy job is in progress any time the Reserve next copy key is displayed Inch specifications Output oo Reserve C next cop Pause i Orig page Count Set Inner tray Metric specifications Original Count set Output up 1 995 AA 100 wW AAD Dlop Change i Inner tray You can enter the corresponding copy settings and scan in the Originals in preparation for your copy job even before the other job is completed Once that job is finished and print out is possible the operation for the reserved job will begin automatically NOTES e The optional Hard Disk must be installed on your copier in order to use this function e If the optional Fax Kit Printer Kit or Printer Scanner Kit are installed in your copier job reservation will be possible during print out of both received fax jobs and print jobs 4 10 1 Touch the Reserve next copy key The Ready to copy Job reservation screen will be displayed Inch specifications Orig page Count Set Output Pe Reserve 1 2 OO next Cop 1
328. nts of the Basic tab Metric specifications Default setting Counter Default menu i Setting mode Preset limit 999 Set Modify copy On Default Off v Y oom D A Display Register key On v ti Customize Main function Customize Add function Change p 7 85 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Customize screen layout Add functions 3 If you want to add functions and or modes to the User Perform the following procedure to add often used functions and or choice tab touch the A or the Y cursor key under the list modes or to change the order of their layout in order to make the on the right to select the item you want o add Then touch select in what order you want it to be added in that tab Finally touch the key to add the selected item to the 1 Display the Copy default screen User choice tab See 5 Accessing the copy default settings on page 7 62 fnchvepsciicalions Inch specifications Default setting Counter tomize Add func Basic Register mode Addition mode yigig Border Erase Select paper 7 FJ 7i 7 Combine Combine None Auto Selection User choice None Batch scanning LE E 7 8 None Margin 9 0 uU p 83 Bypass BOX Counter i setting Management Bj check j f Machine Document Register Print User i default Management Pj orig size s report Adjustment pj Metric specifications Metric specifications Default setting Count
329. nutes 120 minutes 180 minutes or 240 minutes e It is recommended that you try to set a longer time interval before the auto sleep function engages if you use the copier frequently and to a shorter time if there are long intervals between use e If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it touch the Back key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 2 Select Sleep mode changing time in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the Change key The Sleep mode changing time screen will be displayed Inch specifications 4 Touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the Default setting Counter screen in step 2 Default menu i Setting mode u Sccp modo changngime coMnue 5 Touch the Close key once again The touch panel will return to the Default setting screen Low power mode chng time 15 Minute Select Copy output mode Inner tray Select FAX output mode Inner tray Select the main mode Copy mode Change y l Default setting 6 Touch the End key The touch panel will return to the ae contents of the Basic tab Metric specifications Default setting Counter Default menu H Setting mode l Sleep mode changing time 60 Minute Low power mode chng time 15 Minute Select COPY output mode Inner tray Select FAX output mode Inner tray Select main mode COPY Mode Change y l Default
330. oBoo2 WED 15 35 Q JoBoo1 WED 15 37 NOTE It is possible to change the order of display for the stored documents To do so touch the Order of indication key and then touch the Sort by date key and select either New Old or Old New or the Sort by name key and select either A Z or Z A as appropriate 6 15 Section 6 DOCUMENT AND OUTPUT MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS 5 Touch the Yes key or the No key as appropriate 6 Deleting the full contents of a box Inch specifications Perform the following procedure when you want to delete the full contents of a synergy print box in one step 1 Press the Document Management key The Document Document name Job 005 Management screen will be displayed This document s will be deleted Do you want to delete it Document a f Management gt Job Queue Metric specifications Document name JOB005 This document will be deleted Are you sure 2 Touch the Box editing key under Synergy Print Box The If you selected Yes the selected documents will be deleted screen to select the synergy print box will be displayed and the touch panel will return to the screen in step 4 If you selected No the touch panel will return to the screen Inch specifications in step 4 without deleting the selected documents l Select function ee 6 If you want to delete other stored documents rep
331. oblems with the copy set you made then you can use the repeat copy mode to make any additional number of copy sets as desired see 2 Printing out with the repeat copy mode on page 5 43 2 Selecting the settings and functions 4 Selecting the paper This procedure selects the size of the copy paper 1 With the content of the Basic tab displayed touch the Select paper key The Select paper screen will be displayed Inch specifications Fy Ready to Job build Is th Start k Job Build Step1 1 sided 1 sided copy Original 1 sided j type 2 sided ji S AMS Back Edge l PER Reduce Orig set Basic Finished page 0 Metric specifications Fy Ready to Job build Set original Press Start ke 1 sided 1 sided Copy Select Original 1 sided paper S type gt 2 sided joi Ser AMS Back Edge Reduce Orig set o j i Ed 2 Touch the key that corresponds to the drawer cassette which contains the desired size of copy paper and then touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 1 Inch specifications Ready to Job build Place originals then press Start key 1 11x8 Plain 2 11x8 E Plain 3 11x8 Color a 84x14 Plain B Bypass Plain Metric specifications Fy Ready to Job build Set original Press Start key 1AAdaD EJ Plain Plain EJ Colour Pla B Bypass
332. ode Adjust auto exposure Standard a Adjust auto exposure OCR Standard v Adj manual expo Mixed Standard Adj manual expo Text Standard Adj manual expo Photo Standard Changes y l Default setting 7 76 3 Touch the Lighter key or the Darker key as appropriate to move the cursor on the exposure scale and adjust the exposure as desired Inch specifications Adjust copy exposure default setting Manual Text aJ p 0 2 3 e a q Lighter Darker D Metric specifications manual expo Text ust default setting of copy exposure Manual Text 3 2 0 2 3 S O E S O a Toore NOTE If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it touch the Back key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 4 Touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 5 Touch the Close key once again The touch panel will return to the Default setting screen 6 Touch the End key The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab Manual exposure adjustment photo mode Perform the following procedure to adjust the median exposure value when the photo mode is selected for the image quality 1 Display the Copy default screen See 5 Accessing the copy default settings on page 7 62 Inch specifications Default setting Counter Copy default a Bypass
333. oltage parts inside the copier SHOCK cocccccssssssssssesseseesssssssssessssseesssssssseessseeesessssee DO NOT damage break or attempt to repair the e If the copier will not be used for a short period of power cord DO NOT place heavy objects on the time overnight etc turn the power switch OFF cord pull it bend it unnecessarily or cause any O other type of damage If it will not be used for an extended period of These types of situations present a danger of fire S time vacations etc remove the power plug or electrical SHOCK ccccccccecececeecccececececeeecesaeaes from the outlet for safety purposes during the Z NEVER attempt to repair or disassemble the time the copier iS NOt iN USE cccseeeeeeeeeeeeeees copier or its parts as there is a danger of fire e ALWAYS hold the designated parts only when Q electrical shock or damage to the laser If the lifting or Moving the COpier eseseeesetseeeeeeeee laser beam escapes there is a danger of it Causing blindness cccceee esses eesesesseseeeeteeeeeees e For safety purposes ALWAYS remove the power plug from the outlet when performing cleaning If the copier becomes excessively hot smoke OPENEN appears from the copier there is an odd smell or any other abnormal situation occurs there is a e lf dust accumulates within the copier there is a danger of fire or electrical shock Turn the power danger of fire or other trouble It is therefore switch OFF
334. on and modes which can be registered under the registration keys 2 Deleting a registration key Perform the following procedure when you want to delete a registration key 1 Touch the registration to the right of the Basic tab that you want to delete Example Combine Merge copy Inch specifications Set Ready to copy K a mem UE Plain EN EN Fa Fa Paper Size Set 1 ETE ETE Ea Ea p 2 In the resulting screen for that function or mode example the Combine Merge copy screen touch the Register key The Register screen will be displayed Inch specifications Paper size Check direction Check direction of original top side Check direction Check direction of original section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS 3 In the Register screen touch the Delete key once again The screen to delete registration keys will be displayed Inch specifications Metric specifications al Register ar om Touch the registration key 1 3 that corresponds to the program that you want to delete Are you sure you want to delete will be displayed Inch specifications Select the number of program to delete c a T j 3 Reduce a Enlarge Metric specifications Delete registration l 3 Reduce q A Enlarge 5 55 section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS Touch the Yes key The
335. on of original 6mm 6mm 6mm 6mm fe amp l Border Individual i erase Erase Mode ___ i Book erase Back Edge H Left top i mi Corner f 5 12 1 Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS Touch the key or the key to change the displayed border width to that desired In metric specification copiers the desired border width can also be entered directly by touching the Keys key and then using the keypad Inch specifications Ready to copy o Check direction of original top side j Left top J corner i Paper size Wiad D 100 Check direction Check direction of original H Left top i Corner Touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 7 If you want to change the width of any of the other borders repeat steps 7 through 9 1 0 Press the Start key Copying will start 9 12 2 section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS 7 Fitting the image of either two or four originals onto a single copy page Combine Merge Copy modes With this mode the images from either 2 or 4 originals can be 2 4in1 reduced and then combined onto a single copy The borderline of each original can also be marked with either a solid line or a dotted Use this mode when you want to copy four originals onto one sheet line This mode can also be used in conjunction with the 2 sided copy modes in order to copy eight
336. on panel but even less power will be consumed in this mode To resume copying press the Energy Saver key once again It will take the copier less than 25 seconds to return to a copy ready state Energy Saver NOTES e If the optional Printer Kit or Printer Scanner Kit is installed in your copier you can switch between the energy saving modes Low power mode and Sleep mode that will be entered into when the Energy Saver key is pressed To change the energy saving mode see Changing the energy saving mode on page 7 58 e If you are using a standard copier or if the optional Fax Kit is installed in your copier you can press the Energy Saver key to engage the Low power mode e If the optional Fax Kit Printer Kit or Printer Scanner Kit are installed in your copier and a received fax job or a print job is detected while the copier is in one of the energy saving modes it will automatically return to a copy ready state and print out the corresponding job The following two functions will also automatically cause the copier to enter the corresponding energy saving mode if no operation is performed for a designated period of time Auto low power function If no operation is performed on the copier for a designated period of time adjustable between 1 and 240 minutes the auto low power function will engage and cause the copier to automatically enter the Low power mode The factory default setting is for 15 minutes Au
337. ook or magazine are copied separately onto the front and back sides of the copy paper by simply pressing the Start key lt Original gt lt Finished copy gt Left Book gt Duplex gt Uf Book Book gt Ala Book gt Duplex gt IF Book Book gt AI NOTE Only 8 1 2 x 11 11 x 17 ASR B5R A4R B4 and A3 size originals can be used in this mode 5 1 section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS 3 Making 2 sided copies from one sided originals With this mode multiple one sided originals are copied onto the front and back sides of the copy paper If you are copying an odd number of originals the back side of the last copy page will be blank NOTE The image that is copied onto the back side of the copies can also be rotated 180 degrees 4 If you chose the Left Right Left Right binding setting for finished copies The back side of the copies will be created with the same orientation as the originals 2 If you chose the Top Top binding setting for finished copies The image that is copied onto the back side of the copies will be rotated 180 degrees If you then bind the copy set at the top the images will be oriented in the same direction when flipped up like a calendar etc 5 2 Set the originals to be copied Touch the Function tab The content of the Function tab will be displayed Touch the 2 s
338. opying A 1 1 Using the job build mode The following procedure shows one way of using the job build mode and explains how to perform that operation under the situation indicated in the examples below Example lt Finished copies gt The asterisk in the illustration indicates the blank sheets ga lt Originals gt NOTE This procedure will assume that the color paper to be used as the front cover and the middle insert originals A and C as well as for the back cover will be set on the multi bypass and that there is plain copy paper loaded in drawer cassette No 1 Step 1 Accessing the Job build screen 1 Press the Job build key The Job build screen will be displayed a Af D Repeat Copy J Job Build Auto Selection Making the settings that apply to all steps First the settings for the 2 sided copy modes and the repeat copy mode must be made NOTES e The repeat copy mode is used to enable you to make an additional number of copy sets later e It is also possible to select other settings and functions as desired besides those given in the example procedure See 2 Selecting the settings and functions on page 5 62 Touch the 1 sided 2 sided key The 1 sided 2 sided screen will be displayed Inch specifications Fy Ready to Job build Place originals then press Start ke LU 11x8 1 sided l Select Original 1 sided
339. opying again NOTE To keep the best copying quality perform cleaning of steps 15 and 18 described above periodically approximately once a month in addition to the time of toner container replacement After use ALWAYS dispose of the toner container and the waste toner box in accordance with Federal State and Local rules and regulations 10 6 Section 10 MAINTENANCE AND OPERATION INFORMATION 3 Specifications TPE e E rete ene oes eee reese ee ee eee ee Desk top COT CVA Pel sectors va stints EEEE Fixed type CODES SIGN Wesuesessadnseacessnsssusurtsasesuessnsteluixennconmexaenunt Indirect electrostatic OMGINANS eoe E E A Sheets books and 3 dimensional objects Maximum original size 11 x 17 A3 0700 AVAIS Drawers Cassettes 11 x 17 A3 8 1 2 x 14 B4 257 mm x 364 mm 11 x 8 1 2 A4 8 1 2 x 11 A4R 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 ADR 8 1 2 x 13 Folio 8K and 16K B5 and B5R Asia Pacific specification copiers Multi bypass tray 11 x 17 A3 8 1 2 x 14 B4 257 mm x 364 mm 11 x 8 1 2 A4 8 1 2 x 11 A4R 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 A5R ABR 8 1 2 x 13 Folio 8K and 16K B5 and B5R Asia Pacific specification copiers For 2 sided copying 11 x 17 A3 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 A5R Print margin loss 0 5 mm 5 5 mm COpyViInNg SPEGO oreen EE EREE 30 cpm copiers Same size copying memory copying 11 x 17 A3 20 copies min 8 1 2 x 14 B4 20 copies min 11 x 8 1 2 A4 30 copies min 8 1 2 x
340. or 2 sided original q 2 sided 2 sided 2 sided gt 1 sided gt 2 sided Book Book gt 1 sided gt 2 sided Metric specifications Ready to copy ALD Able to copy 1 sided separate or 2 sided copy using 1 sided original book original or 2 sided original 1 sided d H 2 sided 2 sided 2 sided 1 sided 2 sided Book d 21 sided 2 sided Specify the binding direction of the originals Inch specifications lt for 2 sided originals gt lt for open faced originals gt _Z Reisi A 1 sided 22 sided i H 2 sided Open from H 2 sided top Book 2 sided Metric specifications lt for 2 sided originals gt sided 2 sided bi 2 sided i z J J z2sided p2 sided binding binding Book 2 sided Book 2 sided section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS 6 Follow the instructions on the right side of the touch panel and verify the direction in which the originals were set IMPORTANT If the designation for the direction that the originals are set is not correct copying may be accomplished incorrectly Inch specifications lt for 1 sided or 2 sided originals gt lt for open faced originals gt Paper size Paper size Set l UEEGYA 100 i Set the book original top side direct to back Close Check direction of original top side Left top i corne Metric specifications lt for 1 sided or 2 sided originals gt l
341. or the key to change the displayed Perform the following procedure to set the current date and time information for each field Year Month Day and Time to the current time and date If you want the time to be automatically calculated for NOTE daylight savings time touch the On key under BE SURE to perform the Time difference setting prior to setting the summertime day and time Inch specifications Summertime 1 Display the Machine default screen See 2 Accessing the machine default settings on page 7 41 Day ae l Default setting reae EEE Inch specifications Default setting Counter Metric specifications Bypass BOX Counter i setting Management p check gt Machine Document Register Print User i default j Management Pj orig size report Adjustment By rine 18 27 EEN l Default setting raer Metric specifications Default setting Counter Bypass Hard Disk Counter i setting Management check j i Machine Document Register Print User i default j Management Pj orig size gt report Adjustment By NOTE If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it touch the Back key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 2 Select Date Time in the settings list on the left side of the 4 Touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the touch panel and then touch the Change
342. originals onto one sheet When setting the originals on the platen be sure to set the originals in the correct order 1 2 3 and then 4 NOTE Only 8 1 2 x 11 11 x 8 1 2 11 x 17 B5R B5 A4R A4 B4 and A3 size copy paper can be used in this mode 1 2in1 Use this mode when you want to copy two originals onto one sheet This mode can also be used in conjunction with the 2 sided copy modes in order to copy four originals onto one sheet When setting the originals on the platen be sure to set the originals in the correct order 1 and then 2 5 13 section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS 1 Set the originals to be copied 4 Touch the 2 in 1 2 in 1 key or the 4 in 1 4 in 1 key as appropriate The screen to make the layout settings will be displayed Touch the Function tab The content of the Function tab will be displayed Inch specifications Ready to copy u w Ready to copy rye Inch specifications 100 1 11x8 2 IE Plain 8 x11 I Color 3 11x8 I Plain 2 or 4 original pages can combine on one page a 11x8 2 2 Recycled Sort Finished Paper size WAAD 100 Paper Size Set 2 or 4 originals can be printed on one page KEINE Auto Exposure E Exposure Reduce Sort rea Enlarge Finished rog 5 Select the desired direction of the layout 3 Touch the Combine Merge copy key The Com
343. orm qualit Imag shift gt numbering gt overlay Sort Cover Function Program Touch the Booklet key The screen to specify the binding direction of the originals and the finished copies will be displayed Inch specifications Paper size Set Ready to copy L 11x84 Edit one or two sided original pages and out put a book Use Book booklet for book original Metric specifications Ready to copy Paper size 1 Edit 1 and 2 sided originals and output as book Use Book booklet for book original l ooklet Booklet j Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS 5 Specify the binding direction of both the originals and the finished copies Inch specifications Paper size Set F2 sided mode EIA Original Finishing Stitching Check direction Eg Check direction of Off original top side Stitching i seed 2 sided Booklet Left Right a N d gt Booklet 2 sided Saddle R H Left top Top Bottom Stitch ee B corner i Check direction of original Stitching Front cov 2 sided Left Right None 6 If It is impossible to copy in present setting mode Change setting of original and finishing mode appears check on the right side of the touch panel whether both the orientation of the originals and the finish mode setting are correct or not Inch specifications It is impossible to copy in present setting mode P
344. orner of the platen being a setting of 0 touch the key or the key to change the dimensions of the scan area to the desired setting In metric specification copiers the dimensions can also be entered directly by touching the Keys key and then using the keypad Inch specifications Ready to copy E tee 2 11 s 2 17 Set original on platen and input scanning range Y side X side Paper size qa fa AAD q q Scanning range can be set with EEC Sa X Y direction when original is placed at left rear corner Input size stand Size Press the Start key Copying will start section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS 5 35 section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS 16 Feeding paper as a backing sheet for OHP transparencies Transparency backing sheet mode When 2 or 3 transparencies are piled on top of one another static 1 Set the originals to be copied electricity can cause problems This mode automatically places a backing sheet between the transparencies during copying for easy handling You can also select whether or not to have the image of the 2 Set the transparency film on the multi bypass tray original copied onto the backing sheet or even make multiple copies from the same original IMPORTANT When copying onto transparencies ALWAYS use the multi bypass tray IMPORTANT e Fan through the transparencies before setting them e Up to 25 tra
345. otation of the copy image Page 5 30 e Adding a front and or back cover to your copy sets Page 5 31 e Feeding paper as a backing sheet for OHP transparencies Page 5 36 e Inverting black and white Page 5 38 e Making mirror image copies Page 5 39 e Making a test copy prior to large volume copying Page 5 40 e Making more of the same copies after a copy job is finished Page 5 42 e Copying a large volume of originals in one operation Page 5 47 e Easily add covers and insert sheets between various sets of Originals in one operation Page 5 57 See 4 How to set originals in the Document Processor on page 8 2 for instructions on how to set originals in your Document Processor option section 4 BASIC OPERATION Paper Size Set Ready to copy a nme Plain 1 u oe i 2 Paper Size Set Oy CI ae ee 100 kerea o ee i oo oo Function Metric specifications 4 Selecting the paper size When the APS key is highlighted on the touch panel copy paper of the same size as the original will be automatically selected In order to copy the original onto a different size of paper without changing the size of the image touch the paper size key that corresponds to the paper size that you want to use NOTES e You can stop the copier from automatically selecting the paper size See Paper selection on page 7 68 e It is also possible for you to specify one d
346. ouch panel will return to the screen in step 3 l Setting item Value 1 1 Touch the Close key o 07 i The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 Name to display 1st Sales Dept 1 2 Touch the Close key Metric specifications Setting item i Value D code 0007 Name to display 1st Sales Dept Touch the AllDel key to delete the old department name then enter the new name Inch specifications rr eo es NOTE For information on how to enter the department name refer to 11 Entering characters on page 7 104 7 19 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Change restrictions for use Perform the following procedure when you want to change the restrictions for using the copier under each department ID code IMPORTANT In order to access the Change restrictions for use procedure under Editing copy management information it is necessary to select On under Copier function management ON OFF When the optional Printer Kit Printer Scanner Kit or Fax Kit are installed in your copier it is necessary to select On under the corresponding Printer function management ON OFF Scanner function management ON OFF or Fax function management ON OFF procedure See 6 Changing the copy management default settings on page 7 25 1 Access the copy management menu screen See 2 Accessing the copy management menu scree
347. ouch the and verify the direction in which the originals were set keys Keys key and then enter the desired ratio with the keypad or touch the key or the key to change the displayed magnification ratio to the desired setting in 1 F Ready to Job build increments Inch specifications Place originals then press Start key You can also select the magnification ratio by touching the preset zoom ratio keys at the right that corresponds to the Sheer direction desired ratio original top side Es Inch specifications None Saddle Stitch i 154 5 2x81 2 8 2x14 Staple Check direction Check direction of original None Sue F Ready to Job build Set original Press Start key IMPORTANT EN FR Aa If the designation for the direction that the originals are set is not correct copying may be accomplished incorrectly Touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 1 25 400 141 A49A3 81 B49A4 l icc B5 gt B 44 B 5 gt A5 5 Making copies at an enlarged or reduced magnification ratio 7 ee EA 0 Bases This procedure selects the magnification ratio of the finished copies Baas A32B4 4 25 1 With the content of the Basic tab displayed touch the Reduce Enlarge key The Reduce Enlarge screen will be displayed 3 Touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the Inch specifi
348. ox Box i d Editin Editing j Editing f Metric specifications Select function rcs Shared Data Box Synergy Print Box Form box asses AAA i j l Document Document Document Document Form q registr printing 5 registr printing registr Box Editing i Box Box Editing Editing 6 10 Section 6 DOCUMENT AND OUTPUT MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS 3 Either touch the synergy print box that contains the documents to be printed out or enter its number using the keypad Then touch the Enter key The Document printing screen will be displayed Inch specifications Select box No Box No with key 001 ABCD_0000001 4006 UVWX_0000006 011 QRST_0000105 J016 MNOP_0200104 o o ARENANIN 7 4 d 002 EFGH_0000002 1 J012 UVWX_0000106 forz QRST_0200105 i 003 IJKL_0200003 Joos EFGH 0000102 013 ABCD_0200101 fois UVWX_0200106 i 004 MNOP_ 00000044 009 IJKL_ 0000103 014 EFGH_0200102 ors ABCD_0500101 l 005 QRST_0000005 foio MNOP_0000104 015 IJKL_0200103 fo20 EFGH_0500102 Metric specifications Document Printineg with key 001 ABCD_0000001 o o 7 i l Document Management Synergy Print Box NOTES e If that box was registered with a password the password entry screen will be displayed Enter the registered password with the keypad and then touch the Enter key Inch specifications Enter password e Refer to 7 Registering a password for a box on page 6 18 for
349. page j start 7 AAD 7 i 100 Finish Page Denominator Last page Auta Setting H Left top last page i i H corner q Check direction of original Paper size Set 1 z Back Edge Left top q HAAD corner i l Close Check direction of 1 1 original Setting Setting ist page 5 Start page p gt w Last page Denominator Last page Aa Setting Set Left top 5 18 1 17 Touch the Manual key The screen to designate the denominator will be displayed Inch specifications Paper size Set Ready to copy LY tne Check direction Check direction of original top side H Left top corner Metric specifications Paper size Set F Ready ike mere 0 VA AAD Setting denominator Check direction of original l H Left top my corner Touch the key or the key to select the desired denominator for the page numbers The desired denominator can also be entered directly by touching the keys Keys key and then using the keypad Inch specifications Paper size F Ready iKemere 0 Bo 1 999 Check direction of original top side Left top i corner Paper size Set AAD 1 I Check direction j Check direction of original Back Edge Left top i ieee ieee CONS Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS 1 8 Follow the instructions on the right side of the touch pan
350. pecifications Default setting Counter Default menu Setting mode Exposure mode LV Feel ere Exposure steps 1 step Original image quality Text Photo Eco Print Off Background exp adj Standard Change p Default setting Metric specifications Default setting Counter Default menu Setting mode Exposure steps 1 step Image quality original Text Photo Eco Print Off Background exp adj Standard Change pl Default setting 7 66 Touch the On key if you want to make the eco print mode the default setting in the initial mode Inch specifications Select default Eco Print Select default EcoPrint NOTE If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it touch the Back key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 4 Touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 5 Touch the Close key once again The touch panel will return to the Default setting screen 6 Touch the End key The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab Background exposure adjustment Perform the following procedure to adjust the ground color of the copied paper 1 Display the Copy default screen See 5 Accessing the copy default settings on page 7 62 Inch specifications Default setting Counter Default setting nr Bypass BOX Counter setting Management Bj check Machine Docum
351. pecifications Select function et aes Synergy Print Box Form box amp GGR eooo fs fas fs i Document Document Document Document Form j registr 5 printing registr 5 printing gt registr S i BOX Box Box q Editin Editing Editing Shared Data Box Section 6 DOCUMENT AND OUTPUT MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Touch the Change name key and then enter a name for the 2 Printing out stored documents documents Perform the following procedure when you want to print out If you do not want to register a name for the documents go documents that are stored in a shared data box directly to the next step 1 Press the Document Management key The Document Inch specifications p Management screen will be displayed Ready to register document s e a Place originals then press Start ke ment registration Shared Data Box Auto 1 sided Document Management l Documents Original 4 orig size j type j __Jobo06 i Auto size 100 Back Edge Select Reduce Orig set regi size Enlarge gt direction Ready to register document s ae Set original Press Start key 25 10 01 20 cument regis Job cancel Shared Data Box Auto 1 sided Documents rigina mies ou Back Edge 2 Touch the Document printing key under Shared Data Box l The Document printing screen will be displayed Inch specifications Select function 25 10 01 19 20 NOTE Shared Data Box Synergy
352. posure as desired Inch specifications 3 2 i 2 3 _ gt H Ce Default setting Copy default NOTE If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it touch the Back key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 4 Touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 5 Touch the Close key once again The touch panel will return to the Default setting screen 6 Touch the End key The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Manual exposure adjustment text photo mode Perform the following procedure to adjust the median exposure value when the text photo mode is selected for the image quality 1 Display the Copy default screen See 5 Accessing the copy default settings on page 7 62 Inch specifications Default setting Counter Copy default a Bypass setting Machine Document Register default Management Pj orig size s ene BOX Counter Management Bj check j f Print User i report Adjustment pj Metric specifications Default setting Counter Za ne Bypass Hard Disk Counter setting j Management Bj check j i Machine Document Register Print User default Management orig size report Adjustment By 2 Select Adj Manual expo Mixed in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then
353. py Printer output management 2 To have copier and printer functions both handled together touch the All key To have copier and printer functions each Perform the following procedure to determine whether management of handled separately touch the Each key copier and printer functions will be handled together or separately Inch specifications NOTE Copy Printer output management method setting If this setting is changed it will affect which setting items are available for restriction under the copy management function See Setting the restrictions for use on page 7 7 1 Select Copy Printer output mgt under the Setting item column on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the Change key The Copy Printer output mgt screen will be displayed Inch specifications Managem Def Set Setting item Value Print Managem Printer error report Others Mgt Reg print Copy Printer output mgt Scanner Managem Fax Management NOTE l Default setting Management Managem Def set If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it touch the Metric specifications Back key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 1 Value a LA l Touch the Close key P eae Y The touch panel will return to the screen in step 1 Others mgt Reg print Copy Printer output mgt Scanner Managem Change y Fax Management j 7
354. py from book originals 5 4 2 Page separation Split copy from 2 sided originals 5 4 3 Making a margin space on the copies Margin mode 5 6 U Slandard MAG serepan A 5 6 2 Separate front and back margin settings 068 5 6 4 Centering the copy image Centering Image shift mode 5 8 5 Adding a space next to the copy images for making notes Memo MOOG assas 5 9 6 Making copies with clean edges Border erase modes 5 11 1 Erasing blemishes from edges of copies Sheet erase mode 2 scsecscecessecsccsssseeeenereneeeness 5 11 2 Erasing blemishes from the edges and middle of copies made from books Book erase mode ceeeeeeeeees 5 11 3 Erasing blemishes from the edges of copies using individual border settings Individual border erase mode 5 12 7 Fitting the image of either two or four originals onto a single copy page Combine Merge Copy modes seeeeeeeeeees 5 13 ah Cee leone ee er Pee Rene er ne EOC TCROe et eee 5 13 22 PANO e E ct aenevakc assests apa eaasateuse ee ees 5 13 8 Printing page numbers on copies Print page numbers mode wessicicycoracsewaesancioscsacsanarvendersavacondsi 5 16 9 Overlaying one image over another Form overlay mode 5 20 10 Making booklets from sheet originals Booklet Stitching mode ccccccececeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeesesaneeeeeees 5 22 11 Making boo
355. r delete at each page NOTE If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it touch the Back key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 4 Touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 5 Touch the Close key once again The touch panel will return to the Default setting screen 6 Touch the End key The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Customize screen layout Main functions 3 If you want to change the order of the basic functions and Perform the following procedure to change the order of the main modes touch the A or the Y cursor key to select the item functions and modes that are displayed in the Basic and the User you want i move Then touch the Move ahead key or the choice tabs in order to make the display more appropriate to the way Move behind Move backward key to move that item and you use the copier change the order of display The final display of the basic functions and modes will be in accordance with the numbers in the list and those shown in the tabs to the left of that list 1 Display the Copy default screen See 5 Accessing the copy default settings on page 7 62 NEN SPECMCANONG Inch specifications Default setting Counter Register mode Exposure Mode Reduce Enlarge Ahead F AE ae ew Sort Finished
356. r print job When you want to check the contents of a copy job that is waiting to be printed When you want to force print a copy job that is waiting to be printed immediately When you want to cancel a copy job that is waiting to be printed 6 20 You can verify the documents that are waiting to be printed by checking the Print status screen The jobs in the list are printed in order from the top down so you can easily see in which order your documents will be printed The optional Hard Disk must be installed on this copier in order to perform this operation Check the Print status screen If your job IS in the Print status screen that job has not yet been printed The optional Hard Disk must be installed on this copier in order to perform this operation With the output management functions jobs using the printer functions of this copier to print out data from a computer or using the fax functions of this copier to receive fax data are displayed just like any other copy job These print jobs can be verified just like copy jobs by checking the Print status screen A LJ icon under the Job heading indicates a copy job a h icon indicates a print job and a s icon indicates a fax job The number of originals number of copies to be made the date the job was scheduled and the status of printing can all be verified in the Print status screen In addition if you need
357. rawer cassette that will be selected automatically regardless of the size of paper loaded in that drawer cassette See Default drawer cassette on page 7 70 4 2 Exposure Reduce mode Enlarge Metric specifications 5 Adjusting the copy exposure Adjustment of the copy exposure is generally accomplished manually If you want to make the exposure darker touch the right exposure adjustment key to move the arrow under the exposure scale to the right If you want to make the exposure lighter touch the left exposure adjustment key to move the arrow under the exposure scale to the left If you want the copy exposure to be adjusted automatically touch the Auto Exposure key until it is highlighted The contrast of the original will be detected and the most suitable exposure level selected automatically It is also possible for you to adjust the copy exposure by touching the Exposure Mode key to access the Exposure Mode screen Copy exposure adjustment can then be performed in this screen using the same methods as above Inch specifications FyReady iKemexe 0 NOTES e It is possible for you to make adjustments to the auto exposure mode if the overall copies come out too dark or too light See Auto exposure adjustment on page 7 73 e It is also possible for you to change the default setting for the copy exposure to the auto exposure mode See Exposure mode on page 7 63
358. ray LW Down Sort Border Cover User choice Function Paper size Set m ct ehVCO Mere 0 L 14x87 1 Er H OHP Memo rm E l Modify Cop Metric specifications Paper size Set Ready to copy Aad 1003 l Select 2 sided Select l Exposure Reduce Auto Large of q mode Enlarge 4 selection originals l Image Margin Page Form qualit gt ey i Er overla v pawn Paper size Set 1 1 l Modify 0 Program tab Touch this tab when you want to register the currently selected settings as a program or to delete a previously registered program See page 5 50 NOTE If you press any key that has an arrow PB in its bottom right corner the corresponding setting screen will be displayed Inch specifications Ready to copy cue Select 2 sided Select Combin paper Separation gt orig size j S gt Exposure Reduce Auto Batch mode j Enlarge Selection gt scanning 5 Orig image Margin Forms Sort Border Cover Finished i Erase j Mode gt B Function Program 100 Paper size Set WAJ D Select 2 sided Select Exposure Reduce Auto Large of mode Enlarge selection 4 originals Image Margin Page qualit Imag shift By numbering W Register key Touch this key when you want to register the currently selected function or mode under a registration key See page 5 53 Back key Touch this key when you want to return the settings for the currently selecte
359. rd disk and then use that data for copying purposes Each function has it s own separate box the area where document data is saved on the hard disk and all data for that particular function is saved into that specific box The following document management functions are available with this copier Form registration pages 6 1 through 6 4 You can store in a box on the copier s hard disk and you can then manage the use of those images that will be used as the form in the form overlay mode Shared data box pages 6 4 through 6 8 If you register data that will be shared by all users in the shared data box it will be possible for each user to print out that data at their own convenience This is useful for example for registering business forms and the like that are frequently used my many people The data that you register here will be stored permanently until the procedure to delete it is performed Synergy print boxes pages 6 9 through 6 19 If you store multiple sets of documents in a synergy print box you can print out up to 10 of these sets at one time 2 Form registration 4 Registering a form Perform the following procedure when you want to register an images as a form for use in the form overlay mode 1 Set the document that you want to register as a form 2 Press the Document Management key The Document Management screen will be displayed 3 Touch the
360. rection of original Left top i corner g Follow the instructions on the right side of the touch panel and verify the direction in which the originals were set IMPORTANT If the designation for the direction that the originals are set is not correct copying may be accomplished incorrectly 1 0 Press the Start key Copying will start section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS 4 Centering the copy image Centering Image shift mode With this mode you can center the image on the copy paper when you 4 Touch the Centering Imag shift key copy onto a paper size that is larger than that of the original PEES Py Per g g Inch specifications E Ready to copy eee 100 Reposition image to left right or top bottom and also center image Margin on paper l Centering Metric specifications U F Ready to copy ad D 1 Set the originals to be copied Reposition image to left right or top bottom and center image on paper IMPORTANT Set originals so that the top edge is facing either the back or the left of the copier Setting them in the wrong direction may cause the image 5 Follow the instructions on the right side of the touch panel to be copied in the incorrect position and verify the direction in which the originals were set Inch specifications Paper size Set 2 Touch the Function tab The content of the Function tab F Ready 10 COpy 5 i wil
361. remove all the scraps from the inside the copier oe a 3 Close the drawer cassette slowly e Misfeed in left cover 1 JAM 30 40 to 44 46 47 50 to 53 60 61 If the message below appears a misfeed has occurred in the left cover 1 Remove the misfed paper using the procedure given below Inch specifications 1 Open left covert 2 Remove paper 3 Close cover 1 Open left covert 2 Remove paper 3 Close cover NOTE The drum area inside the copier is extremely sensitive to dirt and damage When removing the jammed paper be sure not to touch the drum area that is located inside the machine with your hands or with jewelry such as watches and rings etc 1 Pull up the left cover 1 handle to open the left cover 1 section 9 TROUBLESHOOTING 2 Remove the misfed paper A CAUTION The copier s fixing unit is extremely hot Take sufficient care when working in this area as there is a danger of getting burned 5 Close the left cover 1 9 5 section 9 TROUBLESHOOTING e Misfeed in left cover 1 JAM 05 3 Raise the duplex unit to remove the misfed paper If the message below appears a misfeed has occurred in the left cover 1 Remove the misfed paper using the procedure given below Inch specifications 1 Open left cover 2 Remove paper 3 Close cover 1 Open left cover 2 Remove paper 3 Close cover NOTE The drum area inside the copier is extremely sensitiv
362. repunched e Envelopes 1 When using label sheets be absolutely certain that there is no possibility that the backing glue will come into contact with any part of the copier and that none of the labels will come off the sheet during copying If glue does happen to come into contact with the drum or rollers or one of the labels comes off inside the copier it can be the cause of major damage 2 The following types of envelopes should never be used e Those on which the glue is exposed e Those whereby glue will be exposed if the protective paper is removed If the paper protecting the glue comes off inside the copier it can be the cause of major damage e Those of special construction e Those which have a round tab on the back and are closed with String e Those which have an open window e Those which have a transparent film window NOTE When using prepunched preprinted or letterhead paper refer to Special paper action setting on page 7 46 1 3 1 Section 3 PREPARATIONS 2 Loading paper into the drawer cassette Up to 500 sheets of standard paper 75 or 80 g m standard paper as specified by our company or colored paper can be loaded into the each drawer cassette The each drawer cassette can be set to hold paper of any desired size from 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 8 1 2 x 11 11 x 8 1 2 8 1 2 x 13 8 1 2 x 14 11 x 17 A5R B5R B5 A4R A4 B4 A3 Folio 8K and 16K IMPORTANT Set th
363. responding department ID code If the optional Printer Kit or The Output limitation screen will be displayed Printer Scanner Kit is installed in your copier this limit will apply to the Inch specifications number of copies AND printouts that can be made in total Close 1st Sales Dept NOTE Setting item Value This setting will not be available when Is not permitted is selected for Output imitation m i both the Copying privileges ON OFF and the Printing privileges ON Faxttansm Limitation ea OFF settings or when Is not permitted is selected as the Copying privileges ON OFF setting and the optional Printer Kit or Printer ce Scanner Kit is NOT installed in your copier Metric specifications Close 1st Sales Dept 1 Access the screen that contains the copy restriction setting Setting item Value items EEE T Printer limitation See Register new department ID codes on page 7 4 or Cubuttimitation No ii 3 canner limitation o IMI Change restrictions for use on page 7 20 Fax Transm Limitation No limit Inch specifications Default setting Management Management edit i Department Up Order of _ _ _ _ _ indication 01 1st Sales Dept Limit in use a EEA 3 To set the maximum limit for copying and printing under this an x a Pet correction Dy ID code touch the Counter limit key and proceed to the ales Dept 00000015 5t
364. riginals with adhesive tape or glue e Originals bundled with a paper clip or staple if inevitable remove the paper clip or staple and straighten out the creases and folds before setting the originals e Clipped out originals originals with slippery surface e Originals with still wet whiteout e Originals with creases if inevitable straighten out the creases before setting the originals 3 Document Processor part names 4 Original table Place the originals here 2 Original insertion guides Adjust the guides to the width of the originals 3 Document Processor open close handle Hold this handle when opening and closing the Document Processor 4 Original eject cover Copied originals are stored here 5 Document Processor original cover Open this cover to remove an original misfed in the Document Processor 6 Original set indicator Lights green when the originals are set 8 1 section 8 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT 4 How to set originals in the Document Processor IMPORTANT 1 Adjust the original insertion guides to the original size Do not set originals exceeding the limit indicated on the sticker attached on the rear original insertion guide Setting more originals than specified may cause original misfeed How to set originals on the platen When using an original that cannot be set in the Document Processor such as a book or magazine open the Document Processor and place it on the platen
365. rinter error report screen will be displayed Inch specifications Close Setting item Value Print Managem Printer error report Others Mgt Reg print Copy Printer output mgt Scanner Managem Fax Management Print managem Printer error report Others mgt Reg print Copy Printer output mgt Scanner Managem Fax Management 7 28 2 To have a printer error report printed out touch the On key If you do not want the printer error report printed out touch the Off key Inch specifications Error report is output at the time of Mgt code mismatch NOTE If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it touch the Back key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 1 Touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 1 NOTE If anyone attempts to print using an invalid department ID code an error will occur under the printing functions and printout will not be possible When the Printer key is touched Department ID code mismatch will be displayed Touch the GO key to print out an error report Inch specifications Eh Department code mismatch Off line Metric specifications Eh Department code mismatch Off line Non standard printer driver printout Printer Perform the following procedure when On is selected as the Printer function management ON OFF setting and you want to wan
366. rouble OCUS oisein nan nE a Aena EErEE 9 13 Individual border erase mode ccccccccceeeeeceneeeeeeenecnesenenenenenes 5 12 Maa MOE saene ceteacce cecerescacieeoreeseiedonetawresiseceenesreaseenoredseanneetaeacteesea 2 4 INSTALLATION PRECAUTIONS sscccececeeeeeeeesesesssssnneaeeees 1 2 Installing the optional equipment ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeteneeeeees 10 10 RENI GOOI feeretsencene Sem nere treater ne nee ern Pr enet es ir mnt err enee geen 4 9 n S EE E AP iadeenduaeavieestatideboiemte tec 5 38 J JOD Duld MOGE seissysiarrnsistininer nieras nen E Eia 5 57 Job reservation cccccccccecssecssssseeeneeeeeeenecccccasssseeteeeeeeeseeseeeess 4 10 Hele dei esii iS TE E E E E T 8 11 K POY OOU a A E E A 8 12 L Language selection FUNGON ssessssririisiirississnssnniicciiirse ninini 7 103 Loading P DGT aosa Tamiya eA e NSE er ere eee Rie eer ae 3 1 LOW power MOJE sssrinin esaa NENE 4 11 M Machine default settings cssseseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 38 MAINTENANCE AND OPERATION INFORMATION ossee 10 1 Making copies when copy management is turned ON 7 37 Making copy default settings eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 63 Making machine default settings nsssssnsrerersrererrrrrrrerrrrrrereene 7 42 Manual exposure adjustment photo mode copy default SENG niscctniactnsaccaanvaatieniactiesegansanannanindssnmaenieenes 7
367. rt Adjustment By 2 Select Special paper action mode Specif paper action mode in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the Change key The Special paper action mode Specif paper action mode screen will be displayed Inch specifications Default setting Counter Machine default Default menu i Setting mode Paper type 3rd drawer Plain Paper type 4th drawer Plain Check bypass sizing Off Select paper type 2sided Special paper action mode Speed priority Change pi Default setting Metric specifications Default setting Counter Close Default menu i Setting mode Paper type 3rd cassette Plain Paper type 4th cassette Plain Check bypass sizing Off Select paper type 2sided Specif paper action mode Speed priority Change p l Default setting 7 46 1 3 Select Adj print Direction Inch specifications Possible to set action of the paper Prepunched Preprinted Letterhead Adj print Direction Metric specifications Possible to set action of the paper Prepunched Preprinted Letterhead Adj print Direction Speed Priority NOTES e When Adj print Direction is selected the speed of 1 sided copying will be somewhat slower than normal e If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it touch the Back key The touch panel will return to the screen in step
368. s Ready to copy Paper size ShP back Insert blank paper between OHP films or copy to OHP back paper M Place OHP film on bypass Press the Start key Copying will start section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS 5 37 section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS 17 Inverting black and white Invert mode With this mode you can make copies where the black and white 5 Touch the On key areas of the image are inverted or reversed If multiple inverted copies are being made Please wait Now cleaning may be displayed F Ready to copy eae Inch specifications Copy the scanned image with reversing black and white parts Paper size Set WyAaAD 00 Copy scanned image with black and white parts reversed Set the originals to be copied 2 Touch the Function tab The content of the Function tab will be displayed 6 Press the Start key Copying will start 3 Touch the Y Down key The content of the next portion of the Function tab will be displayed 4 Touch the Invert key The Invert screen will be displayed Inch specifications F Ready to copy yin 100 i OHP Memo l Modify q Copy Metric specifications F Ready 0R 0 0 Prea l 100 q gt pages 7 l Orig set seri a Loreen at Limet Modify q cop i User choice Function Program 5 38 section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS 18 Making mirror im
369. screen to select the synergy NOTES print box will be displayed e If that box was registered with a password the password entry Inch specifications screen will be displayed l Enter the registered password with the keypad and then touch the Select functi P i Enter key Inch specifications Shared Data Box Synergy Print Box Form box i GR 22 s an fa fs Enter password Document Document Document Document Form reg printing j reg printing reg Box Box Box Editing Editing el Editing Metric specifications F Select function TERE Document Management Shared Data Box Synergy Print Box Form box Document Document Document Document Form registr printing 5 registr 5 printing 5 registr gt Box Box Box Editing Editing j Editing j e Refer to Registering a password for a box on page 6 18 for information on registering the password 6 13 Section 6 DOCUMENT AND OUTPUT MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS 4 NOTE Select the documents that you want to check and then touch the Conf Correct details Check Rev details key The Check Correct details Check revise details screen will be displayed Inch specifications 007 Order of Delete all t _ indicati Q JoBoo5 1 WED 15 32 gata ioe i Conf Crrt Box i Q JOB003 1 WED 15 34 O soBoo2 1 WED 15 35 Q J0B001 1 WED 15 37 Metric specifications 007 Box ABCDEFGHIJK Up ee of Delete all i
370. se the duplex unit to remove the misfed paper If the misfed paper cannot be removed go to the next step 9 8 section 9 TROUBLESHOOTING 6 Open the front cover 1 0 Open the internal tray cover to remove the misfed paper T7 Turn the knob clockwise to release the misfed paper from the 1 1 If the paper has been torn remove the internal tray internal tray section 8 Remove the misfed paper If the misfed paper cannot be removed go to the next step 1 3 Replace the internal tray in its original position Close the front cover 9 9 section 9 TROUBLESHOOTING 2 Misfeed in Document Processor optional JAM 70 to 76 3 If the misfed original is found remove it If paper is torn during removal be sure to remove all loose If the message below appears a misfeed has occurred in the scraps from inside the copier or they could cause misfeed Document Processor Remove the misfed original using the procedure given below later Inch specifications Paper misfeed 1 Open the document processor 2 Raise the reverse unit up 3 Turn the left dial 4 Remove original s 5 Close Document processor Metric specifications Paper misfeed 1 Open document processor 2 Raise reverse unit up Raise the reversing unit 3 Turn dial left 4 Remove original s 5 Close Document processor If the misfed original is found
371. sets at the present settings and the copier will enter a waiting to copy state Check the test copies Inch specifications Check proof copy To stop and retry press Cancel key To continue to print press Start key g page Count Set o gt 0 08 Job130 Metric specifications Check test copy To stop and retry press Cancel key eee oe ES tO print press eet key ag Count set n 17a f there is no problem with the copies Press the Start key and copying of the initially designated number of copy sets will start If you want to change the number of copies to be made touch the Change Preset key and enter the actual number of copies you do want to make f there is some problem with the copies Touch the Cancel key to cancel the copy job and start the procedure from the beginning section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS 5 41 section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS 20 Making more of the same copies after a copy job is finished Repeat copy mode With this mode if you think you might want to make another set of the 4 Touch the Modify Copy key The Modify Copy screen will same copies even after the initial copy job is finished simply turn the be displayed repeat copy mode ON and you can make the necessary number of additional copies later In order to maintain privacy you can make it necessary to enter a security code in order to use the repeat copy F R
372. sette Plain Paper type 4th cassette Plain Check bypass sizing Off Change y Default setting Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS 3 Touch the key that corresponds to the type of paper that is loaded in that drawer cassette Inch specifications Select and display paper type some custom osons asome Select and display paper type nics is emi i if A Prepunched 4 Vellum Recycled Rough NOTES e If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it touch the Back key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 e The setting for drawer cassette No 3 and No 4 will only be available when the optional Paper Feeder is installed on your copier 4 Touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 5 Touch the Close key once again The touch panel will return to the Default setting screen 6 Touch the End key The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab 1 44 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Multi bypass tray settings display ON OFF 3 Touch the On key if you want to have the Bypass setting Perform the following procedure to have the Bypass setting screen Se E ARPEA appear whenever the Bypass key is pressed in the Basic tab Inch specifications 1 Display the Mach i ne defau It screen Display and check bypass setting mode when selecting
373. setting 1 47 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Auto low power time Perform the following procedure to set the amount of time that will elapse before the auto low power function automatically engages and puts the copier in the Low power mode if no operation has been performed on the copier during that time 1 Display the Machine default screen See 2 Accessing the machine default settings on page 7 41 Inch specifications Default setting Counter Bypass BOX Counter i setting Management p check j f Machine Document Register Print User i default j Management Pj orig size s report Adjustment py Copy default Metric specifications Default setting Counter ed ee Bypass Hard Disk Counter i setting Management Bj check j i Machine Document Register Print User default Management Pj orig size report j Adjustment By Select Low power mode chng time in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the Change key The Auto preheat time screen will be displayed Inch specifications Default setting Counter Default menu Setting mode Sleep mode changing time 60 Minute Low power mode chng time 15 Minute Select Copy output mode Inner tray Select FAX output mode Inner tray Select the main mode Copy mode Change y Default setting Metric specifications Default setting Counter 3 Touch the key or
374. size s report Adjustment By 2 Select Time difference in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the Change key The Time difference screen will be displayed Inch specifications Default setting Counter Silent mode On Date Time 2001 10 30 14 02 Time difference GMT 08 00 Management code change 5000 Change p Default menu Setting mode C Up i Key sound ON OFF On LV vo own Metric specifications Default setting Counter Default menu Setting mode Key sound ON OFF On La Silent mode Off v Date Time 30 10 01 14 02 Time difference GMT 08 00 Change MGMT code with 5000 Change y i Default setting Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Touch the key or the key to change the displayed time difference to the desired setting Inch specifications NOTE If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it touch the Back key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 4 Touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 5 Touch the Close key once again The touch panel will return to the Default setting screen 6 Touch the End key The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab 7 55 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Changing the management code Perform the following procedure to change the managem
375. sleep function engages if you use the copier frequently and to a shorter time if there are long intervals between use For more detailed information on the auto sleep function see page 4 11 Sets the amount of time that will elapse before the Low Power mode is automatically activated if no operation is performed on the copier during that time For more detailed information on the Low power mode see page 4 11 Sets the location for the ejection of finished copies This setting will only be displayed when the optional Document Finisher Built in Finisher or Job Separator is installed on your copier The available location for ejection will differ depending upon the optional equipment that is installed on your copier Sets the location for the ejection of received faxes This setting will only be displayed when the optional Fax Kit and Document Finisher or the Built in Finisher or Job Separator are installed on your copier The available location for ejection will differ depending upon the optional equipment that is installed on your copier Sets which operation mode the copy operation mode or the fax operation mode will be selected when the power is turned on to the copier Reference page Available settings Factory setting 60 minutes 7 Copy mode 1 5 15 30 45 60 90 120 180 240 minutes 1 5 15 30 45 60 90 120 180 240 minutes Inner tray Job separator Finis
376. specifications Default setting Counter Copy default j rene BOX Counter Management check Print User report i Adjustment rone Y Bypass setting Machine Document Register default Management Pj orig size s Metric specifications Default setting Counter R ee Bypass Hard Disk Counter setting Management Bj check Machine Document Register Print User default Management Pj orig size report j Adjustment 2 Select Display register key Display Register key in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the Change key The Display register key Display Register key screen will be displayed Inch specifications Default setting Counter Default menu i Setting mode i Modify Copy On Default Off a Display register key On Customize Main function Customize Add function Default setting Metric specifications Default setting Counter Default menu Setting mode Modify copy On Default Off A Display Register key On Customize Main function Customize Add function Change y Default setting 7 84 3 If you want the Register key to be displayed touch the On key If you do NOT want it to be displayed touch the Off key Inch specifications Able to use Register key on each screen Metric specifications Select to show Register key On Off Able to use Register key to registe
377. splayed setting without changing it touch the Back key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 4 Touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 5 Touch the Close key once again The touch panel will return to the Default setting screen 6 Touch the End key The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab Default operation mode Perform the following procedure to set whether the display that appears after power is turned on to the copier will be the one for the copy operation mode or for the fax operation mode NOTE This setting is only available when the optional Fax Kit is installed in your copier 4 Display the Machine default screen See 2 Accessing the machine default settings on page 7 41 Inch specifications Default setting Counter Default setting z ren Bypass BOX Counter F setting Management check j f Machine Document Register Print User i default Management orig size report Adjustment py Metric specifications Default setting Counter a ne Bypass Hard Disk Counter setting Management Bj check Machine Document Register Print User default gt Management Bj orig size report f Adjustment py Select Select the main mode Select main mode in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the Change key The S
378. ss the Start key Scanning of that next original will start 1 0 Once you have finished scanning all of the originals touch the Scanning finished key Copying will start 5 33 section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS 15 Original size selection mode With this mode if you manually select a size for the original only that size image will be scanned for copying Use this mode as well when copying from originals of non standard sizes 8 1 2 x11 A4 NOTES e You can register the size of non standard originals that you often use as a custom original size See 4 Original size registration on page 7 90 e ALWAYS set non standard sized originals on the platen e Once you select the original size under this mode you can copy with originals set on the platen even with the optional Document Processor open e If this mode is used in combination with the Centering Image shift mode you can for example have the image of non standard sized originals centered on standard sized copy paper See 4 Centering Image shift mode on page 5 8 1 Set the originals to be copied Touch the Function tab The content of the Function tab will be displayed 5 34 3 Touch the Select orig size Select size orig key The Select original size Select size original screen will be displayed Inch specifications Ready to copy Seen ea 100 Select 2 sided Combi paper
379. staple this size Stapling is not possible with small size paper For details see the optional Document Cannot staple this paper size Finisher s Operation Guide Empty waste punch box The hole punch chad container in the optional Document Finisher is full Refer to the Operation Guide for your Document Finisher and dispose of the waste hole punch chads Check the waste punch box The hole punch chad container in the optional Document Finisher is not set properly Check Punch Hole box Refer to the Operation Guide for your Document Finisher and set the hole punch chad container properly Replace the waste toner box The waste toner box is filled with waste toner Replace the waste toner box with a new one 2 If one of these indicators lights or flashes If one of the indicators to the left of the Copier key the Printer key or the Scanner key either lights orange or flashes orange carry out the appropriate procedure indicated below Procedure Reference page Lights orange or flashes Check the appropriate response to the orange message and perform the corresponding procedure 9 3 section 9 TROUBLESHOOTING 3 When paper misfeeds If a paper misfeed occurs a message will be displayed in the touch panel about the misfeed and copying will stop Leave the power switch ON and refer to 2 Removal procedures to remove the jammed paper Inch specification Metric spec
380. t 001 010 l Default setting Management i NOTE Metric specifications If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it touch the Back key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 Department Order of 0001 ard Sales Dept E a Crj 4 Use the numeric keys on the keypad to enter the maximum A 7th gt Down number of originals that can be scanned under this ID code 001 010 an The scanning limit can be set to any 1 page increment up to 999 999 Inch specifications 2 Select Fax transm Limitation under the Setting item column on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the f Change key 1 999 999 The Fax transm Limitation screen will be displayed Inch specifications permitted 1st Sales Dept Setting item Value i egi i q Printer limitation On Metric specifications Output limitation No limit Scanner limitation No limit Fax Transm Limitation No limit Management Management ed 1 999 999 Limited value 999 999 Metric specifications No limit 1st Sales Dept Setting item Value Copy limitation On LA Printer limitation On Output limitation No limit y i Scanner limitation No limit UO Touch the Close key Fax Transm Limitation No limit The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 Default setting Management Management edit j 7 12 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
381. t orig size gt report j Adjustment Dy Metric specifications Default setting Counter z ne Bypass Hard Disk Counter i setting j Management Bj check Machine Document Register Print User default Management orig size s report Adjustmen 7 91 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS 5 Touch the On key The drum refreshing process will begin Inch specifications Refresh the drum when im on the image l Default setting User adjustment Metric specifications Refresh the drum when image blur or white dots appear on the image The Now drum refreshing message will appear and the paper is fed from the multi bypass tray to execute drum refreshing Inch specifications Orig page Count Set Metric specifications Original Count Set NOTE To cancel drum refreshing press the Stop Clear key When drum refreshing completes after ejecting the paper the touch panel will return to the Drum refresh screen 6 Touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 4 T7 Touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 3 8 Touch the End key The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab 7 92 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS 6 Checking the total counter and printing out the counter report Perform this procedure when you want to check on the touch panel 3 The total number o
382. t 999 Set Setting mode l Default setting a Lv Change y La TEA Change y Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Touch the Rotate key if you want to make the Auto Rotation mode the default setting in the initial mode Inch specifications Select default mode for Auto Rotation ON or OFF No Rotate Select default mode of Auto Rotation ON or OFF NOTE If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it touch the Back key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 4 Touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 5 Touch the Close key once again The touch panel will return to the Default setting screen 6 Touch the End key The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab 7 79 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Margin width Perform the following procedure to determine the default value of the location and width of the margins in the margin mode 1 Display the Copy default screen See 5 Accessing the copy default settings on page 7 62 Inch specifications Default setting Counter Za ronn Bypass BOX Counter i setting Management Bj check j f Machine Document Register Print User default Management Pj orig size report Adjustment py Metric specifications Default setting Counter Bypass Hard Disk Counter setting Management c
383. t for open faced originals gt Paper size Paper size OAAD Check direction Set book original top side direction to back Check direction Check direction of H Left top sackede MA 7 Press the Start key Scanning of the originals will start If you set the originals in the optional Document Processor copying will start automatically If you set an original on the platen a message will appear telling you to set the next original In this case go to the next step D O mA DOO Ox Clear Start POO ZA DOO 8 Replace the first original with the next one and press the Start key Scanning of that next original will start Once you have finished scanning all of the originals touch the Scanning finished key Copying will start section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS 3 Making a margin space on the copies Margin mode 1 Standard margin Inch specifications The image of the original can be shifted to the left or right and up or down to make a margin blank space on the copy The width of each margin can be set to any 1 8 increment between 1 8 and 3 4 A setting of 0 will leave no margin space Metric specifications The image of the original can be shifted to the left or right and up or down to make a margin blank space on the copy The width of each margin can be set to any 1 mm increment between 1 mm and 18 mm A setting of 0 will leave no margin space NOTES
384. t is out of order Call service Clean the slit glass for original fed from DP Clean the slit glass for original fed Attach Finisher Finisher is out of order Detach Finisher Paper capacity exceeded Remove paper from Finisher Remove paper form inner tray of Finisher Procedure Reference Open and close the front cover If the same message appears again make a note of the C and the number appearing with it turn the power switch OFF O unplug the power cord from the outlet and contact your service representative or authorized service center Periodic maintenance is necessary to keep your copier in good condition Contact your service representative or an authorized service center as soon as possible The Document Processor original cover of the optional document processor is open Close the cover securely The copier memory is full Either print out or clear all scanned data It is not possible to copy or scan another original until one of these two operations is performed The copier memory size and the capacity for scanning originals are shown below Number of originals that can be scanned Standard memory 64MB approximately 322 pages When the optional Hard Disk is installed 20GB approximately 70 000 pages When using our standard original A4 original 6 text The maximum number of originals that can be scanned at one time is 999 11 x 8 1 2 A4
385. t to allow the use of printer drivers other than those available under copy management NOTE This setting will only be available when On is selected as the Printer function management ON OFF setting 1 Select Others Mgt Reg print under the Setting item column on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the Change key The Others Mgt Reg print screen will be displayed Inch specifications Setting item Value Print Managem Printer error report Others Mgt Reg print Copy Printer output mgt Scanner Managem Fax Management l Default setting Management Managem Def set Metric specifications Setting item Value Print managem Printer error report Others mgt Reg print Copy Printer output mgt Scanner Managem Fax Management Default setting Management Managem Def set Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS To allow the use of printer drivers other than those available under copy management touch the On key Inch specifications Output of print is possible for unspecif ID code Output of print is possible for unspecif ID code NOTE If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it touch the Back key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 1 Touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 1 7 29 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Co
386. tem Value i Printer limitation On Output limitation No limit Scanner limitation No limit Fax Transm Limitation No limit Default setting Management Management edit 7 11 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS 3 To set the maximum number of originals that can be scanned Fax transmission restrictions under this ID code touch the Counter limit key and proceed Perform the following procedure when you want to set the maximum to the next step number of documents that can be transmitted under the To allow unlimited scanning touch the No limit key and to corresponding department ID code when the optional Fax Kit is cancel scanning privileges completely touch the Is not installed in your copier permitted key and proceed to step 5 Inch specifications NOTE This setting will only be available when On is selected as the Fax function management ON OFF setting No limit 1 Access the screen that contains the copy restriction setting items See Register new department ID codes on page 7 4 or Metric specifications Change restrictions for use on page 7 20 canner limitation Inch specifications Close Department Order of iF indication 5 01 1st Sales Dept 02 2nd Sales Dept Mgt Inf 0001 3rd Sales Dept correction py in use No limit limit i Is not permited 0014 4th Sales Dept 00000015 5th Sales Dept 00000016 6th Sales Dept 00000017 7th Sales Dep
387. tep 0 5 step 1 step 7 64 step adjustment of the copy exposure Original quality Determines the default setting that will be used for Text Photo Text Text Photo 7 65 the image quality in the initial mode Photo Eco print mode ON OFF Determines whether the Eco print mode will be the On Off Off 7 66 default setting in the initial mode In this case the amount of toner that is used to make the copies will be reduced and images will be printed out relatively lighter than normal Background exposure Adjusts the ground color of the copied paper 2 2 Standard setting 7 67 adjustment 0 Paper selection Sets whether the copier will automatically select the APS Default 7 68 same size of copy paper as the original once an drawer cassette original is set APS auto paper selection mode or whether the drawer cassette selected Default drawer Default cassette setting will be automatically selected Paper type auto paper Sets which types of paper can be selected under the Off On 7 69 selection mode auto paper selection mode It is possible to select the type of paper that has Plain been designated for the drawer cassette currently Preprinted in use Recycled Letterhead Color Colour Prepunched Rough Bond High quality Vellum Custom 1 Custom 8 Default drawer cassette Sets one drawer cassette that will be selected 1st paper 1st paper 7 70 automatically regardless of the size of paper loaded
388. ter Sett Management Management Each Mgt Management Management total Total gt edit A Def Set A Metric specifications Managem Total Register Sett Management Each Mot Management Management total gt Total gt edit A Def Set j 7 16 3 Select the department ID code that you want to delete and then touch the Delete key Inch specifications Close Department Order of _ _ indication 01 1st Sales Dept 02 2nd Sales Dept Mgt Inf Limit i 0001 3rd Sales Dept correction Dp in use 5 0014 4th Sales Dept 00000015 5th Sales Dept 00000016 6th Sales Dept 00000017 7th Sales Dept Delete 001 010 Register l Default setting Management Metric specifications Close Department Up Order of _ _ _ _ __a_a_a__ a indication j 01 1st Sales Dept 02 2nd Sales Dept Mgt Inf 0001 3rd Sales Dept correction gt in use 5 i 0014 4th Sales Dept 00000015 5th Sales Dept 00000016 6th Sales Dept 00000017 7th Sales Dept Delete 001 010 Register Default setting Management NOTE It is possible for you to change the order of how the list of ID codes is displayed To so touch the Order of indication key and then touch the Sort by code key and select either 1 9 or 9 1 or the Sort by Name key and select either A zZ or Z A as appropriate 4 Verify that this is the ID code that you wa
389. to exposure and manual exposure as the default copy exposure mode in the initial mode 1 Display the Copy default screen See 5 Accessing the copy default settings on page 7 62 Inch specifications Default setting Counter ie Language y Management y Bypass BOX Counter setting j Management Bj check j f Machine Document Register Print User i default Management Pj orig size gt report j Adjustment py Metric specifications Default setting Counter Bypass Hard Disk Counter F setting Management Bj check j i Machine Document Register Print User i default Management orig size s report Adjustment by 2 Select Exposure mode in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the Change key The Exposure mode screen will be displayed Inch specifications Default setting Counter Copy default Default menu i Setting mode Exposure mode Manual Exposure steps 1 step Original image quality Text Photo Eco Print Off Background exp adj Standard Metric specifications Default setting Counter Copy default Default menu Setting mode Exposure steps 1 step Image quality original Text Photo Eco Print Off Background exp adj Standard l Default setting Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS 3 Touch the Manual key or the Auto key as appropriate Inch specifications Select default mode of copy exposur
390. to sleep function If no operation is performed on the copier for a designated period of time adjustable between 1 and 240 minutes the auto sleep function will engage and automatically turn the power switch OFF O When you want to make copies again simply turn the power switch back ON The factory default setting is for 60 minutes ECO f J o Copiers are generally in a standby mode more than they are in actual operation so power consumption in the standby mode occupies a large part of overall consumption Having the copier enter a rest state after a certain amount of time or turning the power completely OFF O reduces unnecessary power consumption in the standby mode and as a result can save on electricity bills NOTES e The auto low power function will not engage when the copier is in the sleep mode e In order to change the amount of time that will elapse before the auto low power function engages see Auto low power time on page 7 48 In order to change the amount of time that will elapse before the auto sleep function engages see Auto sleep time on page 7 47 In order to disable the auto sleep function see Auto sleep ON OFF on page 7 57 If the optional Printer Kit or Printer Scanner Kit is installed in your copier the copier will enter the Sleep mode whenever the auto sleep function engages In this state when the copier detects data for a print job it will automatically recover to a print
391. to step 4 Metric specifications Touch the Printing key Print out will start 5 44 4 Use the keypad to enter the appropriate security code and the touch the Enter key If the entered code matches the registered one the Check details Reprint screen will be displayed Inch specifications Enter the re print code Metric specifications Check the contents of the selected job You can also check the content of the first page of the copy job by touching the Print from 1st Head print key Inch specifications Check details Reprin Details Orig page 3 Set 5 Print size 11 x 8 1 2 Input source copy Registration date 10 10 22 40 Print from ist J0b120 Metric specifications eck details Reprin Details Original 3 Print size A4D print Input source Copy Registration date 10 10 22 40 Once you have finished checking the content of the copy job touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 If you want to check the contents of another registered copy job repeat steps 2 through 5 Touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS 3 Deleting a registered copy jobs 1 Press the Repeat Copy key The Modify copy list will be displayed Ce n__n t gt Repeat Copy Job Build Au lt gt Job Queue
392. ty i numbering j Sort Cover Finished A Mode Function 2 Touch the Staple mode key The staple mode set up screen will appear Inch specifications Ready to Copy Paper size Sort Offset Staple ch Check direction Check directi f Fl eee aiana top de Sort Off Check direction Check direction of original section 8 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT Touch the key that corresponds to the desired stapling style Inch specifications Ready to copy wT save Check direction Check direction of Limited number of staple pages The limit is set in setting mode 1 staple tWhen selecting staple function q the offset can not be combined d 2 staples Metric specifications Ready to copy Check direction Check direction of original Limited number of pages to be stapled The limitation depends on setting mode l 1 staple l 2 staples Cannot combine sort function and staple Stapling will be accomplished as shown in the illustration as viewed from the front of the copies Set the originals to be copied Check the direction of the Original top side Press the Start key Scanning of the originals will start The number of scanned originals will be displayed Repeat this operation for all originals when using the platen After all the originals have been scanned touch the Scanning finished key Copying will be
393. ult conv outnut destination Job separator Inner tray i Finisher main tra Finisher sub tray Default setting Machine ueraun NOTES e The available location for ejection will differ depending upon the optional equipment that is installed on your copier e If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it touch the Back key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 4 Touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 5 Touch the Close key once again The touch panel will return to the Default setting screen 6 Touch the End key The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab 7 49 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Fax eject location Perform the following procedure to set where incoming faxes will be ejected NOTE This setting will only be displayed when the optional Fax Kit and Document Finisher or the Built in Finisher or Job Separator are installed on your copier 1 Display the Machine default screen See 2 Accessing the machine default settings on page 7 41 Inch specifications Default setting Counter efault setting Copy default gt Bypass setting j Machine Document Register Print default j Management Pj orig size s report BOX Counter Management P check j i User i Adjustment gt i Metric specifications Default setting Counter Bypass Hard Disk Co
394. unter determines the number of copies that have been made It is useful for copier centralized management on a department or even company level Document Tray The Document Tray lets you place originals and other documents next to the machine before using them etc It also contains space for storing paper Clips etc Printer Kit If the Printer Kit is installed this copier can be used as a printer Since the network board is equipped this copier can also be used as a network printer allowing access from multiple computers Printer Scanner Kit If the Printer Scanner Kit is installed this copier can be used as a printer or a network scanner Since the network board is equipped this copier can also be used as a network printer allowing access from multiple computers Fax Kit If the Fax Kit is installed this copier can be used as a fax Also if the Fax Kit is used together with the optional Printer Scanner Kit this copier can be used as a network fax allowing transmission and reception by a computer 10 11 Appendix Functions and settings combination chart This copier contains many different functions and settings and many of them can be used in combination for more efficient copying Refer to the following chart for details on combining specific functions and settings O Combination is possible Combination is NOT possible 01 Auto exposure adjustment is not available for the photo mode The text amp photo mode the text mode
395. unter i setting Management Bj check j i Machine Document Register Print User default Management Pj orig size s report Adjustment By 2 Select Select FAX output mode in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the Change key The Select FAX output mode screen will be displayed Inch specifications Default setting Counter achine default Default menu Setting mode Low power mode chng time 15 Minute Select Copy output mode Inner tray Select FAX output mode Inner tray Select the main mode Copy mode j Default setting Metric specifications Default setting Counter Default menu Setting mode Sleep mode changing time 60 Minute Low power mode chng time 15 Minute Select COPY output mode Inner tray Select FAX output mode Inner tray Select main mode COPY Mode l Default setting i 7 50 3 Touch the key that corresponds to the desired location Inch specifications Set the default fax outout destination Job separator MailBox 1 Inner tray Finisher sub tray l Default setting Machine ueiaui Metric specifications Set the default fax outnut destination Job Mailbox 1 separator Inner tray Finisher sub tra l Default setting Machine usiauit NOTES e The available location for ejection will differ depending upon the optional equipment that is installed on your copier e If you want to quit the di
396. ur copier 4 Touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 5 Touch the Close key once again The touch panel will return to the Default setting screen 6 Touch the End key The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab Cover drawer cassette Perform the following procedure to set which drawer cassette will be used to feed the cover sheets in the cover mode the booklet stitching mode and the book to booklet mode 1 Display the Copy default screen See 5 Accessing the copy default settings on page 7 62 Inch specifications Default setting Counter sr Bypass BOX Counter setting Management Bj check s Machine Document Register Print User default Management Bj orig size s report Adjustment py Language Copy default gt Metric specifications Default setting Counter Bypass Hard Disk Counter setting Management Pj check gt Machine Document Register Print User default Management orig size s report Adjustment by 2 Select Drawer for cover paper Cassette for cover paper in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the Change key The Drawer for cover paper Cassette for cover paper screen will be displayed Inch specifications Default setting Counter Default menu i Setting mode Select paper type APS Plain Default drawer
397. ure mode if the next batch of copying is started before the auto clear function engages Automatic drawer cassette switching function If two drawers cassettes contain the same size of paper and the paper in one drawer cassette runs out during copying the automatic drawer cassette switching function will switch to paper feed from the other drawer cassette that still contains paper NOTES e The automatic drawer cassette switching function can be turned OFF See Auto drawer cassette switching ON OFF on page 7 42 e Paper must be loaded in the same orientation in both drawers cassettes e Only drawers cassettes that are loaded with the same type of paper can be used with the automatic drawer cassette switching function 2 4 Section 2 NAMES OF PARTS 3 Touch panel Inch specifications Paper Size LIJ 11x8 l 1 11x8 Plain 2 8 x11 3 11x8 2 E Bypass EE Plain Plain d 11x8 2 Recycled Metric specifications Paper Size HAAD E Bypass Fe Plain Section 2 NAMES OF PARTS 1 This area displays messages on the machine s status and on operational procedures 2 This area displays information on the size of paper in the drawer cassette and the current copy magnification ratio 3 This area displays the current number of copies to be made 4 Paper size keys Remaining paper volume icons Touch these keys when you want to change the currently selected drawer
398. urled folded or wrinkled Replace the paper with new paper 3 1 Is there any misfed paper or loose scraps of Carry out the appropriate procedure to 9 4 paper remaining inside the copier remove the paper Copies are wrinkled Is the separation in the paper feed section Clean the separator 10 1 dirty Black or white lines appear Is the electrostatic section dirty Open the front cover and pull and push back 10 5 on the copy in the cleaning shaft 9 14 section 10 MAINTENANCE AND OPERATION INFORMATION 1 Cleaning the copier NOTE A C U O N When the slit glass becomes dirty Clean the slit glass for original fed from DP Clean the slit glass for original fed may appear In this case perform the cleaning operation on the slit glass and then touch For safety purposes ALWAYS remove the power the End key plug from the outlet when performing cleaning operations Inch specifications Clean the slit glass for original fed from DP O Cleaning the original cover l F 1 Open the document processor i E i ase l f Z Clean the surface of narrower glass Lift open the original cover Wipe the back side of the original cover Uf located at left with a dry cloth l Mog 3 Please close the document processor with a soft cloth dampened with alcohol or a mild detergent AZ 4 Press END key will appear on the copy Never use thinner or other organic solvents for this purpose p E a ie aac
399. wers cassettes With the content of the Basic tab displayed press the Default Setting Counter key The Default setting screen will be displayed anagement Interrupt Reset 4 Stop Clear 2 Touch the Print report key Inch specifications Default setting Counter A oe d Bypass BOX setting Machine Document Register default gt Management orig size gt Counter check j f Print User i report Adjustment py Metric specifications ee Bypass Hard Disk Counter setting j Management D check Machine Document Register Print User default Management Bj orig size gt report Adjustment By 3 Use the keypad to enter the 4 digit management code The factory default setting for 30 com copiers is 3000 for 40 cpm copiers is 4000 and for 50 com copiers is 5000 Inch specifications Enter the administrator number Close i Metric specifications Enter the administrator number Close i NOTE It is possible for you to change the 4 digit management code See Changing the management code on page 7 56 Once the Print report menu screen is displayed touch the Copy report key the Machine report key or the Toner coverage key as appropriate Inch specifications Print report Copy report Toner coverage Machine report Default setting Metric specifications Print report Machine report
400. will be accomplished as shown in the illustration at the top and from the front of the copies 7 Built in Finisher The finisher stores a large quantity of copies It can also sorts multiple copies into sets by shifting the eject position Paginated copies can be stapled too 4 Sort tray 2 Finisher tray 8 9 section 8 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT Sorted copies are ejected to the Sort tray 3 Remove the empty staple cartridge from the staple holder When setting large size paper such as 8 1 2 x 11 A4R or larger pull out the support extension G Refilling the Stapling Unit 1 Open the stapler front cover towards you 2 Pull out the staple holder 6 8 10 Hold the staple holder in one hand and the new staple cartridge in the other and insert the new staple cartridge making sure the direction of insertion is correct The arrow on the staple cartridge indicates the correct direction of insertion Make sure the new staple cartridge is completely inserted all the way into the staple holder and then remove the paper tape covering the staple cartridge Replace the staple holder back in its original position in the Stapling Unit Once it has been fully inserted it will click into place 2 Clearing a staple jam 4 Remove the staple cartridge referring to the G Refilling the Stapling Unit Push up on the tab A on the protective faceplate in order to raise the fa
401. will be displayed Metric specifications Derant Setting Management Interrupt L i O E D AO A DOO QE 7 8 9 English Deutsch Fran ais i Espanol Italiano Clear Default setting 2 Touch the Language key The Language screen will be displayed Inch specifications Default setting Counter Bypass BOX Counter settin Management Bj check Machine Document Register Print User default i Management Bj orig size gt report j Adjustment P i Metric specifications Default setting Counter a Bypass Hard Disk Counter settin Management Bj check f Machine Document Register Print User i default Management orig size s report Adjustment pj 7 103 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS 11 Entering characters Use the following screens to enter characters when registering names Capital keyboard for programs and for departments etc 1 Character input screens Inch specifications Letter keyboard Q Entry field Displays entered information 2 Capital key Touch this key when you want to enter uppercase letters 3 Letter key Touch this key when you want to enter lowercase letters 4 Num Sym key Touch this key when you want to enter numerals and symbols 5 Space key Touch this key when you want to enter a space 6 AllDel key Touch this key when you want to delete all characters that have been entered to this point
402. will be displayed Metric specifications Inch specifications Select function 25 10 01 20 Document name JOB002 Shared Data Box Synergy Print Box Form box This document will be deleted Are you sure GRG aisan AAP l Document Document Document Document Form i reg gt printing reg printing gt reg gt Box Box Box 4 Editing j Editing i Editing If you selected Yes the selected documents will be deleted Metric specifications and the touch panel will return to the screen in step 3 Select function If you selected No the touch panel will return to the screen i 2 0 in step 3 without deleting the selected documents Shared Data Box Synergy Print Box Form box d fe fe TA peeeeesees soseesesse PE AAR ATA 5 If you want to delete other stored documents repeat steps 3 Document Document Document Document Form i and 4 registr 5 printing y registr f printing gt registr 5 Box Box Box i q Editing j Editing Editing E 6 Touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 Touch the End key The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab 3 Select the documents that you want to delete and then touch the Delete key A verification screen will be displayed Inch specifications indication LJ Job 005 1 25 10 01 details j Job 003 1 25 10 01 F Q Job 002 1 25 10 01 O Job 001 1 25 10 01 W conn Delete
403. word field touch the Close key Reset i Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS 6 T If you want to delete all of the data in that box select Reset Box A verification screen will be displayed Touch the Yes key or the No key as appropriate Inch specifications Box No 007 Box name _ABCD_0000101 Reset this Box Do you really want to reset Metric specifications Box No 007 Box name _ABCD_0000101 Reset this Box Do you really want to reset If you selected Yes all the data in the selected box will be deleted and the touch panel will return to the screen in step 9 If you selected No the touch panel will return to the screen in step 3 without deleting any data Touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 Touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 1 Touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the Default setting screen Touch the Eng key The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab 7 97 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Document save time 4 Touch the Document save term Document saving key under Synergy Print Box The Document data saving term Document data save period screen will be displayed Inch specifications Document Management Document Manageme j Shared Data Box Synergy
404. y Printer error report Others Mgt Reg print Copy Printer output mgt i Scanner Managem i Inch specifications Fax Management i Default setting Management Managem Def set Copy management can be set up Metric specifications Close Value Print managem LA Printer error report Others mgt Reg print Y Copy Printer output mgt i r ugi Scanner Managem Change y Metric specifications Fax Management j i Default setting Management Managem Def set Copy management can be set up NOTE Perform the following procedure that corresponds to the desired setting NOTE If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it touch the Back key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 1 Touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 1 7 26 Printer function management ON OFF Perform the following procedure when you want to turn copy management ON or OFF for the printer functions of this machine NOTE This setting is only available when the optional Printer Kit or Printer Scanner Kit is installed in your copier 1 Select Print Managem under the Setting item column on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the Change key The Print Managem screen will be displayed Inch specifications nagem Def Set Setting item Value Print Managem Printer error
405. y Press Scanning finished key when starting copy Job Build Step4 1 sided 2 sided Copy Select paper gt Original type y ca AMS Back Edge f Reduce Orig set Touch the Bypass key Touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 13 Inch specifications Scan next original s Place the originals and press start key Press Scanning finished key when starting copy B Bypass Plain 812x14 Plain Metric specifications Scan next original s Place the originals and press start key Press Scanning finished key when starting copy Select paper a 3 Ad OD B Bypass J Colour Plain Set the third original C to be copied Press the Start key Scanning of the original will start Print from Rear page Scanning finished Scanning i finished i Step 5 Leaving the back side of the third original C blank 1 Touch the Print from Front page key Leaving the back side of the original blank will allow the next copy to start on the front side of the next page Inch specifications Scan next original s Place the originals and press start key Press Scanning finished key when starting copy Job Build Step5 Cancel Insert page L 11x84 1 sided Select Original paper type j q Offset AMS Back Edge JJ oy a 2 sided copy Print from Front page Scanning i finished Metric speci
406. y On Default Off A Display Register key On Customize Main function Customize Add function Change y l Default setting Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS 3 If you want to prohibit repeat copying touch the Off key If you want to make repeat copying the default setting in the initial mode touch the On key Inch specifications Select ON to activate Modifv Coov or OFF to inactf ate it Function Default Select ON to activate Modifv Coov or OFF to inactiv fe it Function Default NOTE If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it touch the Back key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 4 Touch the Close key The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 5 Touch the Close key once again The touch panel will return to the Default setting screen 6 Touch the End key The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab 7 83 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Registration keys ON OFF Perform the following procedure to set whether or not to allow a Register key to be displayed in the screen for those function and modes which can be registered under the registration keys Functions and or modes can only be registered under registration keys through the Register key 1 Display the Copy default screen See 5 Accessing the copy default settings on page 7 62 Inch
407. y the Copy default screen See 5 Accessing the copy default settings on page 7 62 Inch specifications Default setting Counter Bypass BOX Counter i setting Management Bj check j f Machine Document Register Print User i default Management Pj orig size s report Adjustment Dy Metric specifications Default setting Counter Bypass Hard Disk Counter f setting Management Bj check gt Machine Document Register Print User default Management Pj orig size gt report j Adjustment by Select Default magnification Default mode in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the Change key The Default magnification Default mode screen will be displayed Inch specifications Default setting Counter Default menu Setting mode Select paper type APS Plain Default drawer ist paper Drawer for cover paper Bypass Default magnification Manual Default setting Metric specifications Default setting Counter Default menu Setting mode Select paper type APS Plain Default cassette 1st paper Cassette for cover paper Bypass Default mode Manual Default setting 3 Touch the Manual key or the AMS key as appropriate Inch specifications Select default magnification mode Select default zoom mode If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it touch the Back
408. ying will begin and the copies will be automatically punched and ejected face down onto the tray 8 Remove all of the finished copies from the tray 5 Document Finisher The Document Finisher stores a large quantity copies and sorts multiple sets by shifting the position that each one is ejected It is also possible to use the Document Finisher to staple the copy sets or punch holes in them for filling purposes For detailed information on the sort mode refer to the Operation Guide for the Document Finisher For more information on the corresponding procedures refer to 4 Document Finisher on page 8 5 of this guide Stacking mode If the number of copies to be made in the Non sort mode is set to a number greater than the acceptable limit 250 sheets the finished copies will be ejected onto the Sort tray section 8 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT 6 Document Finisher The Document Finisher stores a large quantity copies and sorts multiple sets Sort ON or groups copies made from multiple Originals with all the copies produced from an individual original grouped together in one set Sort OFF It is also possible to use the Document Finisher to staple sorted copy sets For detailed information on the sort mode refer to the Operation Guide for the Document Finisher For more information on the corresponding procedures refer to 4 Document Finisher on page 8 5 of this guide Stapling

Kyocera 3035 Copier User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents